Palm Lifedrive User Guide
LifeDrive - User Guide lifedrive Free User Guide for Palm Mobile Phone, Manual - page1
2015-07-27
: Palm Palm-Lifedrive-User-Guide-777781 palm-lifedrive-user-guide-777781 palm pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 724
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
User Guide Copyright and Trademark © 2005 palmOne, Inc. All rights reserved. palmOne, Addit, Blazer, Graffiti, HotSync, LifeDrive, Palm, Palm Powered, Palm OS, the Palm logo, and VersaMail are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to palmOne, Inc. All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners. palmOne, Inc. uses the Bluetooth wireless technology trademark under express license from Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and uses the Wi-Fi wireless technology trademark under express license from the Wi-Fi Alliance. Pocket Tunes is a trademark of NormSoft, Inc. WiFile is a trademark of Hands High Software, Inc. MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, GP. Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the use of this software. palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the accompanying software program(s). Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the End User Software License Agreement. Software Download Available Palm® Desktop software is supplied on a CD. If you do not have access to a CD drive for your computer, you can download Palm Desktop software from www.palmOne.com/lifedrive-userguide/ LifeDrive from palmOne ii Table of Contents About This Guide .................................................................xxi Tips for viewing this guide........................................................................xxi What’s in this guide? ................................................................................xxii Step-by-step instructions.................................................................. xxii Links.................................................................................................... xxii Sidebars....................................................................................................xxiii Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer ......1 What’s in the box? ........................................................................................2 System requirements ...................................................................................2 Step 1: Charging your device.......................................................................4 What you should know about your device’s battery.......................... 5 Step 2: Turning on your device for the first time .......................................6 Step 3: Installing your software ...................................................................7 Step 4: Connecting your device to your computer ....................................8 Switching to another desktop software application ................................10 Using user profiles......................................................................................11 Creating a user profile .........................................................................12 Synchronizing with a user profile ......................................................14 Related topics..............................................................................................17 Chapter 2: Your Mobile Manager .........................................18 What’s on my device? ................................................................................19 Front ..................................................................................................... 19 Top........................................................................................................ 21 Side....................................................................................................... 22 Back ...................................................................................................... 23 Bottom.................................................................................................. 24 Using the power switch..............................................................................25 Using the status bar....................................................................................26 LifeDrive from palmOne iii Rotating the screen.....................................................................................27 What’s on the screen? ................................................................................28 Input area ............................................................................................. 28 Application controls ............................................................................ 29 What software is on my device?................................................................30 What’s on the CD? ......................................................................................32 Related topics..............................................................................................36 Chapter 3: Moving Around in Applications.........................38 Opening applications..................................................................................39 Using Favorites.................................................................................... 39 Using Applications .............................................................................. 40 Using Files............................................................................................ 41 Working with files and folders ........................................................... 43 Sorting Files ......................................................................................... 45 Opening files and folders from within an application...................... 46 Switching between applications ........................................................ 46 Using the 5-way navigator .........................................................................47 Moving around with the 5-way .......................................................... 47 Moving around in Favorites View ...................................................... 49 Moving around in Applications View ................................................ 49 Moving around in list screens and entry screens............................. 50 Moving around in dialog boxes ......................................................... 50 Moving around in menus ................................................................... 51 Using menus ..............................................................................................52 Using the Command stroke................................................................ 53 Using the Command toolbar .............................................................. 53 Finding information ...................................................................................54 Related topics..............................................................................................55 Chapter 4: Entering Information on Your Device ................56 How can I enter information on my device?.............................................57 Entering information with Graffiti® 2 writing ...........................................57 Writing in the input area ..................................................................... 57 Using full-screen writing..................................................................... 58 LifeDrive from palmOne iv Writing Graffiti 2 characters ...............................................................60 Graffiti 2 alphabet................................................................................ 62 Graffiti 2 numbers ............................................................................... 63 Graffiti 2 gestures ................................................................................ 67 Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters ..................68 Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters ......................................... 69 Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts ................................................................70 Graffiti 2 ShortCuts.............................................................................. 71 Entering information with the onscreen keyboard ..................................72 Entering info from Contacts into another application .............................74 Editing information.....................................................................................76 Selecting information.......................................................................... 76 Copying and pasting information ......................................................77 Deleting information ...........................................................................78 Related topics..............................................................................................79 Chapter 5: Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer ...........................................80 Program memory and the hard drive .......................................................81 How can I work with information? ............................................................82 LifeDrive™ Manager and Drive Mode.......................................................83 LifeDrive Manager ............................................................................... 83 Drive Mode........................................................................................... 83 Using LifeDrive Manager ...........................................................................84 Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager icon ...........85 Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager window .....88 Renaming a file or folder ....................................................................91 Deleting a file or folder .......................................................................92 Deleting sync items from your computer when they are deleted from your device ...........................................................................93 Using Drive Mode ......................................................................................94 Synchronizing information ........................................................................98 Doing a full sync ..................................................................................98 Synchronizing using the cable .........................................................100 Synchronizing using LifeDrive Manager ......................................... 101 LifeDrive from palmOne v Creating sync items ...........................................................................101 Doing a folder sync ...........................................................................102 Locating sync items on your computer ........................................... 103 Entering information using desktop software ................................ 104 Customizing your synchronization settings .................................... 107 Choosing how your computer responds to synchronization requests ...........................................................108 Setting synchronization options ......................................................110 Choosing whether application information is updated ..................111 Installing applications to your device .............................................. 116 Using Quick Install .............................................................................117 Installing applications from a Mac computer ................................. 118 Using the Send To Handheld droplet .............................................. 118 Using commands in the HotSync menu ..........................................119 Other ways of managing information .....................................................120 Importing information from other applications.............................. 121 Restoring archived items on your computer .................................. 123 Installing the additional software from the CD ............................... 124 Checking space and version numbers .............................................125 Removing information .............................................................................127 Removing an application from your device .................................... 127 Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer ............... 128 Related topics............................................................................................130 Chapter 6: Managing Your Contacts ..................................131 Adding a contact ......................................................................................132 Entering additional contact information ..........................................135 Selecting contact field types .............................................................136 Defining custom fields ......................................................................137 Selecting a contact as your business card ......................................138 Copying contact information into multiple contacts ............................139 Locating a contact on your list ................................................................140 Deleting a contact ....................................................................................141 Customizing the Contacts list .................................................................142 Making connections from Contacts.........................................................144 LifeDrive from palmOne vi Using Quick Connect .........................................................................144 Customizing Quick Connect settings ...............................................146 Using Tap-to-Connect .......................................................................147 Working with Contacts on your computer..............................................149 Related topics............................................................................................150 Chapter 7: Managing Your Calendar ..................................151 Scheduling events ....................................................................................152 Scheduling an appointment .............................................................152 Scheduling an event without a start time .......................................154 Scheduling a repeating event—standard interval ..........................156 Scheduling a repeating event—unusual interval ............................157 Scheduling an event that is longer than a day ...............................159 Entering a location or a note for an event .......................................160 Scheduling an event with a time zone .............................................162 Color-coding your schedule .....................................................................163 Managing your color-codes ..............................................................164 Assigning a color code to an event ..................................................166 Setting an alarm .......................................................................................167 Rescheduling an event ............................................................................168 Deleting events .........................................................................................170 Deleting a specific event ...................................................................170 Deleting all your old events ..............................................................172 Checking your schedule ...........................................................................173 Viewing your appointments and tasks together .............................173 Viewing your daily schedule ............................................................175 Viewing your weekly schedule .........................................................177 Viewing your monthly schedule ......................................................178 Viewing a yearly calendar .................................................................179 Finding events that overlap .............................................................. 180 Customizing your calendar ......................................................................180 Customizing display options for your calendar ..............................181 Setting alarm and time options ........................................................184 Working with Calendar on your computer .............................................186 Related topics............................................................................................187 LifeDrive from palmOne vii Chapter 8: Your Microsoft Office Manager ........................188 Creating and managing Office files .........................................................189 Opening files from within Documents ....................................................190 Related topics............................................................................................191 Chapter 9: Viewing Your Photos and Videos ....................192 Reformatting files and copying supported file types.............................193 Viewing photos or videos .......................................................................194 Viewing a slide show ........................................................................ 198 Rotating a photo ................................................................................ 200 Viewing and editing photo or video details............................................202 Organizing photos and videos .................................................................205 Organizing photos or videos into albums .......................................205 Moving a photo or video within and between albums ..................207 Sorting photos and videos ............................................................... 209 Personalizing a photo ...............................................................................210 Drawing on a photo ...........................................................................210 Adding audio to a photo ...................................................................212 Copying a photo or video ........................................................................214 Deleting a photo or video ........................................................................215 Sharing photos and videos ......................................................................216 Related topics............................................................................................217 Chapter 10: Managing Your Camera Card Media..............218 Copying photos and videos from your camera card ............................219 Viewing photos or videos .......................................................................221 Related topics............................................................................................223 Chapter 11: Listening to Music...........................................224 Benefits ......................................................................................................224 Transferring music from a CD to your device using Rhapsody ...........230 Managing playlists....................................................................................233 Creating a playlist ..............................................................................233 Playing songs from a playlist ...........................................................235 Editing a playlist ................................................................................236 LifeDrive from palmOne viii Deleting a playlist ..............................................................................238 Customizing your player ..........................................................................239 Turning off the screen .......................................................................239 Setting background preferences ......................................................240 Flashing the LED when the pTunes console is turned off ..............241 Working with Rhapsody on your computer ...........................................242 Related topics............................................................................................243 Chapter 12: Managing Your Tasks ......................................244 Creating a task ..........................................................................................245 Setting an alarm ................................................................................246 Scheduling a repeating task—standard interval .............................247 Scheduling a repeating task—unusual interval ..............................249 Organizing your tasks ..............................................................................251 Marking a task as complete ....................................................................252 Deleting tasks ...........................................................................................253 Deleting a specific task ......................................................................253 Deleting all your completed tasks ....................................................254 Customizing your Tasks list ....................................................................255 Working with Tasks on your computer ...................................................257 Related topics............................................................................................258 Chapter 13: Writing Memos................................................259 Creating a memo .....................................................................................260 Viewing and editing a memo ..................................................................261 Moving memos in your memos list .......................................................262 Deleting a memo ......................................................................................263 Working with Memos on your computer................................................264 Related topics............................................................................................265 Chapter 14: Writing Notes in Note Pad..............................266 Creating a note .........................................................................................267 Choosing the pen and paper (background) colors .........................268 Setting an alarm ................................................................................269 Viewing and editing a note .....................................................................271 LifeDrive from palmOne ix Deleting a note .........................................................................................272 Working with Note Pad on your computer .............................................273 Related topics............................................................................................274 Chapter 15: Recording Voice Memos.................................275 Creating a voice memo ...........................................................................276 Creating a quick voice memo using the application button ..........276 Creating a longer voice memo using the pause control ................278 Listening to a voice memo ......................................................................281 Setting an alarm for a voice memo ........................................................283 Storing voice memos ..............................................................................285 Saving a voice memo to another location ......................................285 Automatically storing all voice memos on an expansion card .....287 Related topics............................................................................................288 Chapter 16: Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections ...........289 What can I do with the built-in Wi-Fi® wireless technology?................290 What types of connections can I make?..................................................290 Wi-Fi signal strength indicator.................................................................291 Setting up a Wi-Fi network connection ..................................................292 Setting up a connection for Wi-Fi synchronization ...............................298 Accessing email and the web with Wi-Fi ...............................................302 Setting up a Wi-Fi device-to-device network .........................................304 Related topics............................................................................................310 Chapter 17: Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections ... 311 What can I do with the built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology? ........312 What types of connections can I make? .......................................... 312 What is device discovery? ................................................................ 313 Entering basic Bluetooth settings............................................................314 Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection .............................................315 Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth .......................................320 Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization .......................322 Setting up a connection to a Bluetooth network ...................................327 Creating trusted devices ..........................................................................329 LifeDrive from palmOne x Setting advanced Bluetooth features .....................................................331 Storing recently found device names ..............................................331 Allowing your device to wake up when it is turned off ..................332 Related topics............................................................................................333 Chapter 18: Sending and Receiving Email Messages ......334 Upgrading an existing email account ....................................................335 About email accounts ...............................................................................336 Using an email provider ................................................................... 336 Using a corporate email account ..................................................... 337 VPNs ................................................................................................... 338 Connecting to a VPN .........................................................................339 Creating an account..................................................................................340 Transferring settings from an existing account ..............................341 Setting up an account on your computer: Common providers .....343 Setting up an account on your computer: Other providers ...........346 Entering advanced account settings on your computer ................349 Setting up an account on your device .............................................354 Setting advanced mail options on your device ..............................357 Testing your new account ................................................................ 358 Editing an account............................................................................. 359 Editing an account on your computer .............................................359 Editing an account on your device ...................................................360 Deleting an account ...........................................................................361 Adding ESMTP to an account ...........................................................362 Getting and reading messages ................................................................363 Auto Sync with notification .............................................................. 364 Scheduling Auto Sync .......................................................................365 Auto Sync notifications..................................................................... 366 Setting alert options ..........................................................................367 Viewing and using the Reminders screen....................................... 368 Auto Sync retries ............................................................................... 369 Resource issues with Auto Sync ...................................................... 369 Inbox icons in the VersaMail application ........................................ 370 Setting preferences for getting messages ......................................370 LifeDrive from palmOne xi Reading email messages .................................................................. 373 Adding or updating a contact directly from a message................. 374 Sending an email message ......................................................................375 Entering an address using Smart Addressing ................................377 Entering an address directly in the To field ....................................378 Entering an address using Contacts ................................................379 Attaching a personal signature ........................................................380 Send retry ...........................................................................................381 Send retry notifications..................................................................... 381 Modifying messages in the Outbox................................................. 382 Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications.................................... 382 Working with email folders ......................................................................383 Viewing another folder .....................................................................383 Customizing the appearance of the message list ...........................384 Moving messages between folders .................................................386 Creating and editing mail folders .....................................................388 Working with email messages ................................................................389 Forwarding an email message .........................................................389 Replying to an email message .........................................................390 Setting reply preferences ..................................................................391 Working with URLs, email addresses, and phone numbers in a message....................................................................................... 393 Deleting a message ...........................................................................393 Deleting old messages ......................................................................394 Emptying the trash ............................................................................396 Setting the trash to be emptied automatically ................................397 Marking messages as read or unread .............................................398 Working with attachments .......................................................................399 Working with a downloaded attachment ........................................400 Saving attachments ...........................................................................403 Attaching files to outgoing messages .............................................404 Advanced VersaMail application features ..............................................406 Creating and using filters.................................................................. 406 Turning filters on and off ..................................................................409 Editing or deleting a filter .................................................................411 LifeDrive from palmOne xii Setting connection preferences .......................................................412 Setting server preferences ................................................................413 Changing email header details......................................................... 415 Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly................................... 416 Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization ................ 417 Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off ..............................417 Synchronizing device and mail server IMAP folders from the Options menu ..............................................................................418 Working with root folders................................................................. 418 Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)................................................... 418 Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync ......................................419 What do I need to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync?............... 419 How does a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account differ from other accounts?.................................................................. 420 Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account................... 420 Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your computer .....................................................................................421 Setting up an account on your device .............................................424 Setting advanced mail options on your device ..............................427 Getting email messages ................................................................... 428 Sending messages ............................................................................ 429 Previewing attachments ................................................................... 430 Working with meeting invitations ....................................................430 Working with Calendar events ......................................................... 433 Synchronizing Calendar events using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync ................................................................................... 434 Updating Calendar events when you delete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account .................................................................... 434 Related topics............................................................................................435 Chapter 19: Sending and Receiving Text Messages .........436 Creating and sending a text message ....................................................437 Receiving and viewing a text message ..................................................440 Editing a draft text message ...................................................................442 Setting advanced messaging features ...................................................443 Related Topics...........................................................................................445 LifeDrive from palmOne xiii Chapter 20: Browsing the Web...........................................446 Accessing a web page ..............................................................................447 Accessing a web page using the action bar ....................................447 Accessing a web page using the address field ...............................448 Using a password to access a web page .........................................449 Finding information on a web page .................................................450 Quickly jumping to a page .......................................................................451 Following a link.................................................................................. 451 Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited ....... 451 Changing how you view a page .............................................................452 Bookmarking your favorite pages ...........................................................454 Adding a bookmark ...........................................................................454 Viewing a bookmarked or saved page ............................................455 Editing information about a bookmark or saved page ...................456 Arranging the bookmark list .............................................................457 Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet ..............................459 Disconnecting from the Internet ......................................................459 Connecting to the Internet ................................................................460 Downloading files and pages ..................................................................461 Downloading a file ............................................................................461 Saving a web page ............................................................................462 Viewing a saved file ..........................................................................463 Communicating with other users ............................................................464 Sending email by means of an Internet email account ..................464 Changing your home and start pages.....................................................465 Changing your home page ...............................................................465 Changing your start page .................................................................467 Setting advanced browser options .........................................................468 Changing how images are downloaded ..........................................468 Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and form fields ...................................................................................469 Allowing websites to remember personal information .................470 Clear Cookies and cache preferences ..............................................471 Setting preferences for using a proxy server ..................................473 Setting whether to accept JavaScript ..............................................475 Related topics............................................................................................476 LifeDrive from palmOne xiv Chapter 21: Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device ...477 Dialing a number .....................................................................................478 Entering a number .............................................................................478 Redialing the most recently used number ......................................479 Dialing a number from the Call History List ....................................480 Using speed dial ......................................................................................481 Adding a speed-dial entry .................................................................481 Dialing a number using speed dial ..................................................482 Editing a speed-dial entry .................................................................483 Related topics............................................................................................484 Chapter 22: Sharing Information........................................485 Using the Send command ......................................................................486 Sending information from within an application using Bluetooth® technology ...............................................................486 Sending a category using Bluetooth technology ...........................488 Sending an application using Bluetooth technology .....................489 Using the Send command with the VersaMail® application ......... 490 Using the Send command with SMS .............................................. 490 Beaming ....................................................................................................491 Beaming information from within an application ..........................491 Beaming a category ..........................................................................493 Beaming an application ....................................................................494 Other ways of sharing information .........................................................495 Related topics............................................................................................496 Chapter 23: Managing Your Expenses ...............................497 Adding an expense ...................................................................................498 Choosing currency options ......................................................................500 Customizing the currency pick list ...................................................500 Presetting the currency symbol .......................................................501 Creating a currency symbol ..............................................................502 Deleting expenses.....................................................................................504 Deleting an individual expense ........................................................504 Deleting an entire category of expenses .........................................505 LifeDrive from palmOne xv Customizing the expense list ...................................................................506 Working with Expense on your computer ..............................................507 Related topics............................................................................................508 Chapter 24: Performing Calculations .................................509 Calculator buttons.....................................................................................510 Viewing recent calculations ....................................................................511 Accessing different calculators ...............................................................512 Related topics............................................................................................513 Chapter 25: Keeping Your Information Private..................514 Choosing a security level .........................................................................515 Marking information as private ...............................................................516 Setting the level of privacy ......................................................................517 Hiding or masking private entries ....................................................517 Viewing an entry that is masked ...................................................... 518 Using a password .....................................................................................518 Creating a password .........................................................................519 Changing a password .......................................................................520 Deleting a password.......................................................................... 522 Deleting a forgotten password .........................................................523 Locking your device..................................................................................524 Locking your device automatically ..................................................525 Locking your device manually ..........................................................527 Using Quick Unlock ..................................................................................528 Creating a Quick Unlock combination ............................................. 528 Deleting your Quick Unlock combination........................................ 530 Encrypting your information....................................................................531 Limiting the number of password attempts ...........................................533 Related topics............................................................................................536 Chapter 26: Using Categories to Organize Information ...537 Adding a category.....................................................................................538 Renaming a category ...............................................................................539 Deleting a category ..................................................................................540 LifeDrive from palmOne xvi Placing information in a category ...........................................................541 Placing an entry in a category ..........................................................541 Placing an application in a category ................................................543 Viewing information by category ...........................................................544 Related topics............................................................................................545 Chapter 27: Managing Clock Settings ...............................546 Checking the current date and time ........................................................547 Setting the primary location ....................................................................547 Setting the date and time for the primary location ........................548 Choosing secondary locations for other time zones .............................550 Modifying the locations list......................................................................551 Adding new locations .......................................................................551 Deleting a location .............................................................................553 Setting the alarm clock .............................................................................554 Responding to the alarm clock......................................................... 555 Changing the clock display ......................................................................556 Related topics............................................................................................557 Chapter 28: Customizing Your Device ...............................558 Customizing Favorites View ....................................................................559 Changing the background photo in Favorites View .......................559 Changing entries in Favorites ...........................................................560 Customizing Applications View ..............................................................563 Making the screen easier to read ............................................................565 Changing the screen fonts ................................................................565 Adjusting the brightness ...................................................................567 Changing screen colors ....................................................................568 Changing handedness orientation of the screen ............................569 Assigning a button to your frequently used applications ....................570 Setting the date and time ........................................................................572 Selecting a location ...........................................................................572 Resetting the date and time ..............................................................574 Selecting formats for dates, times, and numbers ..........................576 Customizing the way you enter information ..........................................578 LifeDrive from palmOne xvii Customizing the input area ...............................................................578 Customizing Graffiti® 2 strokes ........................................................579 Setting up ShortCuts .........................................................................581 Changing ShortCuts ..........................................................................583 Correcting problems with tapping ...................................................584 Selecting sound settings .........................................................................585 Entering your owner information ...........................................................586 Conserving battery power .......................................................................587 Selecting power-saving settings ......................................................587 Connecting your device to other devices ...............................................589 Changing the preset connection settings ........................................589 Creating your own connection settings ...........................................592 Connecting your device to a mobile phone ....................................596 Customizing network settings .................................................................597 Setting up a service profile ...............................................................597 Connecting to your service ...............................................................600 Adding details to a service profile ...................................................601 Deleting a service profile ..................................................................603 Creating login scripts ........................................................................604 Adding plug-in applications .............................................................607 Setting up a VPN .......................................................................................608 Setting up a VPN account on your device .......................................608 Establishing a VPN connection ........................................................610 Ending a VPN connection .................................................................611 Related topics............................................................................................612 Chapter 29: Expanding Your Device...................................613 What type of expansion cards can I use? ...............................................614 How can expansion cards help me?........................................................614 Removing an expansion card .................................................................615 Inserting an expansion card ....................................................................616 Opening an application on an expansion card ......................................617 Opening files on an expansion card .......................................................618 Viewing card information.........................................................................619 Renaming a card ......................................................................................620 LifeDrive from palmOne xviii Copying applications to an expansion card ..........................................621 Removing all information from a card ...................................................622 Related topics............................................................................................623 Chapter 30: Maintaining Your Device ...............................624 Device do’s and don’ts .............................................................................624 Device do’s......................................................................................... 624 Device don’ts ..................................................................................... 625 Resetting your device ...............................................................................626 Doing a soft reset .............................................................................. 626 Doing a hard reset ............................................................................. 627 Restoring your information after a hard reset........................................630 Related topics............................................................................................632 Chapter 31: Common Questions .......................................633 Setup..........................................................................................................633 Device ........................................................................................................635 Moving around..........................................................................................639 Entering information ................................................................................639 Synchronizing ...........................................................................................641 LifeDrive™ Manager/Drive Mode ............................................................647 Calendar.....................................................................................................649 Memos .......................................................................................................650 Note Pad ....................................................................................................651 Media .........................................................................................................651 Camera Companion..................................................................................651 Pocket Tunes™..........................................................................................652 Tasks ..........................................................................................................653 Connecting wirelessly ..............................................................................653 The VersaMail® application.....................................................................655 Privacy .......................................................................................................658 Sharing ......................................................................................................659 Problems with incompatible applications ..............................................661 LifeDrive from palmOne xix Chapter 32: Getting Help ...................................................664 Self-help resources ...................................................................................664 Technical support .....................................................................................665 Product Regulatory Information .........................................666 Index ......................................................................................672 LifeDrive from palmOne xx About This Guide This guide tells you everything you need to know about your device: the things you’ll do every day, the advanced features that let you get the most out of your device, and the things that make your device not only useful, but fun. Tips for viewing this guide Here are some helpful tips for making it easier to read and find information in this guide as you view it in Adobe Reader: • To magnify the page, click the magnifying glass , move the cursor (which is now a magnifying glass) over the page, and click repeatedly. Click Previous View ( or depending on your version of Reader) to return to the original view. • Click an entry in the Table of Contents or Index to go directly to that section of the guide. • If you click a link and go to a page, in the guide click Previous View ( or depending on your version of Reader) to return to the page you were on before you clicked the link. • If you click a link and go to a web page, the page may open in Adobe Reader instead of in your web browser. To specify whether pages open in Reader or in your web browser, go to the Edit menu in Reader, select Preferences, and then select Web Capture. In the Open Web Links dropdown list, select either In Acrobat or In Web Browser, and then click OK. • When selecting the page(s) to print, be sure to use the file page number shown at the bottom of your computer screen, not the printed page number. For example, to print the first page of Chapter 2, “Your Mobile Manager,” select page 41 (the file page), not page 18 (the printed page). LifeDrive from palmOne xxi What’s in this guide? The info in this guide includes step-by-step instructions, links to cross-references, and sidebars. Step-by-step instructions Here you’ll find how-to information. Look for these cues in instructions: Continued Done Cue that means the procedure continues on the next page. Cue that signals the end of the procedure. You’re done. [ ! ] IMPORTANT A step that you must follow; otherwise, you could experience an error or even lose information. [ & ] OPTIONAL A step you might find useful. NOTE WINDOWS ONLY MAC ONLY Information that applies only in certain cases or that tells more about a procedure step. A procedure or text that applies to one platform only. In most cases, if you see one heading check the following or preceding sections for the other. Sometimes, there is no Mac counterpart for a Windows procedure or text; this feature is not available to Mac users. Links Links that appear as underlined words in body text and in sidebars take you to other sections of this guide. Links also appear in the following sections: LifeDrive from palmOne In this chapter Links on the first page of each chapter that send you to a specific section. Related topics Links that send you to other topics in this guide to learn about more things you can do with an application or feature. xxii Sidebars [ ! ] Before You Begin Things you must complete before you can do the steps described in a procedure or group of procedures. Tip A suggestion on how to use a feature more fully; a shortcut; a pointer to a related feature. Did You Know? An interesting fact about the topic being described; may include a link to more information. » Key Term A technical term related to the topic being described. The term may appear in this guide or only on your device. Tips & Tricks A pointer to a website where you can obtain general information about your device and learn the latest tips, tricks, and more. Support A pointer to a website where you can find help if you experience problems with a specific feature or with your device. LifeDrive from palmOne xxiii CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer In this chapter What’s in the box? System requirements Step 1: Charging your device Step 2: Turning on your device for the first time Step 3: Installing your software Step 4: Connecting your device to your computer Switching to another desktop software application Using user profiles Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Congratulations on the purchase of your new LifeDrive™ mobile manager from palmOne! You’re about to discover so many things about your device that will help you better manage your life and have fun, too. As you become more familiar with your device, you’ll probably personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours. Benefits While you’re likely to get years of enjoyment from your device, it takes only four easy steps to get up and running. • Start using your device right away • Establish a link between your device and your computer • Set up your device for optimal use 1 » CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Key Term Palm Desktop software The software that lets you enter, update, review, and synchronize information on your computer. What’s in the box? USB sync cable Pouch AC charger LifeDrive™ mobile manager from palmOne Software installation CD System requirements The installation CD contains Palm® Desktop software and other applications you need to set up and use your device. To use Palm Desktop software, your desktop computer must meet these requirements: WINDOWS ONLY • A PC with a Pentium II processor or later, and one of the following operating systems: • Windows 2000 (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software) • Windows XP (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software) • Internet Explorer 5.0 or later • 32 megabyte (MB) available RAM (64MB recommended) LifeDrive from palmOne 2 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer • 170MB available hard disk space • One available USB port • USB sync cable (included with your device) • CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your device MAC ONLY • Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor • Mac OS X, version 10.2 or 10.3 (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software) • 128MB total RAM • 190MB available hard disk space • Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 X 600 or better • One available USB port • USB sync cable (included with your device) • CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your device LifeDrive from palmOne 3 CHAPTER 1 [ ! ] Before You Begin If you’re upgrading from another Palm Powered™ device, synchronize your old device with your old desktop software. Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Step 1: Charging your device 0 1 Connect your device: a. Plug the USB sync cable into your device and into a USB port on the back of your computer. Tip After the initial charge, charge your device at least half an hour every day. b. Plug the AC charger into the Multi-connector on the sync cable and into an outlet. 2 Charge your device for three hours. Be sure your device is fully charged before going on to Step 2. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 4 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Tip Also take a minute to learn about proper care and handling of your device. What you should know about your device’s battery While your device is charging, take a minute to learn about the battery: • If you see an alert on the screen warning you that the battery is low, recharge your device. Also recharge your device if it doesn’t turn on when you press the power button. So that your battery doesn’t drain completely, your device’s Wi-Fi® functionality and expansion card slot functionality are automatically turned off when you see a “Low battery” warning message, and the Bluetooth® wireless technology and infrared (IR) functionality are turned off when you see a “Critically low battery” warning message. NOTE The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your device. When you recharge your device, all of your existing information, both in program memory and on the hard drive, should appear. • Conserve battery life by doing any of the following: • Adjust the screen brightness. • Reduce the Auto-off setting. • Use Keylock to prevent your device from turning on by accident. • Stop music or video playback when not in use. • Keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet when using Drive Mode or Camera Companion for an extended period of time. • Respond to or cancel alerts promptly. • Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology and Wi-Fi functionality when not in use. • If using Auto Sync to automatically retrieve email messages, set the time interval to one hour or less often. • Minimize use of the expansion card slot. LifeDrive from palmOne 5 CHAPTER 1 [ ! ] Before You Begin Be sure to fully charge your device, as described in the preceding procedure. Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Step 2: Turning on your device for the first time 0 1 Unplug the USB sync cable from your device. Tip After you set up your device, review the Quick Tour on your device and take the tutorial on the software installation CD to learn the basics. Stylus Power switch 2 Slide the power switch to the right. 3 Press and release the stylus, and then slide it out of the slot. 4 Hold the stylus as you would hold a pen, and follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 6 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Did You Know? When you upgrade, there’s no need to delete the old desktop software first. When you install the new Palm Desktop software, all of your information transfers automatically to the new software. Step 3: Installing your software 0 1 Insert the CD into your computer. NOTE You need administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software on a computer running Windows 2000/XP or Mac OS X. 2 WINDOWS ONLY Tip Take the interactive tutorial on the CD to learn how to create an appointment; set up your device’s features for photos, video, and music; and more. Follow the onscreen instructions. If you’re upgrading, select the username that you assigned to your old device. MAC ONLY Double-click the CD icon, and then double-click palmOneSoftware.pkg. Done Did You Know? IT managers can set up a profile if they want to install the same set of information on several devices. LifeDrive from palmOne During installation, you’re asked to connect your computer to your device. See Step 4. 7 » CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Tip If the Select User dialog box appears during synchronization, select the username of the device you want to synchronize, and click OK. Step 4: Connecting your device to your computer Key Term Third-party application A software program that runs on a Palm Powered™ device but is not created or supported by palmOne, Inc. Tip If you have problems with your new device after you synchronize, you may need to update your third-party applications. During installation, you connect your device to your computer and do a full sync for the first time. Synchronizing simply means that any information you enter in one place (your device or computer) is automatically updated in the other. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Be sure to do a full sync of the info on your device at least once a day so that you always have an up-to-date backup copy of this info on your computer. 0 1 Connect your device to your computer: a. Plug the USB sync cable into a USB port on the back of your computer. b. Plug the cable into your device. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 8 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer 2 3 Slide the power switch to the right to turn on your device. Continue with the onscreen instructions. Do a full sync by pressing the sync button on the USB sync cable. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 9 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Switching to another desktop software application WINDOWS ONLY During installation, you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your device. You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time. But if Microsoft Outlook already contains all of your contacts, appointments, tasks, and notes, you can change your synchronization method so that your device synchronizes with Outlook instead. You can also change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software. NOTE If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with the corresponding application in Outlook. (Memos is called Notes in Outlook.) You can also set up the VersaMail® application to synchronize email on your device with email in Outlook. Other info, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software. 0 1 Insert the CD into your computer. 2 From the screen that appears, select Change your synchronization method. 3 Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 10 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Using user profiles SKIP Only IT managers may need to use user profiles for their company. If you are not an IT manager, you can skip this section. Suppose your sales organization wants to distribute two dozen devices that all have a common company phone list, a set of memos, and several key applications. A user profile can be created to install this information before the devices are distributed to employees. When the employees synchronize for the first time, this common information becomes part of their user-specific information. A user profile enables you to install the same information onto multiple devices before each device is individualized with a unique username and user-specific information. A device that has a user profile installed can be given to anyone, because the device is not yet identified by a unique username. When the new user synchronizes for the first time, he or she gives the device a unique username. NOTE Devices that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new devices that have never been synchronized or devices that have had their usernames and information removed by a hard reset. LifeDrive from palmOne 11 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Tip Save time by importing to quickly add information to a profile. Creating a user profile WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Open the New Profile screen: a. Open Palm Desktop software. b. From the Tools menu, select Users. c. Click Profiles, and then click New. 2 3 Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK twice. Select the profile from the User list, and create the info in Palm Desktop software for the profile. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 12 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 Open the New Profile screen: a. Open Palm Desktop software. b. From the User pop-up menu, select Edit Users. c. Click New Profile. 2 Create the profile: a. Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK. b. Close the Users window. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 13 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer 3 4 Select the profile from the User pop-up menu, and create the info in Palm Desktop software for the profile. Set the profile’s conduit settings: a. From the HotSync® menu, select Conduit Settings. b. Select the conduit settings for the profile. Done Synchronizing with a user profile WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Begin synchronization: a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into the Multi-connector on your device. b. Press the sync button on the USB sync cable. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 14 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer 2 Transfer the profile information: a. Click Profiles. b. Select the profile you want to load on the device, and click OK. c. Click Yes. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The next time you or a user synchronizes that device, Palm Desktop software prompts you or the user to assign a username to the device. 15 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 Begin synchronization: a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into the Multi-connector on your device. b. Press the sync button on the USB sync cable. 2 Select the profile you want to load on the device, and click OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The next time you or a user synchronizes that device, Palm Desktop software prompts you or the user to assign a username to the device. 16 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Your Mobile Manager Keeping your device from turning on accidentally Managing Info • Synchronizing your device with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer Support If you’re having problems with setup or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. • Synchronizing wirelessly using the built-in Bluetooth technology or Wi-Fi capabilities on your device • Using your company’s network to synchronize information • Choosing whether or not to synchronize information for a specific application • Adding applications to and deleting applications from your device • Installing additional software from the CD • Viewing application information Customizing • Adjusting the screen display • Reducing the Auto-off setting Common Questions LifeDrive from palmOne Answers to frequently asked questions about setup 17 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager In this chapter What’s on my device? Using the power switch Using the status bar Rotating the screen What’s on the screen? What software is on my device? What’s on the CD? Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Your new LifeDrive™ mobile manager from palmOne takes mobile computing to a whole new level. As always, it helps you keep track of your schedule, your business and personal contacts, your to-do list, and even your Microsoft Office and multimedia files. But the device offers much more—like a 4GB hard drive that lets you carry all your crucial Office files, plus hours of your favorite music, photos, and videos. Transfer information in real time between your device and your computer and, on a Windows computer, select which files and folders to synchronize. Import photos and videos from your digital camera’s memory card, or connect wirelessly to a Wi-Fi® network. Benefits • Carry files and folders on an internal hard drive containing nearly 4GB of storage, and work with them on the go • Save time and stay organized • Travel light • Never lose important information • Stay in touch using wireless connectivity 18 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager What’s on my device? Front Indicator light 5-way navigator Screen Home Files Media Quick buttons Indicator light Star Notifies you of various functions. A solid amber light indicates that the device is charging; a solid green light indicates that the device is fully charged. A flashing amber light indicates that the device’s hard drive is currently processing information—opening a file, saving changes, and so on. Be especially careful not to drop, bang, or otherwise cause a strong impact to your device while the indicator light is blinking; you may damage the hard drive. LifeDrive from palmOne 19 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip The Favorites application offers four pages of favorites. Pressing Home once opens the first page of Favorites; use the buttons in the upper-right corner of the Favorites screen to go to the other pages. Screen LifeDrive from palmOne Displays the applications and information on your device. The screen is touch-sensitive. Display the input area by tapping the Input icon on the status bar. Use the input area to enter info with Graffiti® 2 writing or the onscreen keyboard. 5-way navigator Helps you move around and select info to display on the screen. Quick buttons Turn on your device and open the corresponding application. Press the Home button once to open Favorites, twice to open Applications. The Star button opens the Pocket Tunes™ music application by default, but you can customize it to open any application you choose. 20 » CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Key Term IR Short for infrared. Beaming uses infrared technology to send information between two IR ports that are within a few feet of each other. Top Did You Know? Beaming lets you quickly share appointments, addresses, phone numbers, files, photos, and more. LifeDrive from palmOne Stylus Three-position power switch IR port Expansion card slot IR port Beams information to and receives beamed information from other devices that have an IR port. Power switch Turns your device on or off and lets you turn Keylock on. A red indicator is displayed on the switch when Keylock is on. Stylus Lets you enter information on your device by writing or tapping. To remove the stylus from its slot, press down on the top, release to let it pop out of the slot, and then slide it out. Hold the stylus as you would a pen or pencil. Using your fingertip instead of the stylus is OK, but don’t use your fingernail, a real pen, or any other sharp object to touch the screen. Expansion card slot Lets you insert an expansion card (sold separately) to back up info and add memory, applications, and accessories to your device. 21 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Side Microphone Voice Memo button Screen rotation button 0 LifeDrive from palmOne Screen rotation button Rotates the screen between portrait and landscape views. Voice Memo button Opens the Voice Memo application when you press and release the button. Records a voice memo when you press and hold the button. Microphone Lets you record sound to create a voice memo. 22 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Back Bluetooth radio (internal) Wi-Fi radio (internal) Speaker Hard drive (internal) LifeDrive from palmOne Hard drive (internal) Provides 4GB of storage to carry and manage all of your crucial work information, music and media files, and more. Speaker Lets you listen to alarms, game and system sounds, music, and voice memos. Bluetooth® radio (internal) Enables your device to connect with other devices (sold separately) that use Bluetooth wireless technology. Wi-Fi radio (internal) Enables your device to connect to a Wi-Fi network to wirelessly access email, browse the web, and synchronize. 23 » CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Key Term USB The type of connector or cable that’s commonly used to connect accessories to a computer. Bottom Did You Know? You can purchase a cradle accessory that lets you connect external speakers (sold separately) to hear audio from your device through the Multi-connector. Visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive and click the Accessories link. Headphone jack Tip It takes a little while for your device to reset when you press the reset button. During the reset, you see a progress bar, then a screen with the Palm Powered™ logo. Resetting is done when the Date & Time Preferences screen appears. LifeDrive from palmOne Reset button Connector port AC charger Multi-connector Reset button Resets your device if it freezes (stops responding). Multi-connector Lets you connect a USB sync cable (included) or a cradle (sold separately) to your computer so you can synchronize or exchange information. You can also charge your device by connecting it to your computer using the USB sync cable. The Multi-connector also lets you connect the AC charger to your device—either directly to the connector or through the USB sync cable—so you can charge it. NOTE Be sure to plug in the sync cable with the arrow on the cable connector facing the front of the device. Headphone jack Lets you connect standard 3.5mm stereo headphones (sold separately) to your device so you can listen to music and other audio applications. 24 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Did You Know? A red indicator is displayed on the power switch when Keylock is on. Using the power switch Your device’s power switch turns your device on and off, and also lets you lock your device so that it does not respond to taps, 5-way presses, or presses on the buttons on the front and side of your device. Front of device Keylock On/Off Use the power switch for the following actions: • To turn on your device, slide the switch to the right and let it return to the center. To turn your device off, slide the switch to the right again. • If your device is off, slide the switch to the left to lock your device. Your device does not respond to button presses, taps, or 5-way presses and cannot turn on until you slide the switch to the center position. Locking your device when it is off is useful if you carry your device in a bag and want to prevent it from turning on accidentally when something presses against it. • If your device is on, slide the switch to the left to lock your device at the current screen. Your device does not respond to button presses, taps, or 5-way presses, and the current screen cannot be changed until you slide the switch to the center position. Locking your device at a current screen is useful, for example, if you want to pass your device around to show a photo to a group of people and you do not want someone to accidentally tap or press something that causes the photo to disappear. LifeDrive from palmOne 25 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip Use the Find dialog box to locate specific items of information in your device’s program memory—for example, a name or a phone number. Using the status bar The status bar at the bottom of the device screen gives you access to valuable tools and is accessible in all views. Home Find Menu System info Did You Know? The System info icon shows the current time on the status bar. Alert Bluetooth controls Wi-Fi controls Full-screen writing Input In the System info dialog box, both the hard drive and the program memory are labeled Device. The hard drive is indicated by the larger available memory size. Did You Know? When Wi-Fi is on, the signal strength indicator shows an alert symbol when the device is not connected to a network, and an arrow symbol when the device is connected. The number of bars indicates the signal strength when connected. LifeDrive from palmOne 0 Home Find Menu System info Alert Bluetooth controls Wi-Fi controls Fullscreen writing Input Tap once to open Applications, twice to open Favorites. Tap to open the Find dialog box. Tap to open the menu for the current screen. Tap to open the System information dialog box. The dialog box shows the date and time, available memory, and battery level, and allows you to turn system sounds on and off and to adjust screen brightness. When the icon is blinking, tap to display the Reminders screen. Tap to display the Bluetooth dialog box, where Bluetooth functionality can be turned on and off and you can connect to another Bluetooth device. The icon color changes from blue to white when your device’s Bluetooth functionality is turned on. Tap to display the Wi-Fi dialog box, where you can make a wireless connection to a Wi-Fi network. The icon displays “Wi-Fi” when Wi-Fi is turned off, and a signal strength indicator when Wi-Fi is turned on. NOTE Tap anywhere outside of the Wi-Fi dialog box to close the box and return to the screen you were viewing. Tap to turn full-screen writing on and off. When it is on, you can write Graffiti® 2 characters anywhere onscreen. The icon color changes from blue to white when full-screen writing is turned on. Tap to switch between showing and hiding the input area. Tap and hold to display the input area selection menu. 26 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Did You Know? You can customize which way the screen rotates in landscape mode by choosing right- or lefthanded rotation. Rotating the screen You can switch between landscape and portrait views by pressing the screen rotation button on the side of your device. Landscape view is useful for viewing spreadsheets, email, web pages, and photos. Screen rotation button LifeDrive from palmOne 27 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip You can select an input area that does not display the application icons. What’s on the screen? Tip If you use another application frequently, customize the input area to display that application’s icon. Tap and hold any of the four application icons, and select the new application you want from the list. The new application’s icon replaces the icon you tapped. Your device includes many features that make it easy to use. Among them are the input area and the common elements that appear on the screen in each of the applications. Once you learn how to use them in one application you can easily use them in all the others. Input area By default, the input area is displayed. To hide the input area, tap Input on the status bar. To display the input area if it is hidden, tap Input again. Tapping the icons in the input area opens the following applications: Calendar icon Contacts icon Memos icon Tasks icon Letter keyboard Number keyboard Icon Icon Application icons: Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Tasks Open the corresponding application. Letter keyboard icon Opens the alphabetic keyboard. Number keyboard icon Opens the numeric keyboard. NOTE You cannot display the input area in the main Favorites View. However, if you perform a task such as adding or deleting a favorite, you can display the input area. LifeDrive from palmOne 28 » CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Key Term Slider The solid area on the scroll bar. The slider moves to indicate the relative position within the entry or list. Application controls Previous/next arrows Tips icon Entry box Tip You can also use the 5-way navigator to select an item from a pick list and to select some command buttons. Scroll bar Pick list Box Command button LifeDrive from palmOne Previous/next arrows Select the left and right arrows to view the previous and next entry; where up and down arrows appear, select them to view the previous and next screens of information. Scroll bar Drag the slider, or tap the top or bottom arrow, to scroll the display one line at a time. To scroll to the previous screen, tap the scroll bar just above the slider. To scroll to the next screen, tap the scroll bar just below the slider. Command button Select a button, such as OK, Cancel, or Details, to perform a command or to open a dialog box. Command buttons appear at the bottom of dialog boxes and application screens. Tips icon Tap the Tips icon to view shortcuts and other useful information for the screen where the icon is located. When you have finished viewing the tip, select Done. Entry box Tap an entry box to open a dialog box where you can enter info for that field. Pick list Select the arrow to display a list of choices, and then select an item in the list. Box Check or uncheck a box to select or deselect it. When a box is checked, the corresponding option is selected and active. When a box is unchecked, the corresponding option is deselected and inactive. 29 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip Can’t find some of these applications? Press the Home button twice and use the Category pick list to view more applications in Applications View. What software is on my device? Your device comes with many applications preinstalled and ready to use. 0 Favorites Customize a list of your favorite applications, files, and folders so that you can locate and open them quickly. Files View, organize, and open files and folders on your device’s drive. Drive Mode Connect your device as a USB removable drive on another computer. Open files stored on your device on the computer, and move, copy, and work with files between your device and the computer. Calendar Manage your schedule from single entries, like lunch with a friend, to repeating and extended events, like weekly meetings and holidays. Even color-code your schedule by category. Contacts Store names and addresses, phone numbers, email and website addresses; even add a birthday alarm or a contact’s photo. Documents Create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files. View and manage PowerPoint files. Wi-Fi® controls Set up wireless connections to a Wi-Fi network for sending and receiving information. Access these controls from the status bar. LifeDrive from palmOne Bluetooth® controls Set up wireless connections to a mobile phone, network, or computer for sending and receiving information. Access these controls from the status bar. Media View, share, and organize photos and videos. Camera Companion Import photos and videos from your digital camera’s memory card, open them and work with them on your device, or copy them to your computer. After importing items, delete them from the card to make room there for more photos and videos. This icon is named Companion in Applications View. 30 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Pocket Tunes™ Carry music, create playlists, and listen to music on your device. This application works with the Real Rhapsody desktop application that you can install from the software installation CD (Windows only). Both Mac and Windows users can use Pocket Tunes on the device. LifeDrive from palmOne VersaMail® Send, receive, and manage email messages wirelessly using your device’s wireless capabilities or by synchronizing it with your Windows computer. Web Browse your favorite sites on the web using your device’s wireless capabilities. SMS Send and receive short text (SMS) messages using your device’s wireless capabilities. Tasks Stay on top of your to-do list. Enter things you need to do, prioritize them, set alarms, and then monitor your deadlines. Voice Memo Record short voice clips using the built-in microphone. Memos Capture information such as meeting notes, lists of books to read, movies to see, recipes, and anything else you need to write down. Note Pad Write on the screen in your own handwriting or draw a quick sketch. Addit™ Receive notifications of upgrades and patches and then install them onto your device; obtain personalized news and other information as well as user tips at a glance; preview, try, and buy software for your device. (Windows only for downloads using the sync cable; both Windows and Mac users can download software using your device’s wireless capabilities. Internet connection required.) Calculator Do basic math calculations such as splitting restaurant bills and figuring tips. Quick Tour Learn about your device and how to enter information. Card Info View information about your device’s drive or about an expansion card seated in the expansion card slot. HotSync® Synchronize info on your device with the info on your computer. 31 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip To learn how to install the desktop software from the CD, see Step 3: Installing your software. Prefs Customize your device’s sound levels, colors, security, and more. Handmark Solitaire Enjoy hours of entertainment with this solitaire game. World Clock Set the time in your home city and two other locations, and set an alarm to wake you up. Dialer Dial phone numbers directly from your device. Expense Track business or travel expenses and print expense reports after you synchronize your device with your computer. Tip To learn how to install additional device software from the CD, see Installing the additional software from the CD. What’s on the CD? The LifeDrive™ software installation CD includes desktop software for your computer and additional software for your device. The desktop software lets you use your computer to view, enter, and manage info for many of the applications on your device. Make sure you install the desktop software so that you can back up and save the info on your device onto your computer. The additional device software lets you do more things with your device. When you set up your device you may install some (or all) of these applications. You can install any of the applications at any time after you set up your device, as well. The software installation CD includes titles such as the following. LifeDrive from palmOne 32 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager 0 Tip After you install an app and discover how valuable it is, be sure to add it to Favorites. Assign your most important application to the Star button so that you can open it with one press. Did You Know? You can categorize applications in Applications View. Some apps are automatically assigned to a category when you install them; others are assigned to the Unfiled category. Apps from all categories appear in the All category. Assign an application to a category in Applications by selecting Category in the App menu. Select the pick list next to the application’s name; then select a category. LifeDrive from palmOne Palm® Desktop software View, enter, manage, and back up info for Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Memos, Expense, and Voice Memo on your computer (Expense is Windows only). You can also view, manage, and back up info for Note Pad. When you synchronize your device with your computer, this info is updated in both places. Palm Desktop includes HotSync® Manager software, which allows you to customize the settings for synchronization. You can access HotSync Manager by selecting its icon in the task bar at the bottom of your computer screen. HotSync Manager On a Windows computer, use Quick Install within Palm Desktop software to install applications (PRC) to your device or to an expansion card that is seated in the expansion card slot. Palm Desktop is installed automatically during the initial CD installation process. NOTE During installation, you can choose to synchronize your device with Microsoft Outlook on your computer (Windows only). If you do, information from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in the corresponding application in Outlook. (Memos is called Notes in Outlook.) Information for Expense, Note Pad, and Voice Memo is still synchronized with the corresponding info in Palm Desktop software. Send To Handheld droplet Install applications from your Mac computer to your device or to an (Mac only) expansion card that is seated in the expansion card slot for use on your device. The Send To Handheld droplet is installed automatically during the initial CD installation process. 33 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tip Be sure to use the Enterprise Software link to check for new software available from the palmOne enterprise website, such as upcoming software that provides robust security for Wi-Fi authentication and connection to a network. LifeDrive™ Manager (Windows only) Install applications and transfer folders and files from your Windows computer to the hard drive on your device or to an expansion card, synchronize files and folders, and convert photos and videos for viewing on your device. LifeDrive Manager is installed automatically during the initial CD installation process. Manual Install a version of the Getting Started guide on your device. On Windows, you can also access the full Acrobat version (PDF) of Getting Started from the Help menu of Palm Desktop software and from the Start Programs menu of your Windows desktop. On a Mac, access Getting Started from the Palm/Documentation folder. WiFile™ Access your wireless network so that you can open photos, music files, and documents that are located in shared folders on a networked computer. Adobe® Reader for Palm OS® View PDF files that are tailored to fit your device’s screen. Power by Hand eReader Purchase and download eBooks from the web so you can read them when you want, where you want. Enterprise Software link Access the palmOne enterprise website, where you can purchase software to create a secure wireless connection to your corporate network in order to safely send and receive email messages and access the corporate intranet with a VPN client. You can also purchase software to encrypt individual files and folders to protect your critical information (download requires Internet connection; additional fees may apply). AudiblePlayer Listen to newspapers, books, public radio, language instruction, and more (Windows only; download requires Internet connection; additional fees may apply). LifeDrive from palmOne 34 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Did You Know? You can categorize applications in Applications View. Some apps are automatically assigned to a category when you install them; others are assigned to the Unfiled category. Apps from all categories appear in the All category. Assign an application to a category in Applications by selecting Category in the App menu. Select the pick list next to the application’s name; then select a category. Documents To Go Companion desktop software for the Documents application on your device. Lets you move or copy Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files to the Documents folder on your device’s drive, as well as create and edit files. Handmark Express Download current news as well as information on the weather, stocks, sports, movies, and more (download requires Internet connection and subscription to service with Handmark). RealRhapsody Transfer MP3 music files from your computer to your device or to an expansion card (sold separately), and copy music from your CDs to your computer. This is the desktop companion for the Pocket Tunes music application on your device (Windows only). Windows Media Player link/Direct X Required to prepare videos for playback on your device (Windows only). NOTE We recommend that you install the Windows Media Player/ Direct X software from the CD, even if you already have Windows Media Player on your computer. The version on the CD contains all of the components needed to prepare videos for playback on your device. Windows Media Player plug-in Works with Windows Media Player to convert music files for playback using the Pocket Tunes application on your device. QuickTime Required for preparing videos in certain formats for viewing on your device. NOTE QuickTime is included on the CD for Windows computers only. For Mac computers, QuickTime is included in OS X. Tutorial LifeDrive from palmOne Learn to use the popular features of your device. The Tutorial includes a tour of your device and step-by-step instructions. Access it from the Discover your device screen on the software installation CD. 35 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Setup Installing the desktop software from the CD Entering Information • Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts • Entering information with the onscreen letter and number keyboards Support If you’re having problems with your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. Moving Around • Opening applications and using menus • Finding information Managing Info • Synchronizing your device with your computer • Using LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode to work with information between your device and your computer • Installing additional software from the CD Sharing • Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered™ devices • Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth technology on your device World Clock Viewing the current date and time Customizing • Setting the current date and time • Adjusting the brightness of the display LifeDrive from palmOne 36 CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager Maintaining • Caring for your device • Resetting your device Common Questions LifeDrive from palmOne Answers to frequently asked questions about your device 37 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications In this chapter Opening applications Using the 5-way navigator Using menus Finding information Related topics Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your device is similar. Most Palm OS® applications use the same set of application controls. So once you learn how to use these standard controls, you’ll be driving all over town and you won’t even need a map. Benefits • Find and open applications quickly • Access extra features with menus • Move around in applications with one hand, using the 5-way navigator • Locate information in any application with the Find feature LifeDrive from palmOne 38 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip Press Home once to open Favorites; press Home twice to open Applications. Switch between Favorites and Applications by pressing Home. Opening applications Did You Know? You can use a favorite photo as the background for your Favorites or Applications View. Using Favorites Tip Customize Favorites to display folders—for example, a project folder that you access often. Select the folder to view its contents. You can open applications from Favorites View or Applications View, or by using the Files application. NOTE Some applications are listed differently in Favorites and Applications views. For example, the Photos & Videos entry in Favorites opens the Media application, which is listed as Media in Applications View. The application icons are similar in both Favorites and Applications. Favorites View contains up to 32 items—four pages of eight items each—and can include applications, specific files, folders, and even links to the web. Certain items are included in Favorites by default, but you can customize the list to contain any items you want. To access an item from Favorites, press Home and select an item from the list. Use the 5-way navigator or tap the buttons in the upper-right corner of the screen to move to another page of favorites. Tap to move to other pages of favorites Home LifeDrive from palmOne 39 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip Also open Applications by tapping the Home icon on the status bar. Using Applications Tip You can also open a specific application using one of the quick buttons on the front of your device. Applications View shows all of the applications on your device, except those that are accessed using the status bar. Use the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen to view applications by category or to see all applications. From the pick list, you can also select to view the contents of your device’s hard drive (it’s called LifeDrive on the pick list) or of an expansion card (it’s called Card1 or whatever you’ve named the card) if one is inserted into the expansion slot. To access an item from Applications, press Home twice and select an icon. When you press Home twice, it displays the same category of applications that was displayed the last time Applications was open. Use the category pick list to view another category or to see all applications, the contents of the hard drive, or the contents of an expansion card. Tip When no item is selected, press Right or Left on the 5-way to scroll through application categories. Category pick list Home Did You Know? Applications View displays an icon for opening Favorites. Favorites View contains an entry for opening Applications. LifeDrive from palmOne 40 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip You can also open Files by selecting Files in Applications View. Using Files The Files application enables you to easily open, view, and move among the files and folders on your device’s hard drive or on an expansion card inserted into your device’s expansion slot. To open Files, press Files Tip If you have an expansion card (sold separately) inserted into your device’s expansion slot, select the card icon in Files to view the contents of the card. LifeDrive from palmOne on the front of your device. Card icon Files 41 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Did You Know? If you select a file from within Files, it automatically opens in the correct application on your device. If there is no application for that file, a beep alert sounds. Navigate within Files by doing any of the following: Tip Tap and hold the stylus on a file or folder to open a menu of actions you can do with that item— copy, delete, and so on. Folder up Folder pick list Top-level folder Select folder • Select a file or folder to open it. The file opens in the corresponding application—for example, Documents for Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files. NOTE If your device contains an application that can open a file, a file-specific icon appears to the left of the file name in the Files list. If a generic icon appears to the left of a file name, you cannot open the file on your device. • Select the Folder Up icon to move up one level of folders. • Select the pick list at the top of the files screen to view and jump to the top-level folder and any subfolders. • Select the top-level folder on the files screen to move up one level of folders. NOTE Files always displays these five folders at the top of the folder list: Applications, Documents, Music, Photos & Videos, and VersaMail Attachments. Place your applications and files in the correct folder so that you can easily locate them. LifeDrive from palmOne 42 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Did You Know? If you select Open With, only applications that can open the file you have selected are displayed. You can select one of the applications displayed to make it the default application for opening this file type. If no application appears, that means there is no application on your device that can open the selected file. Working with files and folders Tip You can also highlight a file or folder and then press Right on the 5-way to open the menu of tasks. You can work with the files and folders in the Files application—create new folders; copy, beam, and delete files and folders; and more. You can work with one file or folder at a time. 0 1 Open Files. 2 Navigate to the file or folder you want. 3 Work with the file or folder: a. Tap and hold the item name to open a menu that lets you perform any of the following tasks: Open With Select the application to use to open a file. Rename Rename the selected item. Details View details such as name, including extension for files; location on the hard drive or expansion card; last date modified; and, for files only, size. Check the box to make the selected item read-only, meaning that it cannot be changed by a user. You can rename or delete a file or folder from the Details dialog box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 43 CHAPTER 3 Did You Know? If you select Delete, you get a message asking you to confirm the deletion. Moving Around in Applications Cont’d. Copy Copy the item to another location on the drive or an expansion card. Move Move the item to another location on the drive or an expansion card. Delete Beam Delete the current file or folder. Beam the file or folder. Send Send the current file or folder using your device’s built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology or as an attachment to a text message or email message. b. Select the task you want to perform on the file or folder, and follow any onscreen instructions. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 44 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Sorting Files You can sort your files and folders by icon, name, date, or size. 0 1 Open Files. 2 Select your sort options: Sort display Select the column you want to sort by. From the left side of the screen, the columns are icon, name, and size/date. Sort by name Sort by icon Sort by date or size Sort in ascending or descending order Select the column you want to sort by to switch between ascending and descending sort order. Switch between sorting by date or by size Tap and hold the rightmost column until the heading you want appears. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 45 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Did You Know? If you use a command to open a file from within an application, only files that can be opened by that application are displayed. For example, in Pocket Tunes, only music files such as MP3 files are displayed. Opening files and folders from within an application Tip You must use the stylus to tap icons in the input area or on the status bar. LifeDrive from palmOne In certain applications—for example, Documents, Media, and Pocket Tunes™—you can open a file or folder directly from within the application. The application automatically displays files located in the appropriate folder on your device’s hard drive—for example, when you open the Pocket Tunes application, files in the Music folder on the drive are displayed—but you can browse for files located elsewhere on the drive. See the application chapters for information on opening files. Switching between applications You can switch between applications at any time. Just press Home and select an icon from Favorites or Applications, or press a quick button. Your device automatically saves your work in the current application and switches to the other application. 46 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip In landscape view, not only does screen orientation change, but so does the orientation of the 5-way. For example, in right-handed landscape view, what was Up in portrait view becomes Right in landscape view. Using the 5-way navigator The 5-way navigator, located at the bottom of the front panel, lets you access information quickly with one hand and without the stylus. To use the 5-way, press Up, Down, Right, Left, or Center. The 5-way does various things based on which type of screen you’re viewing. Up Center Up Center Right Left Down Left Portrait view Right Down Right-handed landscape view Moving around with the 5-way On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or an entire screen—is highlighted by default. The highlight identifies what element will be affected by your next action. On any screen, only one item can be highlighted at a time. Use the 5-way to move the highlight from one item to another onscreen. LifeDrive from palmOne 47 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip When an entire screen is highlighted, only the top and bottom borders acquire the glow; the right and left borders do not show the highlight. The highlight can take one of three forms, depending on what is highlighted: Tip A few onscreen elements of your device can only be activated by tapping them with your stylus, for example, icons in the input area and the view icons in the lower-left corner of Day View in Calendar. NOTE Individual applications may contain application-specific elements that can also be highlighted by the 5-way, for example, the Quick Connect icon in a contact. Blue glow This highlights elements of the user interface like command buttons, pick lists, and arrows. Reverse type (white text on a dark background) This highlights an entry on a list screen or a phone number, email address, or web link on a web page or in a message. Button highlighted with blue glow Contact list entry highlighted with reverse type Blinking cursor The blinking cursor tells you that you can enter text at that point. Blinking cursor LifeDrive from palmOne 48 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip In Applications View, to remove the selection highlight without making a selection, scroll to the first icon (in the upper-left corner) and then press Left on the 5-way, or enter the Backspace character using Graffiti® 2 writing. Moving around in Favorites View Up or Down Scrolls to the next favorite in the corresponding direction. Right or Left Displays the next or previous page of favorites. Center Opens the selected item. Pages of favorites Moving around in Applications View Up or Down Scrolls up or down in Applications View. Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous application category. Center Inserts the highlight. When the selection highlight is present: Category Up, Down, Right, or Left Scrolls to the next item in the corresponding direction. Center LifeDrive from palmOne Opens the selected item. 49 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Moving around in list screens and entry screens In list screens, use the 5-way to select and move between entries such as notes, memos, contacts, or photos. In individual entry screens—such as a single photo or email message—use the 5-way to move among the items on the screen or to move to another entry. The behavior of the 5-way for list screens and entry screens varies according to application. Follow the guidelines for moving around with the 5-way for general tips; as you become familiar with each application, learning the specific behavior of the 5-way is easy. Moving around in dialog boxes Dialog boxes appear when you select a button or option that requires you to provide additional information. In dialog boxes, use the 5-way to select a button or to make a selection from items such as boxes and pick lists. Up, Down, Right, or Left Highlights the next item in the dialog box (pick list, box, button) in the corresponding direction. Center • If highlight is on a box: Checks or unchecks the box. Pick list • If highlight is on a pick list: Opens the pick list. When a pick list is open: Up or Down next entry. Center Button with highlight Box Scrolls to the previous or Selects the highlighted entry. • If highlight is on a button: Activates the button, and then closes the dialog box. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Read dialog boxes carefully. Selecting a button such as OK or Yes may cancel an action or delete information. LifeDrive from palmOne 50 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Moving around in menus After you open the menus you can use the 5-way to move between menus and to select menu items: LifeDrive from palmOne Up or Down Scrolls within the current menu list. Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous menu on the menu bar. Center Selects the highlighted menu item. 51 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip You can also open the device menus by tapping the application title in the upper-left corner of the screen. Using menus Tip When the menus are open, you can use the 5-way to select menus and menu items. Menus let you access additional features and settings. They are easy to use, and once you master them in one application, you know how to use them in all your applications. 0 1 Open an application. 2 Tap Menu on the status bar. . Application title Menu Menu item 3 Select an item from the leftmost menu, or use the 5-way to highlight and select a different menu, and then select a menu item. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 52 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip Command mode is active for just a few seconds, so write the menu shortcut or tap an icon on the Command toolbar quickly. Using the Command stroke Most menu items also have a menu shortcut, which is similar to the keyboard shortcuts used on computers. The menu shortcut appears to the right of the menu item. To use a menu shortcut, first write the Graffiti® 2 Command stroke on the left side of the input area or the full screen, and then write the shortcut letter. For example, to select Paste from the Edit menu, write the Command stroke, followed by the letter p. You do not have to open a menu to use the Command stroke. Command stroke Menu items Menu shortcuts NOTE When you write the Command stroke, the Command toolbar appears. See the next section for info on using the Command toolbar. Using the Command toolbar The Command toolbar displays different icons based on the active screen. For example, if you have text selected, the icons might be Cut, Copy, and Paste. If no text is selected, the icons might be Beam, Undo, and Delete. To use the Command toolbar, write the Command stroke to display the Command toolbar, and then tap an icon to select its command. Command stroke Cut LifeDrive from palmOne Copy Paste Beam Undo Delete 53 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip If you select text in an application before you tap Find, the selected text automatically appears in the Find dialog box. Finding information Tip Open an application before you tap Find to display results from that application at the top of the results list. Tip Want to stop searching? Select Stop at any time during a search. To continue the search, select Find More. Did You Know? If you select a result that is a file located on the hard drive or on an expansion card, the Files application opens, displaying the selected file. Select the file name to open it. You can use Find to locate any word or phrase—either as part of a file name or within a file—in any application in your device’s program memory. Find also locates words that begin a file name only (not within a file) on your device’s hard drive or on an expansion card. Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter and is not case-sensitive. For example, searching for “plane” finds “planet” but not “airplane.” Searching for “bell” also finds “Bell.” 0 1 Tap Find 2 Enter the text that you want to find, and then select OK. 3 Select the text that you want to review. on the status bar. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 54 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Your Mobile Manager • Locating the controls on your device • Discovering the built-in software on your device and the additional software on the CD • Getting familiar with the input area and onscreen application controls Entering Information • Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts • Entering contact information in other applications Sharing • Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered™ devices • Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth technology on your device Privacy Keeping information private by turning on security options Categories Creating categories and organizing your applications and information Managing Info • Adding and deleting applications on your device • Viewing application information Customizing • Using a photo as the background for Applications and Favorites views • Displaying Applications View in list format LifeDrive from palmOne Maintaining Caring for your device Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about using your device and its applications 55 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device In this chapter How can I enter information on my device? Entering information with Graffiti® 2 writing Entering information with the onscreen keyboard Entering info from Contacts into another application Editing information Related topics Whether you’re scheduling a meeting with your daughter’s teacher or adding a new restaurant to your Contacts list, you need to get that information into your device. There are several ways to do this. You may find that you prefer one method if you’re entering a small amount of information, while another works best for large amounts. Choose the one that fits your situation. Benefits • Quickly enter important information • Choose the method that works best for your situation LifeDrive from palmOne 56 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip A blinking cursor on your device screen indicates where the information you enter will appear. Tap or use the 5-way to move the cursor to the location you want. In most cases, if you do not see a blinking cursor, you cannot enter information on that screen. How can I enter information on my device? • Graffiti® 2 writing • The onscreen keyboard • Phone Lookup • Note Pad • An accessory keyboard (sold separately; visit www.palmOne.com/mylifedrive and click the Accessories link) The most popular methods are using Graffiti 2 writing and the onscreen keyboard. NOTE You can also enter information on your computer and move and work with the information between your device and your computer. Or you can send and receive information from other devices, using beaming or your device’s built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology or Wi-Fi® capabilities. Entering information with Graffiti® 2 writing You can enter info directly on your device with Graffiti 2 writing. Graffiti 2 writing includes any character you can type on a standard keyboard. Entering these characters on your device is very similar to the way you naturally write letters, numbers, and symbols. But instead of using a pen and paper, you use the stylus and the input area on your device. With only a few minutes of practice, you can learn to use Graffiti 2 writing. Writing in the input area You can write Graffiti 2 characters in the input area, or you can turn on full-screen writing and use the entire screen to enter characters. LifeDrive from palmOne 57 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip Select the top icon to open the onscreen keyboard. Your device has two different layouts—classic and wide—for the input area that you can use to enter Graffiti 2 characters. To open them, tap and hold Input on the status bar, and then select the icon of the input area you want. Classic Wide Tip You can choose whether the Graffiti 2 strokes you enter appear as white characters in the input area. Numerals Select middle icon Uppercase letters Lowercase letters Numerals Select bottom icon Uppercase letters straddling line Lowercase letters In either layout, write lowercase letters, uppercase letters, and numbers in the sections shown. If you write characters in the wrong area, they are not recognized correctly and an incorrect character is written. Using full-screen writing When full-screen writing is turned on, you can write anywhere on the screen. When full-screen writing is turned off, you must write character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area for your device to recognize them. LifeDrive from palmOne 58 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device You can write letters or characters in the following areas: Left side of the screen Right side of the screen Write letters or characters that are assigned to the abc input area. Write numbers or characters that are assigned to the 123 input area. Middle of the screen straddling the imaginary dividing line between the left and right sides Write uppercase letters. NOTE For a brief period of time after writing a character, a quick tap on the screen is interpreted as a period character. Wait a second to tap buttons or place the cursor so that the action is not interpreted as a period character. Turn full-screen writing on and off by tapping full-screen writing full-screen writing is on, the icon turns from gray to white. on the status bar. When Write capital or uppercase letters in the middle Write letters on the left side Write numerals on the right side Full-screen writing LifeDrive from palmOne 59 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Did You Know? Graffiti 2 writing automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence or a new entry. Writing Graffiti 2 characters 0 1 Open an application you use to enter information, like Calendar. 2 Tap the screen where you want your character to appear. 3 Position the stylus in the correct part of the input area, if selected, or in the correct part of the screen if full-screen writing is on. 4 Write the characters exactly as shown in the tables that follow these steps. Be sure to start each stroke at the heavy dot. 5 Lift the stylus at the end of the stroke. Done LifeDrive from palmOne When you lift the stylus from the screen, your device recognizes the stroke immediately and prints the character at the insertion point on the screen. 60 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Did You Know? Graffiti 2 characters made with two strokes are recognized after the second stroke. Make the second stroke quickly after the first so that the correct character is recognized. Keys to success with Graffiti 2 writing Did You Know? Write uppercase letters the same way you write lowercase ones. The only difference is where you write them. Tip Your device has tables displaying all of the Graffiti 2 characters, short cuts, and commands. Customize your device so you can display these tables by drawing a line from the bottom of the screen to the top. LifeDrive from palmOne Keep these guidelines in mind when using Graffiti 2 writing: • Write the characters exactly as shown in the following tables. Don’t write the dot. It’s only there to show you where to begin writing the character. • The Graffiti 2 writing area, whether the input area or the full screen, has two sections. Write lowercase letters on the left, numbers on the right, and capital letters across the middle. • Write at a natural speed, and do not write on a slant. • Press firmly. • Write large characters. If you’re already familiar with Graffiti writing from an older Palm Powered™ device, Graffiti 2 writing will be easy to master. Characters are entered in exactly the same way, except for i, t, k, and the number 4. These letters are now made with two strokes, just the way you would write them if you were using a pen and paper. Also, you no longer have to use the Punctuation Shift stroke for common punctuation like periods and commas or for @. Just write these characters on the correct side of the input area and your device immediately recognizes them. 61 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip You can select alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters. Choose the method that’s most natural for you. Graffiti 2 alphabet 0 Write lowercase letters on LEFT side, and capital letters across MIDDLE of input area Letter LifeDrive from palmOne Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Stroke 62 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 numbers 0 Write numbers on RIGHT side of input area Number LifeDrive from palmOne Stroke Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Stroke 63 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 punctuation marks 0 Write these marks on LEFT side of input area Mark Stroke Mark Period . Ampersand & Comma , Carriage return Apostrophe ‘ At @ Space Quotation mark “ Question mark ? Tab Stroke Exclamation point ! 0 LifeDrive from palmOne 64 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device 0 Tip Having trouble with the plus sign or asterisk symbol? Use the Punctuation Shift stroke first and then make the character. Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area Mark Stroke Mark Period . Backslash \ Comma , Slash / Tilde ñ Left parenthesis ( Dash – Right parenthesis ) Plus + Equal sign = Stroke Asterisk * LifeDrive from palmOne 65 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip Having trouble accenting characters? You can always open the onscreen keyboard, tap int., and then tap the character you need. Graffiti 2 accented characters Tip Get help writing any of the Graffiti 2 characters in most applications. Open the Edit menu and select Graffiti 2 Help. LifeDrive from palmOne For accented characters, write the letter on the left side of the input area, and then write the accent on the right side of the input area. 0 Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area Accent Stroke Accent Acute á Dieresis ä Grave à Circumflex â Tilde ã Ring å Stroke 66 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 gestures 0 Write gestures on LEFT side, or across the middle of input area Gesture LifeDrive from palmOne Stroke Gesture Cut Paste Copy Undo Stroke 67 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip If you accidentally enter the Punctuation Shift stroke, enter it again to cancel it, or wait a moment and it automatically disappears. Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters Symbols and other special characters can be written on either side of the input area, using the Punctuation Shift stroke. 0 0 1 Enter the Punctuation Shift stroke. Did You Know? Writing two Punctuation Shift strokes cancels the automatic capitalization of the first letter of a new entry or sentence. When Punctuation Shift is active, an indicator appears in the lowerright corner of the screen. Punctuation Shift indicator 2 Write the symbol or other special character shown in the following table. You can write a symbol or special character anywhere in the input area. 3 Enter another Punctuation Shift stroke to finish the character and to make it appear more quickly. Done LifeDrive from palmOne Once the Punctuation Shift indicator disappears, you see the character. 68 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters 0 Write symbols on EITHER side of input area LifeDrive from palmOne 69 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Graffiti 2 contains several ShortCuts to make entering common information easier. For example, when you write the ShortCut stroke followed by dts, you automatically enter the current date and time. You can also create your own ShortCuts. 0 0 1 Write the ShortCut stroke This stroke appears at the insertion point. 2 . Write the ShortCut character from the following table. You can write ShortCuts on the left side of the input area, or across the middle. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The ShortCut stroke is replaced by the text the character represents. 70 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Graffiti 2 ShortCuts 0 Write ShortCuts on LEFT side, or across MIDDLE of input area LifeDrive from palmOne Entry ShortCut Entry ShortCut Date stamp ds Time stamp ts Date/time stamp dts Meeting me Breakfast br Lunch lu Dinner di 71 » CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Key Term Entry An item in an application such as a contact in Contacts or an appointment in Calendar. Entering information with the onscreen keyboard Tip You can enter text whenever you see a blinking cursor on the screen. You can use the onscreen keyboard in any application where you need to enter text, numbers, or symbols on your device. 0 1 Open an entry: a. Open an application. b. Select an entry or select New. 2 3 Tap Input on the status bar to open the input area. Tap abc or 123 to open the alphabetic or numeric keyboard, respectively. Continued Tap to open keyboards LifeDrive from palmOne 72 CHAPTER 4 Tip When a keyboard is open, you can tap abc, 123, or int. to open any of the other keyboards. Tap the icon in the lower right corner (to the right of 123) to return to the Graffiti 2 input area. Entering Information on Your Device 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL Select from among five different keyboards. abc - lowercase Tab Backspace Carriage return Caps shift Tap here to display lowercase keyboard ABC - uppercase Tap here to display uppercase keyboard 123 - numeric Tap here to display numeric keyboard int. - international Tap here to display international keyboard NOTE Tap int. and then ABC to open the international uppercase keyboard. 5 Tap the characters to enter text, numbers, and symbols. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 73 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Entering info from Contacts into another application Having lunch with someone whose info you have in Contacts? Use Phone Lookup to quickly enter the person’s name and primary contact info into the appointment you create in Calendar. This feature is available in Calendar, Memos, Tasks, and Expense. 0 1 Open an entry: a. Open an application. b. Select an entry or select New. In Expense only: Select Details, and then select Attendees. 2 Add the contact from Phone Lookup: a. Tap where you want to enter the contact. b. Open the menus. c. Select Options, and then select Phone Lookup. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 74 CHAPTER 4 Tip You can also enter the first few letters of the contact’s name, and the open Phone Lookup. The first contact name matching the letters you entered is highlighted. Entering Information on Your Device Cont’d. d. Select the contact, and then select Add. 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL To add another contact, repeat step 2. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The name and phone number of the contact are automatically entered. 75 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Editing information Editing information on your device is similar to editing with word-processing applications on your computer. Select the information, and then apply the correct command. Selecting information There are several ways to select information that you want to edit or delete. LifeDrive from palmOne Selecting text Place the cursor before or after the text you want to select, and drag the cursor over all the text you want to select. Selecting a word Tap twice on a word to select it. Selecting a line Tap three times anywhere in a line to select it. This selects the final return character or space as well as any text. 76 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip There are even faster ways to copy and paste information: Copying and pasting information Copying and pasting information on your device is similar to editing with word-processing applications on your computer. 0 • Use Graffiti 2 gestures. • Use the Graffiti 2 Command stroke and the menu shortcut for cut, copy, or paste (/X, /C, /P). • Select the text, write the command stroke, and then tap the icon for cut or copy from the command toolbar that appears. 1 Select the information you want to copy. 2 Copy the information: a. Open the menus. b. Select Edit, and then select Copy. 3 Tap where you want to paste the information. 4 Select Edit, and then select Paste. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 77 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tip Delete information with Graffiti 2 writing. Select the information, and then draw a line from right to left in the input area. Deleting information Delete all or part of an entry with the Cut command. 0 1 Select the information you want to delete. 2 Delete the information: a. Open the menus. b. Select Edit, and then select Cut. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 78 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems entering information or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Sharing Beaming or sending information to another Palm Powered device Customizing • Selecting alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters • Creating your own Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about entering information 79 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer In this chapter Program memory and the hard drive How can I work with information? LifeDrive™ Manager and Drive Mode With its large hard drive, your device becomes a four-gigabyte (4GB) extension of your computer that you can take with you on the go. This extra capacity lets you carry many more of your documents, folders, photos, and music files with you. Using LifeDrive Manager Using Drive Mode Synchronizing information Other ways of managing information Removing information Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne But the drive offers more than just storage capacity. With the LifeDrive™ Manager application, you can simply drag and drop files and folders to transfer them from your Windows computer to the drive, organize them the way you want, and work with them directly on the device. Any time you make changes, you can synchronize to ensure that the most current version of your information exists on both your device and your computer. Benefits • Quickly enter and update information on your device and your computer • Transfer and work with applications, files, and folders on your device • Synchronize individual files or entire folders with one button • Protect your information by quickly backing up and saving files and folders to your computer 80 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Did You Know? Your device saves all information, including information on the drive and in program memory, even if the battery drains completely; none of your information is lost. Simply recharge to access the information again. Program memory and the hard drive Tip Use Quick Install (Windows) or the Send To Handheld droplet (Mac) to install applications to program memory. Your device contains two types of storage: program memory and the 4GB hard drive. 0 Program memory Your device includes 64MB of program memory for Palm OS® applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos, as well as email messages. Information in program memory is automatically updated when you do a full sync. For example, if you enter contact information on your computer, you can synchronize to update the info in Contacts on your device. The info for each Palm OS application—for example, individual contact entries—may be stored in your device’s program memory. You can view and work with this information from within the application itself. You cannot, however, view any info stored in program memory directly using Files or LifeDrive Manager. 0 Hard drive The 4GB hard drive (approximately 3.85GB of memory available to the user) works similarly to other standard USB drives. You can store any type of file, folder, or application on this drive. View and access the contents of the drive using the Files application on your device, or view the contents using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. You can manage items on the drive in various ways: copying, moving, deleting, renaming, and so on, by using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your device. When you copy a file or folder from your computer to your device using LifeDrive Manager, you can choose to synchronize that file or folder. Another method of storage that you may already be familiar with is an expansion card. You can view and access files or folders on an expansion card using the Files application on your device, and manage your files on a card using LifeDrive Manager or Drive Mode. LifeDrive from palmOne 81 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip Be sure to take your USB sync cable with you so that you can connect your device to another computer to synchronize, use LifeDrive Manager, or use Drive Mode. It’s a good idea to take your AC charger with you as well, especially if you plan to use Drive Mode to transfer files to another computer. Be sure to keep your device plugged into the charger, and the charger plugged into an outlet, when using Drive Mode for an extended period of time or when transferring large files. You can also access the files on the drive or on an expansion card by opening the corresponding application and browsing to the file. Tip Enter information for applications such as Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks in Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer, then do a full sync to transfer the information to your device. LifeDrive from palmOne How can I work with information? There are three main methods for moving and working with information between your device and a computer. These methods are discussed in detail in this chapter. LifeDrive Manager (Windows only) Use LifeDrive Manager to transfer files and folders to your device’s drive. LifeDrive Manager instantly copies or moves the items you select. You can choose whether to synchronize items you move using LifeDrive Manager, as well as whether to convert photos and videos for best viewing on your device. Drive Mode Use Drive Mode when your device is connected to a Mac computer to move files between a computer and your device’s hard drive. Also use Drive Mode to open, move, or copy files on your device when it’s connected to a Windows computer that does not have LifeDrive Manager installed. While you’re using Drive Mode, you cannot use any other feature of your device. Synchronization Synchronization updates and backs up information between your device and your computer. Information entered in one place is automatically updated in the other, and info in your device’s program memory and on the hard drive is backed up on your computer. You can synchronize in one of two ways: do a full sync of everything on your device using the sync button on the USB sync cable, or sync selected items on the hard drive using LifeDrive Manager. You can also synchronize to install applications to your program memory. 82 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip If you are transferring a large video file and choose the Format for device option, you can interrupt the formatting process if, for example, you need to take your device with you away from you desk. When you reconnect your device and your computer, the formatting process picks up where it left off. LifeDrive™ Manager and Drive Mode Both LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode let you work with files and folders between your device and your computer. So when would you use one method or the other? Here are some common situations in which you would choose LifeDrive Manager or Drive Mode. LifeDrive Manager LifeDrive Manager is available only on Windows computers. Use it in the following situations: • You are transferring files or folders to your device and want to be able to synchronize them. • You are transferring photos or videos and want to convert them for best viewing on your device. • You are carrying a file that cannot be opened on your device and you want to work with it on another computer. • You want to work on your device during the transfer process. With LifeDrive Manager, you can continue to work with information on your device as files or folders are being moved or copied. You cannot use any of the features of your device when it is in Drive Mode. Drive Mode You can use Drive Mode on both Windows and Mac computers. Use it in the following situations: • You are transferring files or folders to or from a Mac computer. • You are transferring items using a Windows computer that does not have LifeDrive Manager. • You have a file on your device that you want to work with using a computer, but you don't want to copy the file to the computer. With LifeDrive Manager, you must first transfer a file or folder to your computer before you can open or edit the item. With Drive Mode, you can use the Windows Explorer or Finder window to open a file or folder directly from your device. So, for example, if you are a guest at a computer and do not want to put a copy of a confidential file on that computer, you can use Drive Mode to open and work with the file directly on your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 83 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip When you copy a photo or video to your device, select the option Format for device if you plan to view the item on your device only. Formatting reduces the file size and fits the photo or video to your device’s screen. Using LifeDrive Manager Use the Copy or Keep Synchronized option if you plan to transfer the photo from your device to another computer. This keeps the original file size, resolution, and file type intact. NOTE On a Mac computer, use Drive Mode to move files to your device’s hard drive. WINDOWS ONLY On a Windows computer, LifeDrive Manager provides a live window to your device’s hard drive. Use LifeDrive Manager to copy, move, and manage files and folders on your device. LifeDrive Manager copies and moves items instantly; you do not need to synchronize to transfer the information. With LifeDrive Manager you can work on your device even while transferring files. Using LifeDrive Manager, quickly move and carry large numbers of your important Office files, photos, music, videos, and other files on your device. Use the Files application to access and edit information on your device, or use Drive Mode to access and edit that information when you’re connected to a computer that supports external flash drives. LifeDrive Manager is installed automatically when you install Palm® Desktop software. When the application is installed, an icon appears in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen. Right-click the icon and select menu commands to open LifeDrive Manager or to synchronize all sync items on the drive. When you connect your device to your computer and transfer one or more files or folders into the LifeDrive Manager window, a dialog box appears, asking you how you want the item to be treated. Select one of the following options: Copy The items are simply copied to your device and are not updated during synchronization. Format for device If you transfer photo or video files to your device, you can choose to convert them to a format that works best on (is optimized for) your device. Converting a photo or video does any or all of the following, if necessary: changes the item to a format that your device can display; rotates the item so that it’s displayed correctly; and reduces the file to a size that fits your device’s screen, resulting in a smaller file size. In some cases, conversion might result in a lower resolution for the photo or video. LifeDrive from palmOne 84 » CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term Sync item A file or folder on your device’s hard drive that you choose to synchronize. If you create a sync folder, all items in the folder— including any subfolders—are automatically sync items. If you choose the Format for device option, the original photo or video remains in its unchanged format on your computer. If you are transferring a group of photo and/or video files at once—for example, if you select and drag them all together or if the files are all in one folder—your formatting choice applies to all of the files. You cannot choose to format some files transferred as a group and not others. Keep Synchronized You can choose to make the items you copy sync items—that is, items that are updated when you synchronize your device with your computer. If you select this option, any changes you make to the file or folder in one location (device or computer) are made automatically in the other the next time you synchronize. If you transfer multiple files or folders at once, your synchronization choice applies to all of the items; you cannot choose to synchronize some but not others. NOTE If you transfer a file or folder into a folder that displays the sync item icon , the item becomes a sync item even if you choose Copy or Format for device. However, the item synchronizes to the corresponding sync folder on your computer, not to the original file or folder. So you have two versions of the file or folder on your computer: the original one in its original location (which does not sync), and the new one in the sync folder (which does sync). For example, suppose you copy a music file called MySong in the MyMusic folder on your computer to the Music folder on your device, which you have set as a sync folder. You choose Copy during the transfer. Because the Music folder is a sync folder, when you synchronize, a copy of the Music folder containing the file MySong appears on your computer. However, the original file MySong remains in the MyMusic folder on your computer and is not synchronized. Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager icon If you want your files or folders to go to a default location on your device, you can simply drag the items onto the LifeDrive Manager icon on your computer. LifeDrive Manager copies the items to a specific location on your device’s drive depending on the file types. LifeDrive from palmOne 85 » CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term Root level The “top” level of the hard drive, that is, the level of files and folders you see when you click the drive icon itself. Default folders: Applications, Documents, Music, Photos & Videos items to one of these four folders if both of the following are true: Tip If you copy a group of files or folders to the root level of your device’s drive, you can then use the LifeDrive Manager window to move those items to the locations you want on the drive. LifeDrive Manager copies the • All of the items you drag to the LifeDrive Manager icon are of a type associated with one of these folders—for example, JPG, BMP, and ASF files that are associated with the Photos & Video folder. • You select the Copy or the Format for device option. Root level of the drive LifeDrive Manager copies all of the items to the root level of the hard drive—not to a specific folder—if any of the following are true: • Any of the items you drag is not associated with a default folder—for example, you transfer photos, videos, and also a graphic that is not a recognized file type for the Photos & Videos folder. • The items are associated with more than one default folder—for example, you are transferring both photos and music files at the same time. • You select the Keep Synchronized option. 0 1 2 3 Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into your device. Select the item or items you want to copy to your device’s drive. Drag the items onto the LifeDrive Manager icon on your computer desktop. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 86 CHAPTER 5 Tip If another task is running that uses the USB sync cable—such as synchronizing or transferring music files with Pocket Tunes™— LifeDrive Manager waits until the task is complete before the file transfer takes place. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 4 Select one of the following options: Copy The items are copied to the correct default folder or to the root level of your device’s drive. With this option, photos and videos are transferred in their original format. Format for device Photos and videos are converted to a format that works best on your device. This option is available only if the files or folders you are transferring include one or more photos or videos. Keep Synchronized The items are copied to the root level of your device’s drive and are included in synchronization. This means that when an item is updated on your device, it is automatically updated on your computer, and vice versa, when you synchronize. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 87 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip You can also open the LifeDrive Manager window by right-clicking the LifeDrive Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen and then selecting Open LifeDrive Manager. Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager window Did You Know? Your device’s drive appears in the LifeDrive Manager window as an icon named LifeDrive, but you can rename it anything you want. Rightclick the icon, click Rename, and then enter a new name for the drive. Tip If you do not see any files or folders on the drive or an expansion card, click the plus-sign icon to the left of the drive/card name in the left pane of the LifeDrive Manager window. The LifeDrive Manager window lets you place files or folders anywhere on your device’s drive, regardless of file type. 0f 1 Open LifeDrive Manager: a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into your device. b. Double-click the LifeDrive Manager icon on your computer desktop to open the LifeDrive Manager window. The window opens to display the contents of the drive on your device; if an expansion card is inserted into your device’s expansion slot, the window displays the card’s contents as well. NOTE If your device is not connected to your computer or is unavailable, a message appears. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 88 CHAPTER 5 Did You Know? You can work with files and folders in the LifeDrive Manager window in many of the same ways that you work with files and folders in Windows Explorer. For example, click a plus sign to the left of a folder name to view the contents of a folder; select multiple items using the Control or Shift buttons on your keyboard; or click the Refresh button to view updated contents of the device’s drive or expansion card. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Cont’d. 2 NOTE LifeDrive Manager recognizes any security preferences you set for your device. For example, if your device is locked, LifeDrive Manager displays an alert message stating that you must unlock your device before using LifeDrive Manager. A message also appears if your device is not connected to your computer or is unavailable for any other reason. Drag, copy, or move files or folders from the desktop into the LifeDrive Manager window to the location you want on your device’s drive. You can also open the folder to which you want to move the files on your device’s drive, and then click the Copy Files from PC or Copy Folder from PC button on the LifeDrive Manager toolbar. NOTE You can use LifeDrive Manager to install an application in the Applications folder on your drive, but only some applications are designed to run on your device from that location. To ensure that the application will run on your device, install it to program memory. Continued You can also manage files or folders by rightclicking a file or folder name to open a menu that lets you rename, move, copy, delete, and perform other tasks on the file or folder. LifeDrive from palmOne 89 CHAPTER 5 Tip You can also transfer files or folders from your device to your computer by dragging the item from the LifeDrive Manager window onto your computer desktop. Likewise, you can drag an item from folder to another on your device’s drive in the LifeDrive Window to transfer it—or right-click on an item and select Copy, then rightclick on the destination folder and click Paste. Tip You cannot double-click a file in LifeDrive Manager to open it, as you do in Windows Explorer. If you double-click a file in LifeDrive Manager, you are prompted to save the file to your computer before opening and working on it on your computer. After working on the file on your computer, use LifeDrive Manager to move or copy the file back to your device. LifeDrive from palmOne Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 Select one of the following options: Copy The items are copied to the location you specify. With this option, photos and videos are transferred in their original format. Format for device Photos and videos are converted to a format that works best on your device. This option is available only if the files or folders you are transferring include one or more photos or videos. Keep Synchronized The items are copied to the root level of your device’s drive and are included in synchronization. This means that when an item is updated on your device, it is automatically updated on your computer, and vice versa. This option is available only if you are transferring files or folders to the root level of your device’s drive. Done 90 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip You can also select the item you want to rename and then press F2 on your computer keyboard to enter the new name. Renaming a file or folder You can use LifeDrive Manager to change the name of a file that is on your device. For example, you may want to add the date or your initials at the end of a file that you have changed. If you rename a sync item—either a file or a folder—on your device, the next time you synchronize, the item is renamed on your computer and the two renamed items continue to synchronize. If you rename a sync item on your computer, however, the next time you synchronize, the original item remains as is on your device and is no longer a sync item. NOTE You cannot rename the default folders on your device drive. 0 1 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. 2 Rename the item: a. Right-click the item you want to rename. b. Select Rename. c. Type the new name, and then press Enter on your computer keyboard. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 91 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Deleting a file or folder When you delete a file or folder in the LifeDrive Manager window, you only delete it from your device. If the file or folder is a sync item, however, and you don't want it to show up on your device again the next time you synchronize, you need to turn on a setting to delete the item from your computer as well. NOTE You cannot delete the default folders on your device drive. 0 1 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. 2 Delete the item: a. Right-click the item you want to delete. b. Select Delete. c. Select Yes to confirm that you want to delete the file. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 92 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip The Properties dialog box contains a Properties tab that displays information about the selected files or folders and lets you change file or folder attributes. See the LifeDrive Manager online Help for detailed information. In the LifeDrive Manager window, open the Help menu and select LifeDrive Manager Help. Deleting sync items from your computer when they are deleted from your device When you turn on the setting to delete a sync item from your computer and then delete the item from your device, the item is deleted from your computer the next time you synchronize. 0 1 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. 2 Set up automatic deletion: a. Right-click a folder containing the item or items you want to delete. The folder must be a sync item. b. Select Properties, and then click the Synchronize tab. c. Select Delete Files on Your PC, and then click OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 93 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip If you plan to use Drive Mode, remember to bring your USB sync cable and AC charger with you, so you can connect to other computers. Using Drive Mode On a Mac computer, use Drive Mode to move files between a computer and your device’s hard drive. If you are at a Windows computer that doesn’t have LifeDrive Manager installed—a computer at a hotel or your friend’s house, for example—use Drive Mode to open, move, or copy files on your device. With Drive Mode, your device connects to your computer like an external removable drive such as a CD drive. The computer must support external removable drives in order for you to use Drive Mode with the computer. Most current operating systems such as Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Mac OS X support external removable drives. NOTE While you’re using Drive Mode, you cannot use any other feature of your device, including LifeDrive Manager and synchronization. You can, however, continue to receive alerts such as notifications of appointments or new email messages. If you select an alert or attempt to use your device in some other way—for example, by pressing a quick button—a message appears, asking if you want to continue using Drive Mode or disconnect from Drive Mode to use your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 94 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 0 Tip If you format your device’s hard drive or an expansion card while in Drive Mode, be sure to select the file system type FAT32; do not select FAT or any other file system type. If you select any other file system type, your device cannot recognize the information on the drive or on the card. Note that if you reformat the hard drive, all information on the drive is deleted—and if there are sync items and you have selected the Delete on PC option, those items are deleted on your computer as well the next time you synchronize. LifeDrive from palmOne 1 Prepare your device and your computer: a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of the computer, and then insert the other end into your device. b. Connect the AC charger cable to the USB sync cable, and then plug it into a power outlet. NOTE You can use Drive Mode without plugging your device into a power outlet, but we recommend that you keep it plugged in to avoid losing information. 2 Turn on Drive Mode: a. Go to Applications and select Drive Mode . b. Select Turn Drive Mode On. Continued 95 CHAPTER 5 Tip You can work with files and folders on your device in Drive Mode in exactly the same way that you work with any other file or folder in My Computer, Windows Explorer, or Finder. Unlike in LifeDrive Manager, you can double-click a file from the computer’s window to open it from your device in Drive Mode, as long as your computer has software that can open the file. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 Open My Computer or Windows Explorer on a Windows computer, or Finder on a Mac computer. Look for the icon named LIFEDRIVE, representing your device in the list of available drives on the computer. If there is an expansion card inserted into your device’s expansion slot, it may appear as a drive named CARD. NOTE On a Windows computer, the expansion card icon may appear even if there is no card inserted into your device’s expansion card slot. If you try to work with the icon, an error message appears. Device appears as drive named LIFEDRIVE Expansion card appears as drive named CARD 4 Work with the files on your device as you would on any other external removable drive. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 96 CHAPTER 5 Tip If you are working with an expansion card, you must eject the device from the computer before removing the card in order to avoid losing info on the card. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 5 When you have finished working with Drive Mode, do the following: [ ! ] IMPORTANT To avoid losing any information that was transferred, be sure to follow these steps to disconnect from Drive Mode before you unplug your device from your computer. a. Eject the device from your Windows computer by selecting the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen. Select the option Stop Mass Storage USB Device that contains the drive letter for the device or the expansion card, and then wait for the message that says you can safely remove your device from your computer. On a Mac computer, select the Eject command from the File menu or drag the drive icon to the Eject icon on the Dock. If a confirmation message appears, click OK. b. Select Turn Drive Mode Off on your device screen, and then select Turn Off. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 97 » CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term HotSync® Technology that allows you to synchronize the information in your device’s program memory and any files or folders on the drive that you selected to copy and synchronize with the information on your computer. Synchronizing information Tip Folder sync is faster than a full sync, because it only synchronizes the items you select. Synchronizing means that information that is entered or updated in one place (your device or your computer) is automatically updated in the other. There’s no need to enter information twice. You can synchronize in one of two ways: Full sync Press the sync button on the USB sync cable to synchronize all information in your device’s program memory, as well as all sync items on the hard drive, with info on your computer. Full sync also backs up any files or folders on your hard drive that are not sync items to your computer. Folder sync (Windows only) Use the sync commands in the LifeDrive Manager window to synchronize a single sync item, a group of sync items, or all sync items on your device’s drive, with the corresponding info on your computer. Sync items can be individual files or entire folders, including subfolders. All sync items must be located at the root level of the hard drive. You cannot synchronize info in program memory using the LifeDrive Manager window. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize your device with your computer frequently so that you always have an up-to-date backup copy of the info on your device on your computer. Doing a full sync When you perform a full sync, the following information is updated between your device and your computer: Program memory If you use the default settings, information from all the following applications in program memory is transferred each time you synchronize your device with your computer using the button: If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in the same application in Outlook (Memos is called Notes in Outlook). You can also set up the VersaMail® application to synchronize email on your device with email in LifeDrive from palmOne 98 » CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Key Term HotSync® Manager Software you use to select synchronization settings and that must be active when you synchronize. Outlook. Other info, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with the corresponding info in Palm Desktop software. Did You Know? Everybody in your family can synchronize their device with the same copy of Palm Desktop software. Just make sure that each device has its own username; Palm Desktop software reads the username and recognizes the device during synchronization. Tip When you synchronize, any items on the hard drive that are not sync items are backed up to your computer. Backing up puts a copy of the file or folder on your computer, but it doesn't keep the two versions in sync. LifeDrive from palmOne If you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® account so that you can synchronize email and Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, info from those applications is synchronized with info in Microsoft Exchange, while information from the other applications listed previously is synchronized with info in Outlook or Palm Desktop. Desktop software Any information you enter using desktop software is updated with info in your device’s program memory. Sync items Any sync items on your device’s hard drive are updated. You can do a full sync in the following ways: • Using the USB sync cable attached to your device and your computer • Wirelessly using Wi-Fi® capabilities or Bluetooth® wireless technology on your device • Using your device’s infrared (IR) port • Connecting to your company’s network, either wirelessly or using a cable (Windows only) [ ! ] IMPORTANT The first time you synchronize, you must use the USB sync cable or your device’s IR port; you cannot use any of the other methods in this list, such as synchronizing using Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionality. If you followed the instructions to synchronize during initial setup, you’ve already covered this requirement. To synchronize, HotSync® Manager must be active. HotSync Manager is installed when you install Palm Desktop software from the software installation CD. If you haven’t run the install program from the CD, you don't have HotSync Manager on your computer. On a Windows computer, you know HotSync Manager is active when its icon appears in the lower-right corner of your screen. If the icon is not there, turn it on by clicking Start and then selecting Programs. Navigate to the palmOne program group, and select HotSync Manager. 99 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip If the Select User dialog box appears during synchronization, select the username of the person whose information you want to synchronize, and then click OK. Synchronizing using the cable 0 1 Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and then insert the other end into your device. Tip If you need help with synchronizing, see I can’t synchronize my device with my computer. 2 Synchronize your device with your computer: a. Press the sync button on the USB sync cable. b. When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device screen, and you can disconnect your device from the cable. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 100 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip When you synchronize, any items on the hard drive that are not sync items are backed up to your computer. Backing up puts a copy of the file or folder on your computer, but it doesn't keep the two versions in sync. You can manually back up an item in LifeDrive Manager by right-clicking the file or folder and selecting Save to PC, or by clicking the item and selecting the Save to PC icon from the LifeDrive Manager toolbar. Synchronizing using LifeDrive Manager Tip To turn off synchronization for a file or folder, right-click the item’s icon, and then select Turn off synchronization. WINDOWS ONLY When you transfer an item into the LifeDrive Manager window, you can identify whether you want to keep the item synchronized with its original on the computer. When you’re ready to do a folder sync, you can select whether to sync selected items, or all sync items on your device's hard drive. LifeDrive Manager synchronizes only the items you select on the hard drive, not any of the information in program memory. Do a full sync to synchronize both hard drive sync items and program memory info. If you selected the Keep Synchronized option when you transferred a file or folder to your device, that item is already a sync item. However, you can turn off synchronization for any such folder or file. Creating sync items 0 1 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. 2 Select items to synchronize: a. Navigate to the file or folder you want in the LifeDrive Manager window. b. Right-click the item’s icon, and then select Turn on synchronization. The file or folder is now a sync item. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 101 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Did You Know? If you put a file or folder that you chose not to make a sync item into a folder that is a sync folder, the item is synchronized regardless of your choice. After the next sync, a copy of the sync folder appears on both your device and your computer, with the sync version of the item inside. The original file or folder that you transferred using the Copy or Format for device option remains in its original location and is not synchronized. Doing a folder sync Tip You can also synchronize all sync items by rightclicking the LifeDrive Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen and then selecting Sync All Now. LifeDrive from palmOne 0 1 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. 2 Select one of the following synchronization options: Synchronize a single file or folder Right-click the item’s icon, select Sync actions, and then select Synchronize this item now. Synchronize multiple sync items Select the items you want, right-click any item’s icon, select Sync actions, and then select Synchronize this item now. Synchronize all sync items on the drive Click Sync All Now on the toolbar at the top of the LifeDrive Manager window. Click here Done A synchronization progress screen appears. 102 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip To check when an item was last synchronized, right-click the item, select Sync Actions, and then select Check Sync Status. Locating sync items on your computer LifeDrive Manager can quickly open the folder on your computer where a sync item is stored. 0 1 Open the LifeDrive Manager window. 2 Locate the item on your computer: a. In the LifeDrive Manager window, right-click the item you want to locate on your computer. b. Select Sync Actions. c. Select Locate on PC. LifeDrive Manager opens the folder where the item is located. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 103 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip The Palm Desktop online Help has lots of info about how to use Palm Desktop software. Open the Help menu and select Palm Desktop Help. Entering information using desktop software Use Palm Desktop or Outlook to enter information on your computer. When you do a full sync, the information is updated on your device. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Open an application in Palm Desktop software: a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop. b. Click the icon in the Launch bar to open the application. Launch bar New Edit Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 104 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 2 Do one of the following: • Click New in the lower-left corner of the screen to create a new entry. • Click an existing entry, and then click Edit in the lower-left corner of the screen. 3 Enter the information, and then click OK. 4 Do a full sync to transfer the information to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 105 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 Open an application: a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer. b. Click the icon in the toolbar to open the application. 2 Do one of the following: • Click New in the upper-left corner of the screen to create a new entry. • Click an existing entry, and then click Edit in the upper-left corner of the screen. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 106 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 Enter the information, and then click OK. 4 Do a full sync to transfer the information to your device. Done Customizing your synchronization settings You can set the following options for synchronization: • Choosing how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your device (Windows only) • Enabling or disabling synchronization on your computer, setting whether synchronization is enabled automatically when you start your computer, and choosing how much information to include in the synchronization troubleshooting log (Mac only) • Choosing how application information is updated during a full sync LifeDrive from palmOne 107 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Choosing how your computer responds to synchronization requests WINDOWS ONLY In order for your computer to respond when you initiate synchronization on your device, HotSync Manager must be running. You can choose whether HotSync Manager always runs automatically, or whether you must perform some action to start HotSync Manager. 0 1 Open the synchronization options screen: a. Click the HotSync Manager icon your screen. in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of b. Select Setup. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 108 CHAPTER 5 Tip Use the default setting Always available if you’re not sure which option you want. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 2 Tip If you select Manual, you must turn off HotSync Manager, which is always on by default. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lowerright corner of your screen, and then click Exit. To start HotSync Manager when you want to synchronize, click Start, and then select Programs. Navigate to the palmOne program group, and select HotSync Manager. Note that if you turn HotSync Manager on, it stays on until you turn off your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne Select how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your device: Always available HotSync Manager runs automatically every time you initiate synchronization on your device. Available only when the Palm Desktop is running You must open Palm Desktop software in order for HotSync Manager to run. Manual You must manually turn HotSync Manager on each time you want your computer to respond to a synchronization request. 3 Click OK. Done 109 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Setting synchronization options MAC ONLY 0 1 Open the synchronization options screen: a. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder. b. Click the HotSync Controls tab. 2 Select the synchronization options you want: Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 110 CHAPTER 5 » Key Term Conduit The synchronization software that transfers information between an application on your computer and the same application on your device. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Cont’d. HotSync Enabled/Disabled Sets your computer to respond to synchronization requests from your device. Enable HotSync software at system startup Sets your computer to automatically respond to synchronization requests each time you start your computer. If this option is not selected, you must open HotSync Manager and select the Enabled option before you can synchronize. Show more detail in HotSync Log Includes more troubleshooting information in the log that is generated when you synchronize. 3 Close the HotSync Software Setup window. Done Choosing whether application information is updated By default, when information in each application included during a full sync is updated in one place (your device or your computer), it is updated in the other. However, for each application, you can choose whether information that has been updated in one place is updated in the other during the next full sync. LifeDrive from palmOne 111 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip Windows For information on choosing whether application information is updated if you are synchronizing your device with Outlook, see the online Outlook synchronization Help. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen, select Custom, and then select one of the Outlook applications from the list. Select Change, and then select one of the applications from the list. WINDOWS ONLY LifeDrive from palmOne 0 1 Select the application you want to customize: a. Click the HotSync Manager icon your screen. in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of b. Select Custom. c. Select the appropriate username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen. d. Select the application you want, and then click Change. Continued 112 CHAPTER 5 Tip You should generally keep the default setting (Synchronize the files) for all applications. Choose an overwrite option only if you have a specific reason for sending updates only one way. Choose Do Nothing if you never use an application. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 2 Select how information is updated during the next synchronization: Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place (your device or computer) is updated in the other during synchronization. Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your computer is updated on your device during synchronization. If information has been changed on your device, it will be replaced by the information from your computer, and you will lose the changes you made on your device. Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your device is updated on your computer during synchronization. If information has been changed on your computer, it will be replaced by the information from your device, and you will lose the changes you made on your computer. Do Nothing No synchronization occurs, so any changes made on either your device or your computer are not updated in the other location. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 113 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 4 To use the option you select on an ongoing basis, check the Set as default box. If you do not select this box, the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting (Synchronize the files). Click OK, and then click Done. Done MAC ONLY 0 1 Select the application you want to customize: a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder. b. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings. c. From the User pop-up menu, select the appropriate username. d. Select an application. e. Click Conduit Settings. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 114 CHAPTER 5 Tip You should generally keep the default setting (Synchronize the files) for all applications. Choose an overwrite option only if you have a specific reason for sending updates only one way. Choose Do Nothing if you never use an application. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 2 Select how information is updated during the next synchronization: Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place (your device or computer) is updated in the other during synchronization. Macintosh overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your computer is updated on your device during synchronization. If information has been changed on your device, it will be replaced by the information from your computer, and you will lose the changes you made on your device. Handheld overwrites Macintosh Information that has been changed on your device is updated on your computer during synchronization. If information has been changed on your computer, it will be replaced by the information from your device, and you will lose the changes you made on your computer. Do Nothing No synchronization occurs, so any changes made on either your device or your computer are not updated in the other location. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 115 CHAPTER 5 Did You Know? Most device application files have the extension PRC or PDB. Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 4 To use the option you select on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. If you do not click this button, the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting (Synchronize the files). Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings window. Done Installing applications to your device Use Quick Install (Windows) or the Send To Handheld droplet (Mac) to install applications on your device when you synchronize. The applications are stored in program memory and are optimized for use on the device. NOTE You can also use LifeDrive Manager to install applications to the Applications folder on your hard drive. This is useful if your program memory becomes full and you cannot install any more applications there. However, some applications are not designed to run from the Applications folder and must be installed to program memory to run correctly. LifeDrive from palmOne 116 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip A confirmation dialog box shows whether the items will be copied to your device or to an expansion card. You can choose which device will receive the items by selecting the username in the User drop-down box in the upper-right corner. Using Quick Install When you install Palm Desktop software on your Windows computer, you also automatically install Quick Install. This tool makes it easy to install applications when you synchronize. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Open Palm Desktop software. 2 Copy the application: Did You Know? You can move multiple applications into the Quick Install window to have them ready for installation the next time you synchronize. a. Click the Quick Install icon in the Launch bar at the left of the window. b. Drag and drop the application onto the Quick Install window. c. When the confirmation dialog box appears, confirm your username, the application name, and the destination, and then click OK. 3 Do a full sync to install the file on your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 117 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip In Mac OS X, you can make the Send To Handheld droplet a permanent part of your desktop by dragging the droplet to the Dock. Then simply drag files you want to transfer to your device onto the droplet in the Dock. Installing applications from a Mac computer Tip Use the Send To Handheld droplet to install music files, photos, and videos to your device. You can install applications from a Mac computer by dragging and dropping them onto the Send To Handheld droplet, or by using the commands on the HotSync menu. Using the Send To Handheld droplet MAC ONLY 0 1 Copy or download the application(s) you want to install on your computer. 2 Drag and drop the files onto the Send To Handheld droplet: a. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder. b. In the Send to Handheld dialog box, select your username and click OK. 3 Do a full sync to install the file on your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 118 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip To move applications between your device and the expansion card, click Change Destination. Use the arrows to move the files, and then click OK. Using commands in the HotSync menu Tip If you do not see the application or file in the folder, go to the folder that contains the application you want to install. MAC ONLY 0 1 2 Copy or download the application you want to install on your computer. Select the files to install on your device: a. In the Palm folder, doubleclick the HotSync Manager. b. Select the HotSync menu, and then select Install Handheld files. c. In the User pop-up menu, select the name that corresponds to your device. d. Click Add to List. e. Select the file(s) you want to install. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 119 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 3 Install the files on your device: a. Click Add File. b. Close the Install Device Files window. c. Synchronize your device with your computer. Done Other ways of managing information You can move and manage information on your device and your computer in the following additional ways: • Importing information from other applications into Palm Desktop software • Restoring archived info on your computer • Installing additional applications from the software installation CD • Checking space and version numbers of applications on your device LifeDrive from palmOne 120 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tip Palm Desktop Help has lots of information about importing from other applications, including step-by-step instructions. Open the Help menu in Palm Desktop software and select Palm Desktop Help for more details. Importing information from other applications Do you have information on your computer in spreadsheets or databases and want to transfer it to your device? Don’t spend time retyping it. Instead, import the info into Palm Desktop software. Palm Desktop software can import the following types of files: Calendar vCal/iCal (VCS/ICS) and Calendar archive (DBA) Contacts vCard (VCF), Contacts archive (ABA) Memos Comma-delimited (CSV, TXT), tab-delimited (TAB, TSV, TXT), Memos archive (MPA), Text (TXT) Tasks Tasks archive (TDA) WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats. 2 Import the file into Palm Desktop software: a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop. b. Click the icon in the launch bar for the application you want to import the information into. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 121 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Cont’d. c. Click File, and then click Import. d. Follow the onscreen instructions to map the fields in your file to the fields in Palm Desktop software, and import the file. 3 Imported fields Do a full sync. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 122 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats. 2 Import the file into Palm Desktop software: a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer. b. Click the icon on the toolbar for the application into which you want to import information. c. Click File, and then click Import. d. Follow the onscreen instructions to import the file. 3 Do a full sync. Done Restoring archived items on your computer In many applications, you can save a copy of an item that you deleted from your device or desktop software to an archive folder on your computer. This frees up space on your device, while ensuring the information is available if you need it in the future. You can restore individual entries or an entire archive file to the related application in your desktop software. The Palm Desktop online Help and the Microsoft Outlook online Help have lots of info about how to restore archived files. Refer to these Help files for details. LifeDrive from palmOne 123 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Installing the additional software from the CD Your device comes with many applications that are already installed and ready to use. The CD that came with your device includes lots of other applications to make your device even more useful and more fun. You can install these applications at any time. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Insert the CD into your computer. 2 On the Discover your device screen, click Add software to your device. 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to install the applications you want. 4 Do a full sync. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 124 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer MAC ONLY 0 1 Insert the CD into your computer. 2 Double-click the Essential Software folder. 3 Install the applications you want. 4 Do a full sync. Done Checking space and version numbers Before you install a file or an application, it’s important to make sure you have enough space for it. You may also want to check the version number of applications that are already on your device or expansion card, in case you’re interested in upgrading them. LifeDrive from palmOne 125 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 0 1 Open the Info dialog box: a. Go to Applications and select HotSync . b. Open the menus. c. Select Info on the App menu. 2 View space info and version numbers: Pick list a. Select the Device pick list and select one of these options: Device Get information about applications stored on your device. Expansion card name Get information about applications stored on your expansion card. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 126 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Cont’d. b. Select one of the following options, and then select Done: Version Displays the version numbers of all of your applications. Size Shows how much space each application occupies. The bar at the top shows the total space currently in use on your device or expansion card. Records Shows the number of records in an application. Done Removing information You can remove applications from your device, and remove Palm Desktop software from your computer. Removing an application from your device If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer want some applications you installed, you can remove them from your device or from an expansion card. NOTE You can remove only add-on applications, patches, and extensions that you install. You cannot remove the applications that are part of the operating system of your device. 0 1 Go to Applications. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 127 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer 2 Open the Delete dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete from the App menu. 3 Delete the application: a. Select the Delete From pick list, and then select Device or an expansion card. b. Select the application that you want to remove, and then select Delete. c. Select Yes, and then select Done. Done Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer WINDOWS ONLY NOTE Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. If you think you’ll never want to synchronize your device with your computer again, you can remove Palm Desktop software from your computer. This process removes only the application files. The information in your Users folder remains untouched. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you remove Palm Desktop software, you also remove the synchronization software and can no longer synchronize your information. Even if you want to synchronize with another personal information manager, like Microsoft Outlook, you must leave Palm Desktop software installed on your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 128 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer NOTE You may have to modify these steps to correspond with the operating system on your computer. 0 1 Open Add/Remove Programs: a. From the Start menu, select Settings, and then select Control Panel. b. Double-click the Add/Remove programs icon. 2 Remove Palm Desktop software: Change or Remove Programs a. Click Change or Remove Programs. b. Select Palm Desktop software, and then click Remove. c. Click Yes in the Confirm File Deletion box. d. Click OK, and then click Close. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 129 CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics: 0 Setting Up Switching between Palm Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Support If you’re having problems with moving and managing information or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Pocket Tunes • Transferring files from a CD to your device or to an expansion card • Listening to audio files on your device VersaMail Synchronizing email messages on your device with email messages on your computer Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about moving and managing information between your device and your computer 130 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts In this chapter Adding a contact Copying contact information into multiple contacts Locating a contact on your list Deleting a contact Customizing the Contacts list Making connections from Contacts Working with Contacts on your computer Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Say good-bye to a paper address book that you need to update manually every time someone moves, changes their email address, or gets a new work extension. With Contacts, not only is it easy to enter information such as names, addresses, and phone numbers, but it is just as quick to view, update, and organize contact information. Benefits of Contacts You can easily share info with other devices and dial phone numbers or send messages directly from a contact by using your device’s built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology and a compatible mobile phone or by beaming. You can even add photos of your loved ones directly to their contact information. • Carry all your business and personal contact information in your hand • Keep track of who’s who • Keep in touch 131 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip If the first character you enter in the Last Name or Company field is an asterisk (*) or another symbol, that record always appears at the top of the Contacts list. That’s useful for an entry like “If Found Call [your phone number].” Adding a contact Did You Know? Contacts info is stored in program memory. This means that you can view the info only by looking at it in the application and you can synchronize the information by pressing the sync button on the USB cable. Info in contacts can be synchronized with info in either Palm® Desktop software or Outlook. LifeDrive from palmOne 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Add your contact information: icon in the input area. a. Select New. b. Select each field where you want to enter information, and enter it. Select the scroll arrows to view more fields. Continued 132 CHAPTER 6 Tip If multiple contacts share information, such as a company name and address, you can enter the first contact, and then copy the information into other contacts. Managing Your Contacts Cont’d. The following fields contain features to help you enter information quickly: All fields except numeric and email fields capitalized. The first letter is automatically Title, Company, City, and State As you enter letters, a match appears if you have one on your Contacts list. For example, if you enter S, Sacramento might appear, and if you then enter a and n, San Francisco might replace Sacramento. When the word you want appears, select the next field. Did You Know? You can also enter one or more contacts on your desktop computer, and then copy them to your device by synchronizing. Address You can enter up to three addresses, each containing five fields: Addr, City, State, Zip Code, and Country. You can designate an address as work (W), home (H), or other (O). By default, the first address is designated as work. 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL Add a photo: a. Tap the Picture box. Tap here b. Select and add a photo from palmOne™ Media. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 133 CHAPTER 6 Tip If you want a reminder about a birthday, check the Reminder box, enter the number of days before the birthday that you want to see the reminder, and then select OK. Did You Know? Birthdays you enter in Contacts appear as untimed events in Calendar. If you update the birthday in Contacts, it automatically updates in Calendar as well. Managing Your Contacts 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL birthday: a. Select the Birthday box. b. Use the left and right arrows to move to and select the birth year. Hold down either arrow to scroll quickly through the years. c. Select the month and date. 5 After you finish entering all the information you want, select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne Add a That's it. Your device automatically saves the contact. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. 134 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip Additional fields appear in a contact only if you enter info into them. If you leave a field blank, it does not appear the next time you open the Contact Edit screen. Also, additional fields apply only to the current contact; you can duplicate contact information if you need to apply the same fields to multiple contacts. Entering additional contact information Did You Know? Each field type can be displayed a certain number of times, up to a preset maximum. Once you reach this maximum, the field type no longer appears on the pop-up list. For example, you can display up to seven Phone/Email fields. Tip Select the Note icon next to the plus button to add a note to the contact. LifeDrive from palmOne The Contact Edit screen displays certain fields by default. You can customize the Contact Edit screen to display additional fields. 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Display additional contact fields: icon in the input area. a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit. b. Select the plus button in the lower-right corner of the Contact Edit screen. Select here Note icon c. Select the field you want displayed from the list. The field appears in a preset location on the Contact Edit screen. Done 135 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip Any changes you make to field types apply only to the current contact. You can duplicate contact information if you need to apply the same contact fields to multiple contacts. Selecting contact field types Did You Know? The email address field type is located on the same pick list as the phone number fields. IM field types are located on a separate pick list. You can select the types of phone numbers (work, home, mobile, pager, and so on), as well as specify the instant messenger (IM) account, that you associate with a contact. 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Customize the contact field type: icon in the input area. a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit. b. Select the pick list next to the field you want to change, and select the new field type you want. Available fields include phone number, email address, and instant messenger (IM) fields. NOTE You must set up an instant messenger account with a service provider and download instant messaging software to use instant messaging on your device. Select triangle Done LifeDrive from palmOne 136 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Defining custom fields You can define the custom fields that appear at the end of the Contact Edit screen to display any additional contact information you want, such as spouse’s or children’s names, favorite color, or any other information. The new field is defined in all contacts, not just the current contact. 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Define the custom fields: icon in the input area. a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit. b. Open the menus. c. Select Options, and then select Rename Custom Fields. d. Enter names for up to nine custom fields, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 137 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Selecting a contact as your business card You can create a contact with your own information and select it as your business card by opening the Record Menu and selecting Business Card. You can then beam or send your business card to other devices. To beam your business card quickly, press and hold the Contacts application button for approximately two seconds. 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Create a business card: icon in the input area. a. Select the contact you want, or create a new contact with your own contact information. b. Open the menus. c. Select Business Card on the Record menu. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 138 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip You can also duplicate a contact in the Contacts desktop application by highlighting a contact in the Contacts list, and then selecting Edit Copy. Create a new contact, select the Note icon, and then paste the info into a note. Then cut and paste the text into the correct field in the new contact. Copying contact information into multiple contacts Did You Know? If you duplicate a contact and do not edit the name, the contact appears in the Contacts list as “, Copy.” LifeDrive from palmOne You can quickly make a copy of a contact so that you can edit only the fields you need to change. For example, if two of your contacts have the same work address or phone number, duplicating the first contact simplifies entering information in the second. 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Duplicate a contact: icon in the input area. a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit. b. Open the menus. c. Select Record, and then select Duplicate Contact. Done 139 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip You can also press Right on the 5-way navigator (or select the Quick Look Up icon at the top of the screen) to open the Quick Look Up line. Press Up and Down to select the letter of the name you want in each box, and press Right to move to the next box. Locating a contact on your list Did You Know? The Phone Lookup feature lets you add contact information directly into certain other applications on your device. For example, you can add a name and phone number to a memo or task. LifeDrive from palmOne 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Search for the contact: icon in the input area. a. Select the Look Up line at the bottom of the screen and enter the first letter of the name you want to find. b. Enter the second letter of the name, and so on, until you can easily scroll to the contact you want. 3 Select the contact to open it. Done 140 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip You never know when you’re going to need to look up an old business associate. If you save an archive copy of your deleted contacts, you can refer to them later by importing them. Deleting a contact 0 1 2 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Open the Delete Contact dialog box: a. Select the contact you want. b. Open the menus. c. Select Delete Contact on the Record menu. 3 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL computer. Check the box to save an archive copy of the contact on your Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 141 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Did You Know? If you select Work, Home, Fax, Other, Main, Pager, or Mobile from the pick list, the first letter of your selection appears next to the contact in the Contacts list—for example, W for Work. If you select email, no letter appears next to the contact. Customizing the Contacts list Tip You can also use the Contact Details dialog box to assign a contact to a category or to mark a contact as private. By default, the Contacts list displays the work phone number for a contact; if no work phone number is entered, another entry is displayed. You can customize a contact’s settings to display different information on the Contacts list. You can also customize the appearance of the list. 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Open the Contact Details dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Select the contact you want. b. Select Edit, and then select Details. 3 Specify the information displayed with a contact: a. Select the Show in List pick list, and select the information that you want to appear in the Contacts list for this contact. b. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 142 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts 4 Customize the appearance of the Contacts list: a. From the Contacts list, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select the display options you want: Remember last category Check the box if you want Contacts to display the last category shown when you return to it from another application. If the box is unchecked, Contacts opens to the All category. List by Select whether to sort the Contacts list by last name and first name or by company and last name. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 143 CHAPTER 6 [ ! ] Before You Begin You must complete all the prerequisites for the email and messaging applications. To use Quick Connect with your device’s built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology, you must set up a phone connection. To use it with your device’s IR port, run Phone Link Updater, and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection. Managing Your Contacts Making connections from Contacts You can set up your contacts so that you can do tasks like dialing a phone number, creating an email or text message, accessing the web, or sending an instant message (requires additional software, sold separately) directly from a contact screen. Contacts gives you two tools to perform these tasks: Quick Connect Lets you select a connection type and opens the application for making that type of connection directly from a contact’s information screen. Tap-to-Connect Opens the application to perform a connection task directly by selecting the appropriate entry (phone number, email address, and so on) from a contact’s information screen. Using Quick Connect If you have a compatible mobile phone (sold separately) that includes Bluetooth wireless technology, you can use Quick Connect to dial a phone number, address an email or a text message, go to a website, or send an instant message (requires additional software, sold separately) directly from a contact. 0 1 Tap the Contacts icon in the input area. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 144 CHAPTER 6 Tip You can also open Quick Connect from the Contact List view by highlighting the contact you want and then pressing right on the 5-way navigator. Managing Your Contacts 2 Make a connection using Quick Connect: a. Select the contact you want. b. In the Contact view, select the Quick Connect icon screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box. at the top of the Tip If you want to close the Quick Connect dialog box without making a connection, press Left on the 5-way. c. Select the type of connection you want. For example, select a phone number to dial the number on your mobile phone, or select an email address to open the email application to a new message containing that address in the To field. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 145 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Customizing Quick Connect settings You can specify which application opens when you choose a Contacts record field, and whether to add a prefix to each phone number. 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Customize Quick Connect settings: icon in the input area. a. Select the contact you want. b. Select the Quick Connect icon at the top of the screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box. c. Select Settings and enter the settings you want: Number prefix Check the box and enter a prefix to add a prefix to all dialed phone numbers. NOTE A prefix is not added to any number that begins with a “+” character. All other fields Select each pick list and select the application you want to use to connect by that method. d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 146 CHAPTER 6 [ ! ] Before You Begin You must have a compatible mobile phone (sold separately) that includes Bluetooth wireless technology, and you must complete all the prerequisites for the email and messaging applications. To use Tap-to-Connect with your device’s built-in Bluetooth wireless technology, you must set up a phone connection. To use it with your device’s IR port, run Phone Link Updater and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection. LifeDrive from palmOne Managing Your Contacts Using Tap-to-Connect With Tap-to-Connect, you can select a contact and dial a phone number or address an email or text message by selecting the appropriate entry on the contact screen. By default, Tap-to-Connect is not enabled. 0 1 Tap the Contacts 2 Enable Tap-to-Connect: icon in the input area. a. From the Contacts list, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Enable Tap-to-Connect, and then select OK. Continued 147 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts 3 Make a connection with Tap-to-Connect: a. Select the contact you want. Select to edit b. Select the entry you want to use to connect. For example, to dial a phone number, select the number you want to dial. To address an email message, select an email address. c. Select the entry to edit it if necessary. For example, you might need to add an area code or country code to a phone number. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 148 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip (Windows) If you chose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook, check out the online Help in Outlook to learn how to use Contacts on your computer. Working with Contacts on your computer Use Contacts on your computer to view and manage the contacts you create on your device. Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Contacts on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics: • Viewing, copying, and deleting contacts • Editing contact details • Marking contacts private • Showing, masking, and hiding private contacts • Printing contacts • Changing between the list, contact info, and Contact Edit views • Adding notes to a contact • Adding a date and time stamp to a contact • Organizing contacts into categories • Sharing contacts WINDOWS ONLY To open Contacts on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Contacts on the launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Contacts on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then click Addresses. LifeDrive from palmOne 149 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus • Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Support If you’re having problems with Contacts or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Categories Organizing contacts by type and sorting them Entering Information Transferring contact information from other applications such as databases, spreadsheets, and other organizer software Privacy Keeping contacts private by turning on security options Sharing Sending contacts to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device VersaMail® Sending contacts as attachments to email messages SMS Sending contacts as part of a text message 150 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar In this chapter Scheduling events Color-coding your schedule Setting an alarm Rescheduling an event Deleting events Checking your schedule Customizing your calendar Working with Calendar on your computer Related topics Stay on top of your schedule by creating appointments, setting alarms, and spotting conflicts in Calendar. You can view your calendar by day, week, or month, or as an agenda list that combines your list of tasks and email notifications with your appointments. Schedule repeating meetings or block out a vacation by creating one event set to repeat at an interval you specify. Color-code your appointments by category and add notes with helpful information. You can synchronize your calendar with Palm® Desktop software, Outlook, or your corporate email system using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®. LifeDrive from palmOne Benefits of Calendar • Track current, future, and past appointments • Stay on top of deadlines • Set reminders for appointments • Spot schedule conflicts 151 » CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Key Term Event The name for an entry in the Calendar application, including appointments, birthdays, reminders, recurring meetings, and so on. Scheduling events Tip You can also scroll to a date by pressing Right or Left on the 5-way or by selecting the arrows at the top of the Day View screen. Use Calendar to manage your schedule. You can enter appointments, events without a start time, events that repeat at regular intervals, and events that span a period of time. Scheduling an appointment 0 1 Open Day View: a. Tap the Calendar the input area. icon in b. Select the Day View icon . Day View icon Go To Did You Know? You can use more than one line to describe an appointment. 2 [ & ] OPTIONAL If the appointment is not for today, select the date of the appointment: a. Tap Go To. b. Select the year, month, and date. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 152 CHAPTER 7 Did You Know? You can color-code your calendar to file events in categories. Each category has its own color. You can also mark events as private to hide them from prying eyes. Managing Your Calendar 3 Tap the line next to the time the appointment begins, and enter a description. 4 If the appointment is longer or shorter than an hour, set the duration: a. In Day View, tap the start time. b. In the Set Time dialog box, tap End Time. Did You Know? If you are synchronizing with Outlook on your Windows computer, you can select a time zone when creating a new event. Also, if you created appointments in Outlook that include more than one person, these person’s names appear when you synchronize with your device. You cannot edit this information on your device. c. Tap the hour and minute lists to select the time the appointment ends. d. Select OK. Duration Category marker Done LifeDrive from palmOne Description Start time Hour list Minute list That’s it. Your device automatically saves the appointment. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. 153 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know? If you need to reserve a date before you know the details of the appointment, you can schedule an event without a start time. Scheduling an event without a start time Keep track of events that take place on a particular date but not at a particular time. For example, you may want to enter holidays, anniversaries, and deadlines. 0 1 Open Day View: a. Tap the Calendar the input area. icon in b. Select the Day View icon . Day View icon Go To 2 Select the date of the event: a. Select Go To. b. Select the arrows to select the year. c. Select the month. d. Select the date. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 154 CHAPTER 7 Tip You can change an event without a time to a scheduled appointment. Select the event description, select Details, select the Time box, and select the start and end times. Managing Your Calendar 3 Add an unscheduled event line: a. Select New. b. Select No Time. 4 Enter a description on the line that appears at the top of the screen. NOTE A diamond appears in the time column to show that the event doesn’t start at a specific time. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 155 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip To select intervals such as the 2nd Tuesday of every month or the 3rd Thursday in November of every year, see Scheduling a repeating event—unusual interval. Scheduling a repeating event—standard interval There’s no need to re-enter events that take place on a regular basis. Just set up a repeating event. This is a great way to block out time for things like a daily walk with the dog, a weekly team meeting, a monthly game night with friends, and annual events like anniversaries and holidays. 0 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Enter the event you want to repeat, and then select the event description. 3 Set the repeat interval: icon in the input area. a. Select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select how often the event repeats: Daily until, Every week, Every other week, Every month, or Every year. NOTE If you select Daily, a dialog box appears for you to select the end date. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 156 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling a repeating event—unusual interval Some events don’t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals, so you need to set up your own repeat intervals. For example, set aside time for a trip to the gym every other day, schedule a class that meets on the 1st Wednesday of each month, or enter annual holidays that occur during a particular time of month such as the 1st Monday in September or the 3rd week of November. 0 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Enter the event you want to repeat, and then select the event description. 3 Open the Change Repeat dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select Other. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 157 CHAPTER 7 Tip To enter holidays such as Labor Day or Thanksgiving, select Month, enter 12 on the Every line, and then select Day as the Repeat By setting. Managing Your Calendar 4 Set the repeat interval: a. Select Day, Week, Month, or Year as the repeat unit. b. Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the event repeats. c. Select the End on pick list and select an end date, if needed. d. If you selected Week in step c, select the day of the week the event repeats. If you selected Month in step c, select Day to select the week within the month, such as the 4th Thursday, or select Date to select the same date within the month, such as the 15th. e. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 158 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know? You can reserve a specific block of time during the day or use events without times to flag a series of dates. For example, you can reserve vacation time from 6/23–6/30 using a repeating event without a time, and then schedule a specific excursion from 9:00 to 3:00 on 6/24 and dinner with a friend at 6:00 on 6/25. Scheduling an event that is longer than a day Tip Need to enter an event that extends beyond midnight? Enter an end time that is earlier than the start time. Reserve a block of time for events that span several days, such as a vacation, conference, training class, or an extended project. 0 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Enter the event, and then select the event description. 3 Set the repeat interval: icon in the input area. a. Select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select Daily until. c. Select the year, month, and date when the event ends. d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 159 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Entering a location or a note for an event Enter a description of the event’s location such as a restaurant, a conference room, or your friend’s house. Enter a note such as dial-in info for a conference call or directions to a location. 0 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Enter the event, and then select the event description. 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL location: icon in the input area. Enter the a. Select Details. b. Select the Location field and enter a description of the location. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 160 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL Enter the note: a. Select Note . b. Enter the note text. c. Select Done. 5 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The location name and a note icon appear next to the event description in Agenda View and in Day View. 161 CHAPTER 7 Did You Know? You can also set a preference to automatically include a time zone whenever you create a new event. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Select New events use time zones. Only new events created after the preference is set are affected. Managing Your Calendar Scheduling an event with a time zone [ ! ] IMPORTANT Do not use times zones if you are synchronizing with Palm Desktop software. Time zones work only if you are synchronizing with Outlook or Exchange ActiveSync. Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones. Selecting a time zone when creating a new event allows you to travel and have your events automatically adjust to the time zone in your new location. When you schedule an event, set the time zone and the time the event occurs in the location of the event. The event automatically adjusts on your schedule based on the primary location you have set on your device. When you travel, you can change the primary location on your device and the event automatically adjusts on your schedule to the correct time according to the time zone of the new primary location. NOTE Only events that have a time zone setting adjust when you change the primary time zone on your device. Events that do not have a time zone setting remain at their set time. 0 1 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 162 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 2 Set the time and the time zone: a. Enter the event. b. Set the time for the event as it is scheduled at the location where it occurs. Time zone pick list c. Select the time zone pick list and select a city within the time zone where the event is located. d. Select OK. Done Color-coding your schedule Use color-coding to quickly spot different types of events. For example, make all your family appointments green, your work appointments blue, and your appointments with friends yellow. LifeDrive from palmOne 163 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Managing your color-codes Each color code represents a category of events. You can assign each category a name and select which color you want to assign to it. 0 1 Open Day View: a. Tap the Calendar input area. Category marker icon in the b. Select the Day View icon 2 Day View icon Open the Edit Categories dialog box: a. From Day View, select the event description. b. Select Details. c. Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 164 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 3 Select the color code for the category: a. Select New, or select a category, and then select Edit. b. Enter or edit the category name. c. Select the color you want to give this category. d. Select OK, and then select OK two more times. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The category name and its color-coded marker appear on the category list. 165 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know? In Day View and Month View you can set the Display Options to show the category list so that you can view all your events or just the events for a single color-code. Assigning a color code to an event 0 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Enter the event you want to color-code. 3 icon in the input area. Select the category marker next to the description, and then select a category from the list. Category marker Done LifeDrive from palmOne In Agenda View and Day View the category marker next to the event is color-coded. In Week View and Month View the symbol for the event is color-coded. 166 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can customize your alarm settings in the Calendar Preferences dialog box. Setting an alarm Did You Know? If you set your alarms in World Clock instead of Calendar, you have different alarm sound choices. Keep in mind that since World Clock alarms aren’t tied to a specific event, you won’t see an event description when a World Clock alarm sounds. Did You Know? When you set an alarm, a little alarm clock appears to the right of the event description. 0 1 2 3 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Enter the event you want to assign an alarm to, and then select the event description. Set the alarm: a. Select Details. b. Check the Alarm box. c. Select the pick list and select Minutes, Hours, or Days. d. Enter how many minutes, hours, or days before the event you want the alarm to sound, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 167 CHAPTER 7 Tip You can also use the Event Details dialog box to change the alarm, location, category, repeat, and privacy settings. Managing Your Calendar Rescheduling an event 0 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Go to the event you want to reschedule: icon in the input area. a. From Day View, select Go To. b. Select the year, month, and date of the event. c. Select the event description, and edit it if necessary. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you edit the description of a repeating event, the new description appears in all instances of the event. 3 Change the date and time: a. Select Details. b. Select the Time box and select the new start and end times. c. Select the Date box and select the new date. d. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 168 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 If you’re changing a repeating event, select one of the following to select the event(s) you want to apply the changes to: Current Apply your changes to only the selected instance of the repeating event. Future Apply your changes to the selected event and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date. All Apply your changes to the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating event. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 169 CHAPTER 7 Tip You can also delete a specific event by selecting the event, selecting Details, and then selecting Delete. Tip Many people find it useful to refer to old events for tax purposes. If you save an archive copy of your deleted events, you can refer to them later by importing them. Managing Your Calendar Deleting events If an appointment is canceled, you can delete it from your schedule. When deleting a repeating event, you can indicate you want to delete just the selected event, or to also delete other instances of the event. You can also delete all your old events that are before a selected time frame. Deleting a specific event 0 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Go to the event you want to delete: icon in the input area. a. From Day View, select Go To. b. Select the year, month, and date of the event. c. Select the event description. 3 Open the Delete Event dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete Event on the Record menu. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 170 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 5 6 [ & ] OPTIONAL computer. Check the box to save an archive copy of the event on your Select OK. If you’re deleting a repeating event, select one of the following to select the event(s) you want to delete: Current Delete only the selected instance of the repeating event. Future Delete the selected event and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date. All Delete the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating event. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 171 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Deleting all your old events When you need more space on your device, or you just want to do some “housekeeping,” you can delete all your old events. 0 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Open the Purge dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Open the menus. b. Select Purge on the Record menu. 3 Select the events to purge: a. Select the Delete events older than pick list and select a time frame. b. Check the Save archive copy on PC box if you want to place a copy of the deleted events in an archive file on your computer the next time you synchronize. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 172 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip Press the Calendar button repeatedly to cycle through the four different views. Checking your schedule Did You Know? Agenda View shows how many unread messages you have in the VersaMail® application. Agenda View shows your daily schedule and any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or due today. If there’s room on the screen, Agenda View also shows your schedule for the next dates that have events scheduled on them. Did You Know? You can use a favorite photo as the background for your Agenda View. LifeDrive from palmOne Sometimes you want to look at your schedule for a particular date, while other times you want to see an overview of a week or month. Viewing your appointments and tasks together 0 1 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. NOTE If Calendar is already open, select the Agenda View icon instead. Continued 173 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 2 Do one of the following to view your schedule: • Select an appointment to go to it in Day View. • Select a task to go to it in Tasks. Category marker Location No-time icon Overdue task icon Agenda View icon Done LifeDrive from palmOne 174 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Viewing your daily schedule Day View shows your daily schedule one day at a time. You can scroll between days in the current week or jump to any other date. 0 1 Open Day View: a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. b. Select the Day View icon . Day selector Birthday icon Alarm icon No-time icon Repeat icon Event duration Note icon Category marker Day View icon Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 175 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 2 Do any of the following to view your daily schedule: • Select the day selector to view another day in the same week, select the arrows to scroll to the previous or next week, or select Go To to choose a specific date. • Select the Repeat icon, the Alarm icon, or Details to open the Details dialog box. • Select the Note icon to view the note text. • Select the Birthday icon to view the birthday entry. • Select the category marker to assign the event to a color-code. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 176 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also press Right and Left on the 5-way to scroll to the next or previous week. To go to Day View for a particular day, press Center on the 5-way to insert a highlight, press Right or Left to select a day, and then press Center on the 5-way again. Viewing your weekly schedule Week View shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames that appear on the screen are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences. 0 1 Open Week View: a. Tap the Calendar the input area. Week selector Multi-day event icon in No-time icon b. Select the Week View icon Event . Scroll arrows After-hours event Week View icon 2 Do any of the following to view your weekly schedule: • Select the week selector to scroll between weeks, or select Go To to choose a week. • Select a date to go to that day in Day View. • Select an event to view the event description and location. • Select the scroll arrows to view events scheduled earlier or later in the day during the selected week. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 177 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also press Right and Left on the 5-way to scroll to the next or previous month. To go to Day View for a particular date, press Center on the 5-way to insert a highlight, press Right or Left to select a date, and then press Center on the 5-way again. Viewing your monthly schedule Month View shows your schedule for a whole month. You can scroll between months or jump to any other month. 0 1 Open Month View: a. Tap the Calendar the input area. Month selector icon in Event b. Select the Month View No-time icon icon . Multi-day event Month View icon 2 Do any of the following to view your monthly schedule: • Select the month selector to scroll to the previous or next month, or select Go To to choose a specific month. • Select a date to go to that day in Day View. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 178 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can also press Right and Left on the 5-way to scroll to the next or previous month. To go to Day View for a particular date, press Center on the 5-way to insert a highlight, press Right or Left to select a date, and then press Center on the 5-way again. Viewing a yearly calendar Year View shows a calendar for an entire year. You can scroll between years or jump to any other year. 0 1 Open Year View: a. Tap the Calendar the input area. Year selector icon in b. Select the Month View icon . c. Select Year. Scroll arrows Month View icon 2 Do any of the following to view a yearly calendar: • Select the year selector to scroll to the previous or next year, or select Go To to choose a specific year. • Select the scroll arrows to see months that don’t fit on the screen. • Select a month to go to that month in Month View. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 179 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Finding events that overlap When an event starts before a previous event finishes, the events overlap. You can spot events that overlap in Week View and in Day View. Overlapping events Customizing your calendar Control the appearance of your Calendar screens. Select display options for the Agenda View, Day View, and Month View. The options you select for each view apply only to that view. You can also choose alarm and start and end time settings. LifeDrive from palmOne 180 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Customizing display options for your calendar 0 1 2 Tap the Calendar icon in the input area. Open the Display Options dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Display Options. 3 Select the Default View pick list and select the view you want to see when you open Calendar. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 181 CHAPTER 7 Tip If the text is difficult to see against your new background, select a different Color Theme to change the text color. Tip If you want to see the hours when you have nothing scheduled, as well as your appointments, deselect Compress Day View. But don’t forget to scroll down to see the events at the end of your day, or hide the input area and display as much of Day View as possible. Managing Your Calendar 4 Set any of the following Agenda View display options: Show Due Tasks Display tasks that are due today and tasks that are overdue. Show Messages Display the number of read and unread email messages. Background Use your favorite photo as the Agenda View background. Check the Background box, select the photo thumbnail, and then select a photo. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo. 5 Select Day and set any of the following Day View options: Show Category List Display the category pick list. By default, the Category pick list doesn’t appear. Show Time Bars Display the bars that show the duration of an event and event conflicts. Compress Day View scheduled events. Avoid scrolling and display only the time period with Show Category Column Display the category marker between the time and description. The color of the category marker indicates which category the event is filed under. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 182 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 6 Select Month and set any of the following Month View options: Show Category List Display the category pick list. By default, the Category pick list doesn’t appear. Timed Events Show events that are scheduled for a specific time. Untimed Events Show events that are scheduled for a specific date, but not a specific time. Daily Repeating Events 7 Show events that repeat every day. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 183 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip You can view and schedule events in time slots that are before or after the start or end time. You just need to scroll to those time slots. Setting alarm and time options 0. 1 Tap the Calendar 2 Open the Preferences dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. 3 Select the start and end times of your typical day. This time frame appears in your Day View and Week View. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 184 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 Set any of the following alarm settings: Alarm Preset Set an alarm for each new event. When you check this box, you also need to enter the default number of minutes, days, or hours before the event that the alarm sounds. For events without a time, the alarm settings are based on midnight of the date of the event. The Alarm Preset settings appear as defaults for each new event, but you can change these settings in the Details dialog box for individual events. If you don’t want to use alarms for most of your events, don’t check this box. Alarm Sound Select the sound the alarm makes when it goes off. Remind Me Select how many times the alarm sounds after the first time it goes off: Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, and 10 Times. Play Every Select how often the alarm sounds: Minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, and 30 minutes. 5 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 185 CHAPTER 7 Tip (Windows) If you chose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook, check out the online Help in Outlook to learn how to use Calendar on your computer. Managing Your Calendar Working with Calendar on your computer [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync your email and calendar information synchronize directly with your info on your company's Exchange server. You must retrieve email and calendar updates from the VersaMail® application; they do not update when you synchronize your device with your computer. • Scheduling events • Rescheduling events Did You Know? Mac Check out the Holiday Files folder in the Palm folder. It contains various holidays that you can import into Palm Desktop software on your computer. • Setting alarms • Deleting events • Marking events as private and hiding them • Printing your schedule • Working with Day View, Week View, Month View, and Year View WINDOWS ONLY To open Calendar on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Calendar on the launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Calendar on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder, and then click Date Book. LifeDrive from palmOne 186 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Calendar or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Sharing • Beaming events to other Palm Powered™ devices • Sending events to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device • Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook VersaMail Sending events as attachments to email messages Privacy Keeping events private by turning on security options Categories • Editing and deleting categories • Viewing events by category Common Questions LifeDrive from palmOne Answers to frequently asked questions about Calendar 187 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager In this chapter Creating and managing Office files Opening files from within Documents Related topics With its ability to store large amounts of important information, your device lets you take your office with you— including your Microsoft Office files. With the Documents application, you can carry, create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on your device. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint files on your device. You can keep updated copies of the files on both your device and your computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient location any time. LifeDrive from palmOne Benefits • Manage Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files on your device • Improve productivity by taking important docs, spreadsheets, and presentations with you on the go 188 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager Did You Know? You can also choose to manage the transfer of your documents using the Documents companion application called Documents To Go located on your computer. Documents To Go allows you to move or copy files to your device when you synchronize. Creating and managing Office files For complete information on this application, click the Documents To Go icon on your computer and then click Help, or go to www.dataviz.com. The Documents application provides powerful editing and file management features for Office files on your device. What’s more, Documents makes it easy for you to share files between your computer and your device. Here are some of the capabilities of Documents: • View Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files in their native format (DOC, XLS, or PPT). • Create or edit a Word document or Excel spreadsheet on your device and save it in their native format. • Create or edit a PowerPoint-compatible presentation that is optimized for viewing on your device. • Open Office files received as attachments to incoming email messages, and attach files to outgoing messages. • Transfer Office files to a Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi® printer using your device’s built-in wireless technology. You can store and synchronize your Office files and folders in the Documents folder of your device's hard drive. View and access the files and folders using the Files application on your device. You can also view the files and folders using LifeDrive™ Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. You can manage items on the hard drive in various ways: copying, moving, deleting, renaming, and so on, using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your device. If you drop Office files into the Documents folder in LifeDrive Manager, they are automatically set to be synchronized. LifeDrive from palmOne 189 CHAPTER 8 Tip When you are working on a file, save it to your device or your expansion card by selecting Menu, selecting Save As from the File menu, and then selecting the location where you want to save the file. Tip Do you have a file you are always viewing? Add it to your Favorites list for easy access. LifeDrive from palmOne Your Microsoft Office Manager Opening files from within Documents In the Documents application, you can view and open any Word, Excel, or PowerPoint file on your device. 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select Documents. Select the file you want from the list. Done 190 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click the link below to learn about these related topics: VersaMail® Sending and receiving Office files as attachments to email messages Support If you’re having problems with Documents, click the Documents To Go icon on your computer, and then click Help, or go to www.dataviz.com. LifeDrive from palmOne 191 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos In this chapter Reformatting files and copying supported file types Viewing photos or videos Viewing and editing photo or video details A picture may be worth a thousand words, but what happens when you have lots of pictures—or videos—that you are trying to keep organized? Or maybe just a few that are so meaningful that you want to have instant access to them at any time? Organizing photos and videos Personalizing a photo Copying a photo or video Deleting a photo or video Sharing photos and videos Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Solve both problems with palmOne™ Media. Easy viewing and organization of still photos and videos are all features of Media. You can keep your favorite photos right on your device; select photos as the background for your Favorites and Applications views and Agenda View in Calendar; even add a photo to a Contacts entry. Benefits • Never be far from your favorite people or places • Simplify photo and video organization • Store multiple videos and hundreds of photos 192 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Did You Know? You can carry a video or photo on your device in its native format with no conversion, so you can view it on the computer in the format you prefer. On your computer, use LifeDrive Manager (Windows); do not select the Format for device option. You can also use Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. Reformatting files and copying supported file types You can view photos in popular formats such as JPG, BMP, TIFF, and GIF on your device. You can view videos in formats such as MPEG-1, ASF (MPEG4+ADPCM), and AVI (MJPEG+ADPCM) or (MJPEG+PCM). When you copy a photo or video from your computer to your device using LifeDrive™Manager (Windows), you can choose to reformat the photo or video to a format and smaller file size that works best for viewing on your device. There are numerous video formats, and not all types can be converted to a format that’s viewable on your device. On a Mac, you can use the Send to Handheld droplet to transfer files to your device. The files are reformatted to a format that works best for viewing on your device. If you choose to reformat the file, the reformatted version is renamed so that it does not overwrite the original version on your computer when you synchronize. Only the new reformatted file is copied; the original file is not copied. In LifeDrive Manager, you can also choose Keep Synchronized, which allows you to keep the photo or video in its original format and update it during synchronization. You can store your photos and videos on your device in the Photos & Videos folder. View and access the files using the Files application on your device. You can also manage the files using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. You can manage items on the hard drive in various ways: copying, moving, deleting, renaming, and so on, using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your device. Albums are subfolders located only in the Photos & Videos special folder on the hard drive and in the DCIM special folder on an expansion card. Only first level subfolders in these special folders are recognized as albums. When you copy your media from your camera card using Camera Companion, the media is copied to the DCIM folder on the hard drive. Since this is not a special folder, no albums can be created in the folder. To access the media, you need to browse to the subfolders where the pictures are located. If you want to add media from the DCIM folder to an album, you must use Files to copy the media to a subfolder in the Photos & Videos special folder. LifeDrive from palmOne 193 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Use your camera’s editing software to edit or enhance your photos or videos and copy them to your device for viewing. Viewing photos or videos You can view photos and videos in the following ways: Thumbnail List View miniature preview versions of your photos and videos. View names and dates of photos and videos on your device or an expansion card. Slide show View all photos and videos in an album, automatically one after another. You can easily see a full-screen view of a photo or play a video by selecting the photo or video from the Thumbnail or List View. You can also rotate the orientation of the photo, zoom in to view a magnified portion of a photo, and view or edit detailed information about a photo or video. Viewing a photo or video in the Thumbnail and List View 0 1 Press the Media button. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 194 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 2 Go to the folder or album where the photo or video is located: a. Select Device Expansion Card Location pick list Device Expansion card or . Thumbnail View b. Tap Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view: • If the photo or video is in the Photos & Videos folder on your device’s hard drive or on an expansion card, select the correct location from the list. Thumbnail view • If the photo or video is located elsewhere on your device’s hard drive, select Browse, and then browse to the item. List View Continued List view LifeDrive from palmOne 195 CHAPTER 9 Tip If a photo is larger than your device’s screen— either because of its original size or because you have zoomed in—tap and drag with the stylus to view different parts of the photo. Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 Select the photo or video you want to view. A video automatically starts playing when you select it. Thumbnail View Select a photo or video to view Thumbnail view List View Select a photo or video to view List view Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 196 CHAPTER 9 Did You Know? When viewing a video, you can use your navigator controls. Press Up and Down to control the volume. Press and hold Left and Right to move the video forward and backward in 5-second increments. You can also press Left and Right to move to the previous or next media file. Viewing Your Photos and Videos 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL Access controls: • For photos, press Up on the 5-way navigator to zoom in. Press Down to access the photo controls. • For videos, press Center to access video controls. Photo Video Rotate Send Add audio Play or Pause Full-screen view Volume Progress indicator Send 5 Press Center or tap anywhere in the photo or video to return to the Thumbnail View screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 197 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Did You Know? In a slide show, videos and photo audio clips play through in their entirety before the next item appears. Viewing a slide show By default, both photos and videos in an album are displayed during a slide show. 0 1 Press the Media 2 [ & ] OPTIONAL button. Set the slide show settings: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options and then select Slideshow. c. Adjust the settings: Show Videos slide show. Show videos during the Audio Add or remove audio. Play the photo audio clips and video sound or background music. Slide Delay Select the time each photo displays. Transitions Select the type of transition between slides. Auto Rotate Automatically rotate the photo or video for optimal viewing. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 198 CHAPTER 9 Did You Know? When viewing a slide show, you can use your navigator controls. Press Up and Down to control the volume. Press Left and Right to move to the previous or next media file. When viewing a video, press and hold Left and Right to move the video forward and backward in 5-second increments. Did You Know? Once you have positioned a photo, that position is shown in the slide show. This allows you to focus on sections of the photo you would like to highlight. This feature does not save the zoom setting. Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 Go to the folder or album where the photos or videos are located: a. Select Device Expansion Card or Location pick list Device Expansion card . b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photos or videos you want to view. 4 In the Thumbnail or List View, select Slide Show . Slide Show 5 Press Center or tap a photo or video to stop the slide show and return to the Thumbnail or List View. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 199 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip You can also rotate a photo by pressing Down on the 5-way to zoom the photo out and then selecting Rotate at the bottom of the screen. Rotating a photo 0 0 1 Press the Media 2 Go to the folder or album where the photo is located: a. Select Device button. or Expansion Card . b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view: • If the photo is in the Photos & Videos folder on your device’s hard drive or on an expansion card, select the correct location from the list. • If the photo is located elsewhere on your device’s hard drive, select Browse, and then browse to the item. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 200 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 Rotate the photo: a. Select the photo you want in the Thumbnail or List View. b. Open the menus. c. Select Rotate Picture from the Media menu. d. Select the rotation you want. 4 Tap anywhere in the photo to return to the Thumbnail or List View. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 201 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip You can also view details for an entire album— including last date changed, number of items in the album, and size—by opening the Album menu and selecting Album Details. Viewing and editing photo or video details 0 0 1 Press the Media 2 Go to the folder or album where the photo or video is located: a. Select Device button. or Expansion Card . b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view: • If the photo or video is in the Photos & Videos folder on your device’s hard drive or on an expansion card, select the correct location from the list. • If the photo or video is located elsewhere on your device’s hard drive, select Browse, and then browse to the item. 3 Select the photo or video whose details you want to view. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 202 CHAPTER 9 Tip Select the scroll arrows at the bottom of the Media Details screen to view other photos in the album. » Key Term EXIF Exchangeable Image File Format is a standard for storing interchange information in image files. Most digital cameras use the EXIF format. Viewing Your Photos and Videos 4 View photo or video details: a. Open the menus. b. Select Edit Details from the Media menu. c. In addition to viewing photo or video details, you can do the following: Change name Select the photo or video name and enter a new name. Move to different album Select the Album pick list and select a new album location for the photo or video. Add notes Select the Notes field and enter a note for the photo or video. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 203 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 5 [ & ] OPTIONAL If the photo was taken from a digital camera that uses the EXIF format, you can view the EXIF information about the photo: a. Select EXIF. b. Select Done when finished viewing the EXIF details. 6 When finished editing and viewing details, select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 204 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Use the copy feature to move a photo from your device to a card and vice versa. If a photo is stored on your device, you can add it only to an album located on the device. Likewise, if a photo is stored on an expansion card, you can add it only to an album that is on the same card. Organizing photos and videos Did You Know? Albums are subfolders located only in the Photos & Videos special folder on the hard drive and in the DCIM special folder on an expansion card. Only first level subfolders in these special folders are recognized as albums. LifeDrive from palmOne You can organize your photos and videos in the following ways: • Create albums and place your photos and videos in those albums. • Move photos and videos within or between albums. • Sort photos and videos in the List View. Organizing photos or videos into albums 0 1 Press the Media 2 Select Manage Albums button. . Continued 205 CHAPTER 9 Tip Drag the stylus across multiple photos and/or videos to add or remove them all at once. Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL album: Create an a. Select whether to create the album on your device or on an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot. Did You Know? If you remove a photo or video from an album, it is moved to Photos and Videos. The photo or video is not deleted from your device or the expansion card. b. Select New, enter the name of the new album, and select OK. c. Select OK on the Manage Albums screen. 4 Do one of the following: To add photos or videos to a new album Select the photos or videos you want on the Organize Album screen. Select to add Select + to remove To add or remove photos or videos from an existing album From the Thumbnail or List View, select the album you want from the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Manage Albums . Select a photo or video without a plus sign to add it to the album; select a photo or video with a plus sign to remove it from the album. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 206 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Move photos within albums to easily put the slide show of your child’s birthday party in the sequence you want. 5 Move photos or videos within albums: a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album in which you want to move photos or videos. b. Select the photo you want to move, and drag the stylus to move the photo or video to the desired location. Done Moving a photo or video within and between albums 0 1 Press the Media 2 Move a photo or video within an album: button. a. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album containing the photo or video you want to move. b. Use the stylus to drag the photo or video you want to its new position. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 207 CHAPTER 9 Tip You can also move a photo or video by adding it to a different album. The item is removed from the original album. Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 Move a photo or video between albums: a. Select the pick list in the upperright corner and select the album containing the photo or video you want to move. Select to move photo or video b. Open the menus. c. Select Edit Details from the Media menu, and then select the photo or video you want to move. d. Select the Album pick list, and then select the new album for the photo. e. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 208 CHAPTER 9 [ ! ] Before You Begin You must be in an album to sort manually. You cannot sort when All Albums is selected from the pick list. Viewing Your Photos and Videos Sorting photos and videos 0 1 Press the Media 2 Sort photos and videos: button. a. Select the pick list in the upperright corner and select the album containing the photos and/or videos you want to sort. b. Open the menus. c. Select Album, and then select one of the following: Sort by Date Lists photos and videos from the earliest to the most recent date. Select Sort by Date again to list items from the most recent to the earliest date. Sort by Name Lists photos and videos by name in ascending (A–Z) order. Select Sort by Name again to list items by name in descending (Z–A) order. Sort by Size Lists photos and videos from smallest to largest file size. Select Sort by Size again to list items from largest to smallest file size. Sort manually Lets you tap a photo or video and drag the stylus to where you want the item to appear. A dotted black line indicates the position of the item. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 209 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Did You Know? Create multicolored art: Select a color and draw on a photo, and then select a different color and draw some more. Each drawing keeps its original color. Personalizing a photo Tip Select the drawing tool button to change line size. Select the text tool button to change font size. Tip Use the eraser selection on the drawing tool to erase drawings only; select Undo to delete text. You can use Undo only once to delete text for a given photo. If you need to delete text after using Undo, select Done and do not save the photo, and then open the photo and try again. To add a personal touch to a photo, use the drawing tool or add a voice clip. Drawing on a photo 1 Press the Media 2 Draw on a photo: button. a. In the Thumbnail or List View, select the photo you want. b. Open the menus. c. Select Draw on Picture from the Media menu. Text tool d. Draw on the photo using the following tools: Color button Drawing tool Drawing tool Draw anywhere on the photo using the stylus. Text tool Enter text in the field. Tap anywhere on the screen to open a text field in a new location. Color button Select a drawing color. e. Select Done. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 210 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 3 Select one of the following to save or reject changes: Replace Original Saves the photo with the drawing in place of the original photo with no drawing; the original photo is lost. Save as New Picture Saves both the photo with the drawing and the original photo with no drawing. You can enter a name for the new photo. You can also select the pick list to save the updated photo to a different album. Don’t Save Changes Cancel Saves only the original photo with no drawing. Returns to the Draw on Photo screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 211 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Did You Know? When viewing a photo that has audio, you can tap the microphone Adding audio to a photo 1 Press the Media 2 Access the photo controls: button. a. In the Thumbnail or List View, select the photo you want. b. Press Down to access the photo controls. 3 Add sound to a photo: a. Select the Audio button. Record button b. Select the Record button to begin recording. c. Select the Stop Recording button to stop and close the Record dialog box. d. Select Done. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 212 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 4 Listen to the sound clip: • When the photo controls are available, select the Audio button and select the Play button to listen to the audio clip. Play button • When the photo controls are not available, tap the Play icon located in the photo. Play icon 5 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 213 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip Copy an entire album by opening the Album menu, selecting Album, and then selecting Copy Album to Card or Copy Album to Device. Select the album you want, and then select Done when copying is complete. Copying a photo or video You can copy photos and videos from your device to an expansion card, and vice versa. 0 1 Press the Media 2 Select a photo or video to copy: a. Select Device button. or Expansion Card . b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location of the photos or videos you want to copy. c. Select the photo or video. 3 Copy the photo: a. Open the menus. b. Select Copy to Card (for photos or videos on your device) or Copy to Device (for photos or videos on an expansion card) from the Media menu. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 214 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos 4 Listen to the sound clip: • When the photo controls are available, select the Audio button and select the Play button to listen to the audio clip. Play button • When the photo controls are not available, tap the Play icon located in the photo. Play icon 5 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 213 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tip You can also beam or send an entire album by opening the Album menu and selecting Beam Album or Send Album. Sharing photos and videos You can easily share photos and videos with family and friends. Use your device’s built-in Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® wireless technology to wirelessly send photos and videos to other Wi-Fi and Bluetooth devices within range. You can also share photos and videos using any of the following methods: • Attach a photo or video to an email message. • Beam a photo or video to other Palm Powered™ devices. • Copy a photo or video from your device to your desktop computer, or from computer to device, by using LifeDrive Manager (Windows). You can also copy a photo or video from your Mac to your device using the Send to Handheld droplet. NOTE Sending a large number of photos or videos using Bluetooth technology or beaming can take a long time. LifeDrive from palmOne 216 CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Media or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Camera Companion • Copying photos and videos from your camera card • Viewing photos and videos on your camera card • Deleting all photos and videos on your camera card Sharing Sending information using wireless technology on your device VersaMail Sending photos and videos as attachments to email messages 217 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media In this chapter Copying photos and videos from your camera card Viewing photos or videos Related topics Maybe you have just filled your digital camera card and you want to keep taking pictures. Do you want to review your pictures on a larger screen? You can do this and more with palmOne™ Camera Companion. You can quickly transfer your digital camera card contents to your device or computer so that you can keep taking pictures. You can also easily organize your photos and videos with palmOne™Media. Benefits • Transfer your camera card contents to your device • Store multiple videos and hundreds of photos • View camera card contents LifeDrive from palmOne 218 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media Did You Know? You can disable the camera card auto-detect feature by opening the menu and selecting Disable auto-detect under the Options menu. Copying photos and videos from your camera card Did You Know? (Windows only) When copying files to your computer using Drive Mode, you can click the Windows dialog box selection Copy picture to a folder on my computer using Microsoft Scanner and Camera Wizard to automatically copy files [ ! ] IMPORTANT To extend your battery life, connect your device to a power source when copying media from your camera card. You can copy your photos and videos to your computer or your device. When you use Copy to Device, the program checks for files with the same file name and content. If found, those files are not copied. Also, files with the same file name but different contents are automatically renamed before copying onto the device. Albums are subfolders located only in the Photos & Videos special folder on the hard drive and in the DCIM special folder on an expansion card. Only first level subfolders in these special folders are recognized as albums. When you copy your media from your camera card using Camera Companion, the media is copied to the DCIM folder on the hard drive. Since this is not a special folder, no albums can be created in the folder. To access the media, you need to browse to the subfolders where the pictures are located. If you want to add media from the DCIM folder to an album, you must use Files to copy the media to a subfolder in the Photos & Videos special folder. 0. 1 Insert your digital camera card into your device. 2 Open Camera Companion: • If auto-detect is enabled, the application automatically opens. • If auto-detect is disabled, go to Favorites and select Camera Companion . Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 219 CHAPTER 10 Tip Always format your camera cards on your camera. Your device can read SD and MMC cards formatted by your camera. However, your camera may be unable to read cards formatted by your device. Managing Your Camera Card Media 3 Select the copy location: Copy to Device Copies the photos and videos from the DCIM (Digital Camera Image) folder on your camera card to the DCIM folder on your hard drive. Copy to Computer Opens Drive Mode on your device and allows you to copy files to your computer. Your device must be connected to your computer. 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL If you selected Copy to Device, you can select the following: Delete Media on Card Deletes the contents of your camera card so that your card is immediately available for more photos or videos. View Copied Media View the photos and videos that you copied to your device. 5 Remove your camera card. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 220 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media Tip Use your camera’s editing software to edit or enhance your photos or videos and copy them to your device for viewing. Viewing photos or videos Did You Know? Some cameras use a video format that cannot be viewed on your device. You can store the video file on your device until you able to transfer the file to your desktop computer where you can view the video. Use your device’s large display as a picture viewer. You can view the contents of your camera memory card without transferring the photos or videos to your device. 0 1 Insert your digital camera card into your device. 2 Open Camera Companion: • If auto-detect is enabled, the application automatically opens. • If auto-detect is disabled, go to Favorites and select Camera Companion . 3 Select View Photos and Video. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 221 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media 4 View your media: a. Select the folder where the photos and videos are located. b. View the photos and videos. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 222 CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Media or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Media • Viewing photos and videos as thumbnails, lists, albums, and slide shows • Copying photos and videos to other applications or expansion cards • Deleting photos and videos Sharing Sending information using wireless technology on your device VersaMail Sending photos and videos as attachments to email messages 223 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music In this chapter Transferring MP3 files to your device using Rhapsody Transferring music from a CD to your device using Rhapsody Playing music on your device Managing playlists Customizing your player Working with Rhapsody on your computer Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Are you tired of listening to small talk during that long commute on the bus or train? Do you need something smaller than a CD player when you’re out for a walk or at the gym? There is no need to buy an expensive MP3 player. Your device can carry thousands of songs, and Pocket TunesTM lets you play the music on your device. Simply transfer songs onto your device or an expansion card and then listen through the built-in speaker or stereo headphones (sold separately). Benefits • Carry and listen to thousands of songs in the popular MP3 format • No separate MP3, CD, or mini-disc player required • Be your own DJ 224 CHAPTER 11 [ ! ] Before You Begin (Windows only) Perform the following: • Install Rhapsody desktop application on your computer. Insert the software installation CD and follow the onscreen instructions for installing extra software. You must install this software, even if you already have a version of Rhapsody installed on your computer. The version on the CD contains all of the components needed to transfer music files to your device. Listening to Music Setting up Rhapsody for MP3 Rhapsody settings must be changed to support MP3 to be compatible with Pocket Tunes. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Prepare your computer and your device: a. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable. b. Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Set Rhapsody format setting on your computer: a. Open the Rhapsody application on your computer. b. Click Tools, and then click Preferences. • After you install the software, you must synchronize your device with your computer in order for Rhapsody to recognize your device. c. Click CD Importing & Playing. d. Click the Format (codec) pick list, and then select MP3. e. Click OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne . Select mp3 You now have set up Rhapsody to import and play MP3 files. 225 CHAPTER 11 [ ! ] Before You Begin (Windows only) You must set up Rhapsody to support MP3 files. Tip You can also transfer MP3 files to the Audio folder on your device using File Transfer (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. Tip The Star quick button opens the Pocket Tunes music application by default, but you can customize it to open any application you choose. LifeDrive from palmOne Listening to Music Transferring MP3 files to your device using Rhapsody The Pocket Tunes software that comes with your device is compatible with the popular MP3 audio file format. If your MP3 files are already on your computer’s hard drive, you need to transfer them to your device’s hard drive to listen to them on your device. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Prepare your computer and your device: a. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable. b. Go to Favorites and select Music . Continued 226 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 2 Prepare Rhapsody on your computer: a. Open the Rhapsody application. b. Click the Transfer tab in the Mixer window. c. Click the Device Preferences list. button and select your device from the pick d. Click the location, such as My Library, where the songs are stored on your computer. Select song location Select your device Device Preference button Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 227 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 3 Transfer the files to your device: a. Drag the song files you want from the song location window into the Transfer window. b. Click Transfer. The files are transferred to the Music folder on your device’s internal drive. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Do not press the sync button on your cable. Rhapsody is transferring the files, so there’s no need to do anything. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 228 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tip You can also use a card reader accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3 files from your computer to your expansion card. MAC ONLY 0 1 Prepare your computer and your device: a. Go to Applications and select Drive Mode . b. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable. Tip You can also transfer MP3 files on a Mac computer by dragging the music file to the Send To Handheld droplet. Select the destination for the file, and then synchronize to transfer it. LifeDrive from palmOne 2 Open Finder, and then drag the music files you want onto the Music folder under the device icon, which appears as an external drive on your desktop. [ ! ] IMPORTANT When you have finished transferring music files, be sure to properly disconnect from Drive Mode. Done 229 CHAPTER 11 [ ! ] Before You Begin (Windows only) You must set up Rhapsody to support MP3 files. Listening to Music Transferring music from a CD to your device using Rhapsody If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your device, use the Rhapsody desktop application on your computer to convert and transfer the files. NOTE Mac users can use iTunes, included with OS X, to transfer music from a CD to their device. Music files should be imported in MP3 format. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Access the music CD from Rhapsody on your computer: a. Open the Rhapsody application. b. Insert the CD into your computer’s CD drive. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 230 CHAPTER 11 Did You Know? An interactive tutorial on the LifeDrive™ software installation CD guides you through adding music. Insert the CD and go to the My Music section of the tutorial and select Add music from a CD. Listening to Music 2 Transfer the songs you want to add to your library: a. Select the titles you want to transfer from the CD. b. Click Save Tracks. Did You Know? For tips on using Real Rhapsody on your computer, go to the Help menu in Real Rhapsody™ or visit www.real.com. Import CD Select titles 3 Transfer the MP3 files to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 231 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tip For tips on using Pocket Tunes, open the Options menu and select Help. Playing music on your device Did You Know? Pocket Tunes continues playing the songs in your list until it reaches the end of your list or until you tap the Stop button, even if your device screen is off. Tip You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version that supports additional music file formats, such as WMA, supports streaming MP3, subscription music, and includes additional features such as graphic equalizers and bookmarks. For more information, visit www.pocket-tunes.com/ palmone. LifeDrive from palmOne 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Select a song to play: . • To play the current song, tap the Play button. • To play a different song, tap the Choose Song button and select a song from the list. Progress indicator Play/Pause Choose song Previous song 3 Next song Volume Shuffle playlist When you’ve finished listening, tap the Stop button. Done 232 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Managing playlists You can create dozens of playlists with your favorite songs. Creating a playlist 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Open the Edit Playlist screen: a. Open the menus. b. Select Actions menu, and then select Manage Playlists. c. Select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 233 CHAPTER 11 Did You Know? The Add Songs to Playlist screen displays all songs on your device’s internal drive and on your expansion card. Tip To add all the songs in an album to your playlist, select Add Song, select an album, and then select Select All. Listening to Music 3 Create a playlist: a. Enter a name for the playlist. b. Select Add Song. c. Select the songs you want to include on the playlist. d. Select OK. 4 Put the songs in the order you want to hear them: a. Select a song you want to move. b. Select Up or Down to move the song up or down one slot. c. Repeat this process until the songs are in the right order. d. Select Save List. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 234 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tip To quickly select all the songs in the list, select Select All. To quickly deselect all the songs, select Select None. Playing songs from a playlist 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Select a song from a playlist: a. Select Choose Songs button. b. Select the Files icon. c. Select Playlists. d. Select the playlist you want to play. e. Select All. Done LifeDrive from palmOne Your device plays the songs in the playlist beginning with the song you selected. After it plays the last song in the list, it stops. 235 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Editing a playlist 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Open the playlist you want to edit: a. Open the menus. b. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists. c. Highlight a playlist. d. Select Edit. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 236 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music 3 Select Edit and do any of the following: Remove Select a song and select Remove to delete the song from the playlist. Add Song Tap Add, check a song’s box, and then tap Done. Up or Down Select a song and select Up or Down to move the song up or down one slot. 4 Select Save List. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 237 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Deleting a playlist 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Open the playlist you want to delete: a. Open the menus. b. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists. c. Select Edit. 3 Delete the list: a. Select Delete List. b. Select Yes in the confirmation dialog box. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 238 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Customizing your player You can customize your MP3 player by setting preferences. Turning off the screen Turning off the screen while playing music saves battery power. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Open the menus. 3 Select General Preferences and set screen preferences: Turn off screen while playing after x seconds When you are playing music and not using any of the other device applications, you can set the time period after which the screen turns off. unless the Palm is in its cradle The screen will always remain on when the device power cable is plugged in. Power button turns off screen but the music keeps playing. 4 Pushing the power button turns off the screen Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 239 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Setting background preferences 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Open the menus. 3 Select Background Prefs and set screen preferences: Enable background play When you are playing music, you can continue using any of the other device applications. This feature is not available when viewing a slideshow in the Media application. Bring up console with pen swipe A pen swipe between the selected icons in the input area brings up the pTunes console. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 240 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Flashing the LED when the pTunes console is turned off When you are playing music while the pTunes console is turned off, you can set the LED to flash to remind you that pTunes is still on and is playing music. This can be a helpful reminder to extend the devices’s battery life when you are not listening to music. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Open the menus. 3 Set the preference: a. Advanced Prefs b. Check the Flash LED while screen is off box. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 241 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Working with Rhapsody on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use Rhapsody on your computer to play and manage your songs. Learn how to use Rhaspody on your computer by using the online Help in Rhapsody. The online Help includes info about the following topics: • Learning about the parts of the Rhapsody window • Finding media • Playing media • Saving and burning media • Rhapsody premium services • Preferences • Troubleshooting LifeDrive from palmOne 242 CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click the link below to learn about these related topics: Expansion Cards • Inserting and removing expansion cards • Naming expansion cards • Viewing the contents of a card Tip Support If you’re having problems with Pocket Tunes, go to www.pocket-tunes.com. LifeDrive from palmOne Managing Info • Installing the Rhapsody software and plug-in on your device and computer • Using palmOne™ Quick Install and the Send To Handheld droplet Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Rhapsody 243 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks In this chapter Creating a task Organizing your tasks Marking a task as complete Deleting tasks Customizing your Tasks list Some of the most successful people in the world are also the busiest. When asked how they manage to do it all, busy people usually say, “I make lists.” The Tasks application on your device is the perfect place to make a list of the things you need to do. Working with Tasks on your computer Related topics Benefits of Tasks • Set priorities • Track deadlines • Stay focused LifeDrive from palmOne 244 CHAPTER 12 Tip If no task is currently selected, you can create a new task by writing Graffiti® 2 characters in the input area. Tip Add a note to a task. Select the Note button, enter the note text, and then select Done. Managing Your Tasks Creating a task 0 1 Tap the Tasks 2 Create a task: icon in the input area. Due date a. Select New. b. Enter a description of the task. Long description Did You Know? You can organize your tasks by filing them into categories. You can also mark tasks as private to hide them from prying eyes. New task Priority number Note button 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL Assign a priority and due date: a. Tap the priority number and select a number (1 is the most important). b. Tap the due date and select a date from the list, or select Choose Date to select a date from the calendar. Done LifeDrive from palmOne That’s it. Your device automatically saves the task. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. 245 CHAPTER 12 [ ! ] Before You Begin Create a task and assign it a due date. A task must have a due date before you can set an alarm. Tip You can customize the alarm sound for your tasks in the Tasks Preferences dialog box. Did You Know? When you set an alarm, a little alarm clock appears to the right of the task description. Managing Your Tasks Setting an alarm 0 1 Tap the Tasks 2 Open the Set Alarm dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Select the task you want to assign an alarm to. b. Select Details. c. Select the Alarm box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 246 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tip To select intervals such as the 2nd Tuesday of every month or the 3rd Thursday in November of every year, see Scheduling a repeating task—unusual interval. 3 Set the alarm: a. Check the Alarm box. b. Enter how many days before the due date you want the alarm to sound. c. Select the time columns to set the time the alarm sounds. d. Select OK, and then select OK again. Done Scheduling a repeating task—standard interval Repeating tasks are a great way to add tasks that happen over and over again, like taking out the trash every Thursday night or making monthly mortgage or rent payments. 0 1 Tap the Tasks 2 Enter the task you want to repeat, and assign it a due date. icon in the input area. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 247 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks 3 Set the repeat interval: a. Select the task description, and then select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select how often the task repeats: Daily until, Every week, Every other week, Every month, or Every year. NOTE If you select Daily, a dialog box appears for you to select the end date. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 248 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Scheduling a repeating task—unusual interval For tasks that don’t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals, you can set up your own repeat intervals. For example, enter tasks for paying a quarterly insurance bill or a credit card bill that is due every 28 days, or changing your smoke detector battery every six months. 0 1 Tap the Tasks 2 Enter the task you want to repeat, and assign it a due date. 3 Open the Change Repeat dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Select Details. b. Select the Repeat pick list and select Other. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 249 CHAPTER 12 Tip To schedule an annual task, such as decorating for a holiday on the first Sunday of a particular month, select Month as the repeat unit, enter 12 on the Every line, and then select Day as the Repeat By setting. Managing Your Tasks 4 Set the repeat interval: a. Select Day, Week, Month, or Year as the repeat unit. b. Select Fixed Schedule to base the due date on the due date of the current task, or select After Completed to base the due date on the date you complete this task. With this option if you complete this task early or late, the due date for the next task adjusts accordingly. c. Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the task repeats. d. Select the End on pick list and select an end date, if needed. e. If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Week in step a, select the day of the week the task repeats. If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Month in step a, select Day to select the week within the month, such as the 4th Thursday, or select Date to select the same date within the month, such as the 15th. f. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 250 CHAPTER 12 Did You Know? Overdue tasks have an exclamation point (!) next to the due date. Managing Your Tasks Organizing your tasks Sometimes you want to look at all the things you need to do, while at other times you want to see only certain types of tasks. 0 Tip Your Tasks Preferences settings control which tasks appear in the Tasks list, such as completed or due tasks. To change these settings, open the Options menu and select Preferences. Tip Create a new category for tasks by selecting Edit Categories in the Category pick list. 1 Tap the Tasks 2 In the Tasks list, select one of these options: All icon in the input area. Displays all your tasks. Date Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen to select Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or Past Due. Category Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner to select a different category. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 251 CHAPTER 12 Tip You can set Tasks Preferences to record the date that you finish your tasks, and you can show or hide finished tasks. To change these settings, open the Options menu and select Preferences. Managing Your Tasks Marking a task as complete You can check off a task to indicate that you’ve completed it. 0 1 2 Tap the Tasks icon in the input area. Check the box on the left side of the task. Done NOTE Palm® Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook handle completed repeating tasks differently. Palm Desktop software checks off all overdue instances of the task, and Microsoft Outlook checks off only the oldest instance of the task. LifeDrive from palmOne 252 CHAPTER 12 Tip You can also delete a specific task by selecting the task, selecting Details, and then selecting Delete. Managing Your Tasks Deleting tasks If a task is canceled, you can delete it from your Tasks list. When you delete a repeating task, you delete all instances of the task. You can also delete all your completed tasks. Deleting a specific task Tip If you save an archive copy of your deleted tasks, you can refer to them later by importing them. 0 1 Tap the Tasks 2 Select the task you want to delete. 3 Open the Delete Task dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete Task on the Record menu. 4 5 [ & ] OPTIONAL computer. Check the box to save an archive copy of the task on your Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 253 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tip Many people find it useful to refer to old tasks for tax purposes. If you save an archive copy of your deleted tasks, you can refer to them later by importing them. Deleting all your completed tasks 0 1 Tap the Tasks 2 Open the Purge dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Open the menus. b. Select Purge on the Record menu. 3 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of your completed tasks on your computer. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 254 CHAPTER 12 Did You Know? Calendar’s Agenda View also displays your tasks. Managing Your Tasks Customizing your Tasks list Control which tasks show up in the Tasks list and how they are sorted. These settings also affect tasks in Calendar’s Agenda View. You can also choose the alarm sound for your tasks. 0 1 Tap the Tasks 2 Open the Preferences dialog box: icon in the input area. a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 255 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks 3 Change any of the following settings, and then select OK: Sort by Select the order in which the tasks appear in the Tasks list. Show Completed Tasks Display your finished tasks in the Tasks list. If you turn off this setting, your finished tasks disappear from the list when you check them off, but they stay in your device’s memory until you purge them. Record Completion Date Replace the due date you assign to a task with the date you really complete and check off the task. If you don’t assign a due date to a task, the completion date still records when you complete the task. Show Due Dates Display each task’s due date in the list (if you assigned one), and display an exclamation point next to each task that is overdue. Show Priorities Show the priority setting for each task in the list. Show Categories Alarm Sound Show the category for each task in the list. Select a sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 256 CHAPTER 12 Tip (Windows) If you chose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook, check out the online Help in Outlook to learn how to use Tasks on your computer. Managing Your Tasks Working with Tasks on your computer Use Tasks on your computer to view and manage your tasks. Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Tasks on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics: • Learning about the parts of the Tasks window • Entering, editing, and deleting tasks • Creating repeating tasks • Marking tasks as private • Showing, masking, and hiding private tasks • Assigning tasks to categories • Printing your task list • Selecting how to view tasks • Sorting tasks by due date, priority level, or categories WINDOWS ONLY To open Tasks on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Tasks on the launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Tasks on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder, and then click To Dos. LifeDrive from palmOne 257 CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Tasks or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: VersaMail Sending tasks as attachments to email messages Sharing • Beaming tasks to other Palm Powered™ devices • Sending tasks to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device • Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Privacy Keeping task private by turning on security options Categories Organizing tasks by type Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Tasks 258 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos In this chapter Creating a memo Viewing and editing a memo Moving memos in your memos list Deleting a memo Working with Memos on your computer Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Your device contains applications for storing the most common types of information: contact names and numbers, appointments, and so on. Memos is the tool to use for capturing information that is meaningful to you but does not fall into one of these categories. From meeting notes to recipes and favorite quotations, Memos provides a quick and easy way to enter, store, and share your important information. Benefits of Memos • Store essential but hard-to-remember information • Send memos to colleagues wirelessly • Synchronize your information to back it up on your computer 259 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Tip In the Memos list, you can also just start writing to create a new memo. The first letter is automatically capitalized. Creating a memo Tip Use Phone Lookup to quickly add a name and phone number to a memo. 0 1 Tap the Memos 2 Create a memo: icon in the input area. a. Select New. b. Enter your memo. Tap Enter on the onscreen keyboard or draw the Graffiti® 2 writing Return stroke to move to a new line in the memo. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne That's it. Your device automatically saves the memo. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. 260 CHAPTER 13 Tip The Memos list shows the first line of each memo, so make sure that first line is something you will recognize. Did You Know? You can connect your device to a portable keyboard and type your memos on the go without carrying around a heavy laptop. You can purchase a variety of portable keyboards. Visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive and click the Accessories link. Tip You can change the size of the text in Memos to enhance readability. LifeDrive from palmOne Writing Memos Viewing and editing a memo 0 1 Tap the Memos 2 View or edit the memo: icon in the input area. a. In the Memos list, select the memo you want. b. Read or edit the memo, and then select Done. Done 261 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Did You Know? If you use Palm® Desktop software for synchronizing, you can send a memo to your computer by synchronizing, and then open the memo on your computer in an application such as Microsoft Word for further editing, formatting, and so on. Right-click the memo on your computer, click Send To, and then select the application to which you want to send the memo. Moving memos in your memos list You can move memos up or down in your memos list. For example, you might want to keep all memos on a certain topic grouped together. 0 1 Tap the Memos 2 Move a memo: icon in the input area. a. Locate the memo you want. b. Move the memo up or down by dragging the stylus across the screen. A black dotted line appears to represent the memo you are moving. c. When the line is in the location you want for your memo, lift the stylus. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 262 CHAPTER 13 Tip Need to retrieve that holiday recipe you stored? If you save an archive copy of your deleted memos, you can refer to them later by importing them. Writing Memos Deleting a memo 0 1 2 Tap the Memos icon in the input area. Open the Delete Memo dialog box: a. Locate the memo you want. b. Open the menus. c. Select Delete Memo on the Record menu. 3 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL computer. Check the box to save an archive copy of the memo on your Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 263 CHAPTER 13 Tip (Windows) If you chose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook, check out the online Help in Outlook to learn how to use Notes on your computer. Tip You can copy the text of a memo and paste it into a new Word file in Documents on your device. Edit the text in Documents, save it as a Microsoft Word file, and then send the file to your computer by synchronizing so you can view and edit it in Word. Writing Memos Working with Memos on your computer Use Memos on your computer to view and manage the memos you create on your device. Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Memos on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics: • Viewing, copying, and deleting memos • Editing memo details • Marking memos as private • Showing, masking, and hiding private memos • Printing memos • Changing between the list and single memo views • Adding a date and time stamp to a memo • Organizing memos into categories • Sorting memos • Sharing memos WINDOWS ONLY To open Memos on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Memos on the launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Memos on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then select Memos. LifeDrive from palmOne 264 CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Memos or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Entering Information Adding a phone number or other contact information to a memo using Phone Lookup Categories Organizing memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them Privacy Keeping memos private by turning on security options Sharing • Beaming memos to other Palm Powered™ devices • Sending memos to other Bluetooth® devices using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your device • Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook LifeDrive from palmOne VersaMail® Sending memos as attachments to email messages SMS Sending memos as part of a text message Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Memos 265 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad In this chapter Creating a note Viewing and editing a note Deleting a note Working with Note Pad on your computer Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Need to jot down a phone number or a reminder to yourself? Avoid fumbling for scraps of paper, and write important reminders in Note Pad. You can use Note Pad to do everything you might do with a piece of paper and a pencil, such as drawing a quick sketch. Note Pad gives you a place to draw freehand and take notes in your personal handwriting, which is even faster and more flexible than creating a memo on your device. Benefits of Note Pad • • • • Capture information in the moment A picture is worth a thousand words See reminders when you set alarms Send notes to colleagues wirelessly 266 CHAPTER 14 [ ! ] Before You Begin Make sure full-screen writing is turned off. You cannot create or edit notes in Note Pad when full-screen writing is on. Tip Select the pen selector to change the pen width or to select the eraser. To clear the screen completely, select the note (anywhere but the title), open the Edit menu, and select Clear Note. Did You Know? Prevent others from viewing your notes by marking them as private. Writing Notes in Note Pad Creating a note 0 1 Go to Applications and select Note Pad 2 Create a note: a. Use the stylus to write your note directly on the device screen. b. Select the time at the top of the screen and enter a title using Graffiti® 2 writing or the onscreen keyboard. 3 Category box Time or title Scroll bar Pen selector Eraser [ & ] OPTIONAL Assign the note to a category by selecting the Category box in the upper-right corner, and then selecting a category. 4 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne . That’s it. Your device automatically saves the note. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. 267 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Choosing the pen and paper (background) colors 0 0 1 Go to Applications and select Note Pad 2 Open the Select Colors dialog box: . a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list. b. Open the menus. c. Select Options, and then select Preferences. d. Select Color. 3 Select the pen and paper colors: a. Select Pen, and then select the ink color you want to use. b. Select Paper, and then select the background color you want to use. c. Select OK, and then select OK again. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 268 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Tip Change the alarm sound by opening the Options menu, selecting Preferences, and then selecting a sound from the Alarm Sound pick list. Setting an alarm To use a note as a reminder, set an alarm for that note. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Note Pad 2 Open the note: . a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list. b. Select the note you want to set an alarm for. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 269 CHAPTER 14 Tip You can also open the Set Alarm dialog box by selecting a note and tapping the right edge of the screen next to the note title. Writing Notes in Note Pad 3 Set the alarm: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Alarm. c. Select the Date box, and then select the year, month, and date you want the alarm to sound. d. Select the time you want the alarm to sound. e. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 270 CHAPTER 14 Tip Sort the Note Pad list alphabetically, by date, or manually. Open the Options menu, select Preferences, and then select the Sort by pick list. If you sort manually, you can rearrange the list by dragging notes to another position in the list. Writing Notes in Note Pad Viewing and editing a note 0 1 Go to Applications and select Note Pad 2 Open the note: . a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list. b. Select the note you want to view or edit. 3 Read or edit the note, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 271 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Tip You can also delete a note by opening the Record menu and selecting Delete Note. Deleting a note Tip Want to get rid of those deletion confirmation messages? Open the Options menu, select Preferences, and then uncheck the Confirm note delete box. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Note Pad 2 Open the note: . a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list. b. Select the note you want to delete. 3 Select Delete, and then select OK to confirm deletion. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 272 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Working with Note Pad on your computer Use Note Pad on your computer to view and manage the handwritten notes you create on your device. Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Note Pad on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics: • Learning about the parts of the Note Pad window • Viewing, copying, and deleting notes • Editing note details and titles • Setting an alarm for a note • Marking notes as private • Showing, masking, and hiding private notes • Printing notes • Changing between the List and Preview views • Sorting notes • Sharing notes WINDOWS ONLY To open Note Pad on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Note Pad on the launch bar. MAC ONLY To open Note Pad on your computer, double-click the Note Pad icon in the Palm folder. LifeDrive from palmOne 273 CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Using menus Sharing Support If you’re having problems with Note Pad or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne • Opening applications • Beaming notes to other Palm Powered™ devices • Sending notes to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device VersaMail® Sending notes as attachments to email messages Privacy Keeping notes private by turning on security options Categories Creating categories so you can organize notes Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Note Pad 274 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos In this chapter Creating a voice memo Listening to a voice memo Setting an alarm for a voice memo An important idea pops into your head, and you need to record it before you forget it. If a brilliant marketing idea hits when you’re away from your office, Voice Memo is the tool you need. Storing voice memos Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes, agenda items, and other important thoughts directly on your handheld. Record client meeting notes on the way to the office, and then send them to your assistant in an email to transcribe them. Or use a voice memo with an alarm as a reminder message for that errand you promised not to forget. LifeDrive from palmOne Benefits of Voice Memo • Capture thoughts on the fly • Send recorded memos to colleagues • Synchronize voice memos to back them up on your computer 275 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Tip For best results, hold your device within about one foot of your mouth while recording. Creating a voice memo Tip To pause your recording, you must keep the Voice Memo button held down and then tap Pause. For longer recordings where you want to pause multiple times, use the onscreen control. Did You Know? Voice Memo remembers the last storage location and stores all new memos to that location unless you change it. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner and select a category or a location. You can create a quick voice memo using the application button on the side of your device, or you can use the pause control for a longer memo that you can pause and restart as your ideas flow. Creating a quick voice memo using the application button 0 1 2 Hold down the Voice Memo application button tone indicates that recording has started. on the side of your device. A Record your voice memo: a. Face your device and begin speaking. Continue holding the Voice Memo button while recording. b. When you have finished recording, release the Voice Memo button. A tone indicates that recording has stopped and the memo is finished. NOTE Pressing the Voice Memo application button again starts a new memo. 3 Select Done. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 276 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Done LifeDrive from palmOne That's it. Your device automatically saves the voice memo to the storage location set in the category pick list. If you are storing memos in program memory, make sure you have a current backup by synchronizing often. 277 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Creating a longer voice memo using the pause control Pause and resume recording as many times as you want to make sure you capture all of your thoughts. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo . Alternately, you can press and quickly release the Voice Memo application button 2 . Record your voice memo: a. Select New. b. Select Record. A tone indicates that recording has started. Record Stop c. Face your device and begin speaking. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 278 CHAPTER 15 Tip Once you pause your recording, you can use other applications and come back later to resume recording. To resume recording, just tap the Voice Memo icon or press and release the Voice Memo application button, and then tap Record. Tip You can organize your voice memos by storing them into categories, such as personal or marketing ideas. Recording Voice Memos 3 Pause and restart recording: a. Select Pause to stop recording. A tone indicates that recording has paused. b. Select Record. A tone indicates that recording has restarted. Recording status Pause Pause and restart recording as many times as you want. You can use other applications while the voice memo is paused. 4 Select Stop. A tone sounds to indicate that recording has stopped. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 279 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos 5 6 7 [ & ] OPTIONAL Tap on the title line and enter a title for your memo. You can choose to leave the time as part of the title or remove it. You can also select a category to store your memo. If you want to listen to your memo, tap the Play button. Select to select a category Select the title line and enter a name Play [ & ] OPTIONAL Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner and select a category or a location. Select Done Done LifeDrive from palmOne 280 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Tip You can sort the Voice Memo list by date, alphabetically, by length of memo, or manually. Go to the Preferences menu and tap the Sort by pick list to select a sorting scheme. Listening to a voice memo Tip Press Right or Left on the navigator to listen to the next or previous voice memo. 0 1 2 3 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo . Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner and select All, or a category or location where the memo is located. In the Voice Memo list, select the voice memo title. The voice memo begins to play after a few seconds. Pause Speaker icon Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 281 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL level: Set the volume a. Select the Speaker icon. b. Press Up or Down on the 5-way to adjust the volume. c. Select Done. 5 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 282 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Tip You can use a concerto or a bird chirp or to a number of other sounds for your alarm. Open the menus, select Options, and then select Preferences. Tap the Alarm pick list to select a sound. Setting an alarm for a voice memo Did You Know? You cannot set an alarm if the memo is stored on an expansion card or the internal drive. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo 2 Select the voice memo to which you want to assign an alarm. 3 Open the Alarm dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Alarm. 4 Set the alarm: a. Select the Date box and select the year, month, and date you want the alarm to sound. b. Select the Time box and select the hour and minute you want the alarm to sound. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 283 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos 5 6 [ & ] OPTIONAL Check the Auto-play box to automatically play the voice memo when the alarm goes off. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 284 CHAPTER 15 [ ! ] Before You Begin If you are storing voice memos on an expansion card, you must have an expansion card inserted in your device’s expansion card slot. Recording Voice Memos Storing voice memos By default, voice memos are stored in program memory. When you store memos in categories such as Unfiled, Business, or Personal, you are storing the memos in program memory. This means that you can view and listen to memos only in the Voice Memo application and you can synchronize the memos. You can also mark memos as private and set alarms. You can change your voice memo storage location to the internal drive or an expansion card. When you store voice memos on the internal drive or an expansion card, they do not appear in the Voice Memo portion of Palm® Desktop software after a HotSync® operation and are not backed up. Also, you cannot mark voice memos as private or attach alarms. You can still beam memos and send memos from any storage location. Voice Memo remembers the last storage location and stores all new memos to that location unless you change it. You can configure your device to always store voice memos on an expansion card when one is present. Saving a voice memo to another location You can change your voice memo storage location to program memory, the internal drive, or an expansion card. Storing your voice memos on an expansion card allows you to share voice memos with others. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo 2 Highlight a voice memo. . Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 285 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos 3 Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner and select a category or location: Category pick list • To store memos in your program memory, select a category or Unfiled. Icon indicates memo is stored on internal drive or expansion card • To store memos on your hard drive, select LifeDrive. • To store memos on your expansion card, select the card name. 4 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 286 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos Automatically storing all voice memos on an expansion card 0 1 Go to Applications and select Voice Memo 2 Open the Alarm dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. 3 4 Check the Record automatically to expansion card, if present box. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 287 CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos My Handheld Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Voice Memo or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Categories Organizing voice memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them Privacy Keeping voice memos private by turning on security options Sharing • Exchanging voice memos with other palmOne™ device users by beaming them • Sending voice memos to other palmOne Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth technology on your device VersaMail® Sending voice memos as attachments to email messages Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Voice Memo 288 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections In this chapter What can I do with the builtin Wi-Fi® wireless technology? What types of connections can I make? Wi-Fi signal strength indicator Setting up a Wi-Fi network connection Setting up a connection for Wi-Fi synchronization Setting up a Wi-Fi device-todevice network Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Staying connected means you have the latest wireless technology at your fingertips at all times. Now your device can actually connect you to the wireless world using either Wi-Fi® or Bluetooth® wireless technology. During the day, you need Wi-Fi to access your corporate network. During the evening, connect to the Wi-Fi wireless network at your home or the local coffee shop to access your personal email or browse the Internet. Benefits • Connect to your corporate network wirelessly • Stay up-to-date by connecting wirelessly anywhere • Transfer documents wirelessly 289 CHAPTER 16 » Key Term Wi-Fi Wireless technology that enables networks with access points to allow devices such as handhelds, computers, and printers to connect wirelessly to the Internet and corporate networks. Did You Know? If you are out of range of a Wi-Fi access point, you can remain connected using Bluetooth wireless technology. Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections What can I do with the built-in Wi-Fi® wireless technology? Access your corporate network. Whether you are attending a meeting or roaming the hallway, you can stay connected to the information you need. Send email messages. Whether you send email messages once a week or constantly throughout the day, wireless connectivity means that you can share information. Access the web. Connect to the Internet for news and information in a café or in a meeting. Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly. Imagine your desk and workstation without cable clutter. Wireless technology on your device replaces many of the connecting cables with a wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing. Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly. Transfer a document wirelessly from your desktop computer to your handheld for review when you are away from your desk. What types of connections can I make? With built-in Wi-Fi wireless technology, you can make connections at the following times: • When you are in range of WI-Fi access points for private networks in a corporation or home. If these networks are secure, you must have the necessary keys to access the network. Once you are on the network, you can browse the Internet, send and receive email, or even access network devices such as your computer. • When you are in range of Wi-Fi access points for public networks, such as wireless cafés and city networks, you can use the networks to browse the Internet or to send and receive email. Some public networks require a subscription fee. Check with the public network provider for details. • When you in range of other Wi-Fi devices, such as printers or projectors, create a device-todevice network between your handheld and the other device. Also, check the user guide for the other Wi-Fi device to enable device-to-device networking. LifeDrive from palmOne 290 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Wi-Fi signal strength indicator You can easily check Wi-Fi status and signal strength any time by viewing the Wi-Fi icon on the status bar. You can tap the Wi-Fi icon and open the Preferences screen to also view status, signal strength, and other Wi-Fi information. Wi-Fi control 0 Status ...Icons Wi-Fi off Wi-Fi on Connected to a network Signal strength: Full strength decreasing to minimum signal Wi-Fi on Connected to a network No signal Wi-Fi on Not connected to a network LifeDrive from palmOne 291 CHAPTER 16 [ ! ] Before You Begin Contact the network administrator to get the name of the network, also known as an SSID, and the security information, such as WEP or WPA-PSK keys. If your computer is behind an Internet firewall, you may need VPN access information to connect. » Key Term Encryption key A series of letters and numbers that enables data to be encrypted and then decrypted so it can be safely shared within a network. Your handheld supports two encryption systems: WEP and WPA-PSK. Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Setting up a Wi-Fi network connection 0O 1 2 Tap Wi-Fi controls on the status bar. Select the Wi-Fi pick list, and then select On. Go to step 3. If Wi-Fi is already on, select Scan. Go to step 4. 3 Select the Network pick list, and then do one of the following: • If the network is listed and does not require an encryption key, select the network. Wait for the connection to finish, and then select Done. You are now connected and this procedure is done. • If the network is not listed or if the network requires an encryption key, select Edit Networks and go to step 4. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 292 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 4 Add or edit a network: • If the network appears on the list, select the network and then select Edit to add encryption key information.Go to step 6. • If the network does not appear on the list, select Add. The network may be hidden for security purposes. 5 Add the network name or SSID if it does not appear. An SSID is required for hidden networks. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 293 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 6 Select the Security pick list, and then select a security option: • If your network does not require any encryption settings, select None and go to step 9. • If your network requires WEP encryption, select WEP and go to step 7. • If your network requires WPA-PSK encryption, select WPA-PSK and go to step 8. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 294 CHAPTER 16 Did You Know? 64-bit WEP keys are commonly called 40-bit keys and 128-bit keys are commonly called 104-bit keys because the other 24 bits are automatically assigned. Tip You can use a passphrase to generate the keys. If you have problems, ask your network administrator for the hex equivalent, and use that instead. Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 7 If you selected WEP in step 6, enter the WEP encryption information: a. Select the Key box. b. Select the Key Type pick list and select a key type: 40-bit hex Creates a 10-digit hexadecimal number. 40-bit ASCII Creates a five-character string. 40-bit passphase 104-bit hex Creates a variable-length string. Creates a 26-digit hexadecimal number. 104-bit ASCII Creates a 13-character string. 104-bit passphrase Creates a variable-length string. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 295 CHAPTER 16 » Key Term Key index Specifies which of the four keys to use at a given time. Some access points automatically broadcast their key index. Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Cont’d c. If you want to enter more than one WEP key, or you want to generate four WEP keys from a passphrase, check the Four keys box. d. Enter the WEP key(s). e. If you checked the Four keys box, select an index number from the Key Index pick list. f. Select OK and go to step 9. 8 If you selected WPA-PSK in step 6: a. Select the Key box. b. Assign a passphrase. c. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 296 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 9 [ & ] OPTIONAL Manually set your IP or DNS addresses: a. Select Details. b. Select the Connect to pick list, and then select Access Point (infrastructure). c. Select Advanced. d. Select the IP Address or DNS Server pick list, and then select Manual. e. Enter the IP address or DNS server information. f. If you want to use a preamble, check the Use short preamble box. g. Select OK. 10 Done LifeDrive from palmOne Select OK and then select Done. You can now connect to the network any time you are within range of the access point. 297 CHAPTER 16 [ ! ] Before You Begin You need to perform the following: • You must synchronize at least once with your computer using the sync cable. • You must set up a Wi-Fi network connection. Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Setting up a connection for Wi-Fi synchronization 0 1 Go to Applications and select HotSync 2 Select Network. • You must turn on Wi-Fi on your device and connect to a Wi-Fi network. • If your computer is behind your company’s Internet firewall, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN). Check with your system administrator for information. . Network service box 3 Make sure the network service box is set to Wi-Fi. If your network service is not set to Wi-Fi, change the network service to Wi-Fi: a. Tap the network service box. b. Select Wi-Fi from the Service pick list, and then select Done. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 298 CHAPTER 16 Tip If your Wi-Fi network is unavailable, you can still synchronize wirelessly using Bluetooth wireless technology. Did You Know? If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync your email and calendar information synchronize directly with your info on your company's Exchange server. Did You Know? You can change the conduits that are run during Wi-Fi synchronization by opening the menu, selecting Conduit Setup from the Options menu, and then checking or unchecking the conduit boxes. LifeDrive from palmOne Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 4 Select HotSync to synchronize your device with your computer. If your device does not synchronize with your computer, go to step 5. 5 On your computer, set your HotSync Manager for Network synchronization: a. Click the HotSync Manager icon of your computer screen. on the taskbar in the lower-right corner b. Select Network. 6 On your device, go to Applications and select HotSync 7 Set the ModemSync preference: . a. Open the menus. b. Select ModemSync Prefs on the Options menu, and then select Network. Continued 299 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 8 Set the LANSync preferences: a. Open the menus. b. Select LANSync Prefs on the Options menu, and then select LANSync. 9 Make sure your computer and device settings match: a. On your device, open the menus. b. Select Primary PC Setup on the Options menu. c. On your computer, click the HotSync Manager icon on the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 300 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Cont’d d. Click Setup, and then click the Network tab. e. Click TCP/IP Settings. f. Make sure that the Primary PC Address and Subnet Mask settings match the settings on your device. If the settings don’t match, change the settings on your device. 10 Select HotSync to synchronize your device with your computer. If your device still does not synchronize with your computer, go to step 11. 11 Delete Subnet Mask fields on your device: a. Open the menus. b. Select Primary PC Setup on the Options menu. c. Delete the entry in the Subnet Mask field. 12 Select HotSync to synchronize your device with your computer. If you still can’t synchronize your device with your computer, contact your Wi-Fi system administrator for assistance. You can also check the support website at www.palmOne.com/support. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 301 CHAPTER 16 [ ! ] Before You Begin You need to perform the following: • You must set up a Wi-Fi network connection. • You must set up an email account on your device before you can send or receive email messages. Tip If Wi-Fi is already on, you can change to another network by tapping the Wi-Fi controls on the status bar, and then selecting Scan. Your device scans for available networks. Select the network you want to from the available networks list. Tip When you enter a URL in the web browser or select Get & Send in the VersaMail® application, a connection is automatically initiated with the last used service. LifeDrive from palmOne Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Accessing email and the web with Wi-Fi After you set up a connection with a Wi-Fi network, you can send and receive email or browse the web wirelessly using this connection. 0 1 2 Open the email application or the web browser. Select the Wi-Fi pick list, and then select On. Go to step 3. If Wi-Fi is already on, select Scan. Go to step 4. 3 Select the Network pick list, then select the network. Wait for the connection to finish, and then select Done. You are now ready to send and receive email messages or to browse the web. Continued 302 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 4 Select a network, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne You are now ready to send and receive email messages or to browse the web. 303 CHAPTER 16 [ ! ] Before You Begin You need to know the following information: • Name of the network, also known as an SSID • Security information, such as WEP keys Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Setting up a Wi-Fi device-to-device network 0O 1 2 • Channel number You may also need to know the IP address and DNS server information. » Key Term Encryption key A series of letters and numbers that enables data to be encrypted and then decrypted so it can be safely shared within a network. Your handheld supports two encryption systems: WEP and WPA-PSK. Tap the Wi-Fi controls on the status bar. Select the Wi-Fi pick list, and then select On. If Wi-Fi is already on, select Scan. Go to step 4. 3 Select the Network pick list, and then do one of the following: • If the network is listed and does not require an encryption key, select the network. Wait for the connection to finish, and then select Done. You are now connected and this procedure is done. • If the network is not listed or if the network requires an encryption key, select Edit Networks and go to step 4. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 304 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 4 Select Add. 5 Add the network name or SSID. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 305 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 6 Select the Security pick list and then select a security option: • If your network does not require any encryption settings, select None and go to step 8. • If your network requires WEP encryption, select WEP and go to step 7. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 306 CHAPTER 16 Did You Know? 64-bit WEP keys are commonly called 40-bit keys and 128-bit keys are commonly called 104-bit keys because the other 24 bits are automatically assigned. Tip You can use a passphrase to generate the keys. If you have problems, ask your network administrator for the hex equivalent, and use that instead. Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 7 If you selected WEP in step 6, enter the WEP encryption information: a. Select the Key box. b. Select the Key Type pick list and select a key type: 40-bit hex Creates a 10-digit hexadecimal number. 40-bit ASCII Creates a five-character string. 40-bit passphase 104-bit hex Creates a variable-length string. Creates a 26-digit hexadecimal number. 104-bit ASCII Creates a 13-character string. 104-bit passphrase Creates a variable-length string. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 307 CHAPTER 16 » Key Term Key index Specifies which of the four keys to use at a given time. Some access points automatically broadcast their key index. Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Cont’d c. If you want to enter more than one WEP key, or you want to generate four WEP keys from a passphrase, check the Four keys box. d. Enter the WEP key(s). e. If you checked the Four keys box, select an index number from the Key Index pick list. f. Select OK and go to step 9. 8 Set the connection: a. Select Details. b. Select Peer-to-Peer (ad hoc) from the Connect to pick list. c. Select the channel number from the Channel pick list. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 308 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections 9 [ & ] OPTIONAL Manually set your IP or DNS address: a. Select the IP Address or DNS Server pick list, and then select Manual. b. Enter the IP address or DNS server information. c. If you want to use a preamble, check the Use short preamble box. d. Select OK. 10 Done LifeDrive from palmOne Select OK three times and then select Done. You can now connect to the device any time you are within range. 309 CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with your device’s wireless capabilities or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Synchronizing Synchronizing your device with your desktop computer Contacts Connecting to telephone numbers in your list of contacts VersaMail Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your device’s Wi-Fi technology Bluetooth Using your device’s Bluetooth wireless technology Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Wi-Fi wireless technology 310 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections In this chapter What can I do with the builtin Bluetooth® wireless technology? Entering basic Bluetooth settings Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization Setting up a connection to a Bluetooth network Creating trusted devices Setting advanced Bluetooth features Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Staying connected in the world means you have the latest wireless technology at your fingertips at all times. Now your device can actually connect you to the wireless world using either Wi-Fi or Bluetooth wireless technology. Your device’s built-in Bluetooth functionality helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices so you can enjoy the convenience of cable-free connectivity. With Bluetooth connections, you can share contacts or your favorite photos with other people. You choose who you share with by managing your wireless privacy through trusted connections to other devices, and setting levels of visibility. Benefits of your device’s Bluetooth wireless technology • Connect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web • Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly • Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly 311 CHAPTER 17 » Key Term Bluetooth® Technology that enables devices such as devices, mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other. [ ! ] Before You Begin Any device you connect to must also be a Bluetooth device with Bluetooth features enabled. Check the user guide that came with the device for information on how to enable the Bluetooth features. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections What can I do with the built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology? Connect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web. Whether you access the Internet or send text or email messages once a week or constantly throughout the day, wireless connectivity means that you can go online anytime by connecting by means of your mobile phone or your laptop connected to the Internet. For a list of compatible phones, go to http://www.palmOne.com/us/support/downloads/phonelink.html. Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly. Imagine your desk and workstation without cable clutter. Bluetooth wireless technology on your device replaces many of the connecting cables with a wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing. Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly. Wouldn’t it be great if you could send files such as photos wirelessly or print wirelessly on a Bluetooth printer? You can also find your way using a Bluetooth GPS navigator. Use the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology to set up connections to devices within approximately thirty feet of your device. What types of connections can I make? With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can make connections using the following types of devices: • To browse the Internet or access your email account, link through your desktop computer’s network connection or establish a connection to a Bluetooth LAN Access Point. • To access the Internet or an email account, connect to your mobile phone. To use a mobile phone, you must dial your ISP or sign up for an account with a high-speed wireless carrier. • To send and receive text messages, connect to your mobile phone. • To synchronize your device with your computer wirelessly, connect to your computer. • To share files with another Bluetooth device such as a device or printer, form a trusted pair with that device. LifeDrive from palmOne 312 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections What is device discovery? Discovery is the process in which your device searches for other Bluetooth devices within its range (approximately thirty feet). As each device is discovered, it shows up in your discovery results. After you find the devices you are looking for, you can select the devices with which you want to connect. The Bluetooth application on your device can be turned on and off, and the application has a Discoverable setting that can also be turned on and off. The following is a description of setting combinations and the resulting discovery states: Bluetooth Off: When the Bluetooth setting is off, other users cannot discover your device. This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and a security chain, and disabling the doorbell. When Bluetooth is off, you cannot access the Discoverable setting. Bluetooth On and Discoverable No: When your device and Bluetooth are on and the Discoverable setting is set to No, you can receive connections only from devices with which you have previously formed a trusted pair. This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and disabling the doorbell, but any friends who already have the key can enter. By default, the Discoverable setting is enabled when Bluetooth is on. Bluetooth On and Discoverable Yes: When your device is on, Bluetooth is on, and the Discoverable setting is set to Yes, you can receive connections from any Bluetooth device. You are automatically connected with devices with which you have previously communicated, but you can refuse invitations to connect with unrecognized devices. This is similar to locking your front door with a dead bolt and enabling the doorbell. Friends who already have the key can enter freely, and if someone without a key rings the bell to request a connection, you can choose to open the door or ignore the request. LifeDrive from palmOne 313 » » CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Key Term Discoverable Setting that allows other devices to find and connect with your device using Bluetooth wireless technology. If your device is not discoverable, other devices cannot find it to make a connection. Your device must be on in order to be discoverable. Entering basic Bluetooth settings Key Term When the Bluetooth icon on the status bar is dimmed, Bluetooth is off and your device is not discoverable. 0 1 2 Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Enter the basic Bluetooth settings: a. Select Prefs. b. Select ON. c. Tap the Device Name field and enter a name for your device. This is the name that other Bluetooth devices see when they connect to your device. By default it is the username you use during synchronization, but you can change it. d. Select the Discoverable pick list and select Yes or No. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 314 CHAPTER 17 [ ! ] Before You Begin If you have an IR phone, you must download the Phone Link application from the web. Go to http:// www.palmOne.com/us/ support/downloads/ phonelink.html to download the software. » Key Term Trusted pair Two devices—for example, your device and your mobile phone—that can connect to each other because each device can find the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a trusted pair with a device, you do not need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection [ ! ] IMPORTANT To set up a phone connection, you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone enabled with data services. You can form a trusted pair between your device and your mobile phone. Once you have set up the trusted pair connection, you automatically connect to your phone when you want a Bluetooth connection. 0O 1 2 Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Open the Phone Setup dialog box. a. Select Prefs. b. Select Setup Devices. c. Select Phone Setup. d. Select Phone Connection. e. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 315 CHAPTER 17 Tip If you receive a message that your phone is not ready to accept a connection, check to make sure that your phone is prepared to make a Bluetooth connection. See the instructions included with your phone. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 3 Select the phone you want to connect to: a. Select the Manufacturer and Model pick lists, select the correct entries for your phone, and then select Next. If the phone does not appear on the list, check for phone compatibility at http://www.palmOne.com/us/support/downloads/phonelink.html. b. The Discovery Results displays all Bluetooth phones within range. Select the phone you want, select OK, and then select Next. If your phone is not listed in the discovery results, check whether your phone is discoverable using Bluetooth wireless technology. Select Find More to search again. NOTE Not all features are available if your specific phone model is not in the pick list. Select phone Select if your phone does not appear Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 316 CHAPTER 17 » Key Term Passkey Like a password, the passkey is a security measure. Connections can happen only between your device and a device that has the same passkey. For example, to connect to your mobile phone, you need to enter the same passkey on your device and on your phone. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 4 Enter a passkey: a. Enter a passkey number. This can be any number you choose; it does not, for example, have to be a password you use to access a network or an email account. [ ! ] IMPORTANT You must enter the same passkey on your device and your mobile phone in order to connect to your phone. Select OK, and then select Done to finish phone connection setup. 5 Do one of the following: • Select Yes to begin network setup. Go to step 6. • Select No to use your phone connection only to dial phone numbers from your device or send text messages. You cannot use the phone connection to access the Internet or send email. You are done with this procedure. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 317 CHAPTER 17 » Key Term GPRS Acronym for General Packet Radio Service, a method of sending information wirelessly at high speeds. Select Yes in step 6 only if you have a GPRS account for your mobile phone. Tip Contact your ISP (for example, AOL or Earthlink) if you are not sure about one or more of the items to enter in step 7. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 6 Begin network setup: a. Select Yes, and then select Next. Go to step 7. b. If you select No, and then select Next. Go to step 8. 7 Select the service area and carrier: a. Select the pick lists and select the correct information for your cellular carrier. b. Select Next, and then select Done. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 318 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 8 If you selected No in step 6, enter your dial-up information: a. Select Next. b. Enter the phone number you use to dial in to your ISP and the username for your dial-up account. c. Select the Password box, enter your account password, and select OK. This is the password you use to access your dial-up account. d. Select Next, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne You now have set up your phone connection to browse the web and send and receive email messages. 319 CHAPTER 17 [ ! ] Before You Begin You must perform the following: • Set up a Bluetooth phone connection with network service. • set up an email account on your device before you can send or receive email messages. Tip You can select Bluetooth controls on the status bar to quickly check Bluetooth status and make a connection from any application on your device. LifeDrive from palmOne Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth After you set up a connection with a mobile phone, you can send and receive email or browse the web wirelessly using this connection. 0 1 Open the email application or the web browser. 2 Verify Bluetooth status: a. Tap Bluetooth controls the status bar. on b. Make sure On is selected. Continued 320 CHAPTER 17 » Key Term Service Way of connecting to a mobile phone to send information wirelessly, for example, through a high-speed (GPRS) carrier or a dial-up account with an Internet service provider (ISP). Tip When you enter a URL in the web browser or select Get & Send in the VersaMail® application, a connection is automatically initiated with the last used service. LifeDrive from palmOne Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 3 Connect to your phone: a. Select the Network Service pick list and select the service that you want to use to connect to the Internet. If you set up a phone connection, the name of the service you configured is listed. b. Select Connect. Done You are now ready to send and receive email messages or to browse the web. 321 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Tip After the first time you set up a connection and wirelessly synchronize with a computer, you can synchronize with that computer at any time by choosing its device name from the Service pick list and tapping Connect. Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Tap Bluetooth controls 2 Open the PC Setup wizard: on the status bar. a. Select Prefs. b. Select Setup Devices. c. Select PC Setup. d. Select Bluetooth HotSync. e. Select Next. . Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 322 CHAPTER 17 Tip To open HotSync® Manager on your computer in the onscreen instructions (see step 4 in this procedure), click the HotSync Manager icon on the taskbar in the lowerright corner of your computer screen. Tip Remember that Bluetooth devices generally must be within 30 feet of each other to communicate. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 3 Select a computer and select OK. The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active. If your computer did not show up on the discovery results, select Find More to search again. 4 Set up a connection for wireless synchronization: a. Follow the onscreen instructions for steps 1–3, selecting Next after each step. b. Select Launch HotSync® Manager in step 4. c. Select HotSync Done LifeDrive from palmOne to synchronize your device with your computer. Now you can easily synchronize your device with your computer wirelessly. 323 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections MAC ONLY 0 1 Go to Applications and select Prefs 2 Open the Edit Connection screen: . a. From the Communications Preferences list, select Connection. b. Select New. 3 Set up the connection to your computer: a. Enter a name for the connection, such as BT to Mac. b. Select the Connect to pick list and select PC. c. Select the Via pick list and select Bluetooth. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 324 CHAPTER 17 Tip Just as it is safer to use different personal identification numbers (PINs) for different bank accounts, your passkeys are more secure if you use a different passkey for each device with which you want to connect—one passkey for a connection to a phone, a different one for a connection to a computer, and so on. Just remember that you must enter the same passkey on your device and on the device with which you want to connect. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Cont’d. d. Make sure the computer is ready to accept a Bluetooth connection. NOTE See the documentation included with the computer for information on how to prepare it to accept a Bluetooth connection. The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pairing or a Bluetooth link. e. Select the Device box. 4 Select the computer: a. When the Discovery Results screen appears, select your computer. If your computer does not appear on the list, select Find More. b. Select OK. 5 [ & ] OPTIONAL If prompted, enter a passkey: a. Enter a passkey number. This can be any number you choose; it does not have to be, for example, a password you use to access a network or an email account. [ ! ] IMPORTANT You must enter the same passkey on your device and your computer in order to wirelessly synchronize with your computer. b. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 325 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 6 Synchronize your device with your computer: a. Go to Applications and select HotSync . b. Make sure that Local is selected, and then select the connection you created in step 3 from the pick list. c. Select HotSync Done LifeDrive from palmOne . Now you can easily synchronize with your computer wirelessly. 326 CHAPTER 17 [ ! ] Before You Begin You must get the passkey, username, and password for the LAN from the system administrator. » Key Term LAN Acronym for local area network. LAN refers to a local network that connects computers located in your home or business. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Setting up a connection to a Bluetooth network 0 1 Tap Bluetooth controls 2 Open the PC Setup wizard: on the status bar. a. Select Prefs. b. Select Setup Devices. c. Select LAN Setup. d. Select Next. 3 Select a LAN and select OK. The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active. If the LAN did not show up on the discovery results, select Find More to search again. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 327 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 4 Create a trusted connection. a. Select Yes to add the LAN as a trusted device. b. Select Next. c. Enter the passkey number for the LAN and select OK. 5 6 Enter the username and password for the LAN and select Next. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 328 CHAPTER 17 Did You Know? When your device and Bluetooth are on and the Discoverable setting is set to No, you can receive connections only from devices with which you have previously communicated. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Creating trusted devices After you have set up your phone and computer as trusted devices, you may want to set up other trusted devices, such as a friend’s device. When your device recognizes a trusted device, your device automatically accepts communication, bypassing the discovery and authentication process. 0 1 2 Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar. Begin the discovery process: a. Select Prefs. b. Select Setup Devices. c. Select Trusted Devices. d. Select Add Device. e. Select Trusted Devices to begin the discovery process. The Discovery icon appears to indicate that the discovery process is active. 3 Select the device you want to add as a trusted device, and then select OK. If the device you want to add does not appear on the discovery results list, select Find More to search again. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 329 CHAPTER 17 Tip You can delete a trusted device or view the details about a trusted device, such as the device address and your most recent connection. In Bluetooth Manager, select Setup Devices, and then select Trusted Devices. Select the appropriate device and select Details. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections 4 Enter the same passkey on your device and the other device and select OK. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices have a built-in passkey; others enable you to choose the passkey; see the documentation included with your Bluetooth device for information. In either case you must use the same passkey on both the device and your device. Many phones also require you to put the phone into a mode where it can accept a key exchange for bonding in a trusted pair. See the documentation included with your phone for information. 5 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 330 CHAPTER 17 Tip If the remote device name has changed, disabling and then enabling the device name cache forces your device to retrieve the new device name. Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Setting advanced Bluetooth features These advanced settings are used in special circumstances. Storing recently found device names When you enable or disable the device name cache you control whether or not your device retrieves the names of remote devices each time the discovery process takes place. By default, the device name cache is enabled, which means the names of devices that are found are stored in cache. The next time the device is discovered, the name appears very quickly. 0 1 Tap Bluetooth controls 2 Open the menus. 3 Select Options, and then select Disable device name cache. on the status bar. The selection on the Options menu toggles to Enable device name cache. This indicates that the cache is disabled. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 331 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Allowing your device to wake up when it is turned off You can set your device to receive information through Bluetooth connections when your device is turned off. The radio remains on, but your device is not discoverable. For another Bluetooth device or application to wake up your device, it must know your device name. This limits the connections to devices that are trusted or that have connected with you before. 0 1 Tap Bluetooth controls 2 Open the menus. 3 Select Options, and then select Allow wakeup. on the status bar. The selection on the Options menu toggles to Do not allow wakeup indicating that Allow Wakeup is enabled. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Enabling the Allow Wakeup setting uses battery power even when your device is turned off. Be sure to monitor your battery level. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 332 CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with your device’s wireless capabilities or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/support LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Synchronizing Synchronizing your device with your desktop computer Contacts Connecting to telephone numbers in your list of contacts VersaMail Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your device’s Bluetooth technology SMS Sending and receiving text messages wirelessly using your device’s Bluetooth technology Wi-Fi Using your device’s Wi-Fi wireless technology Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about Bluetooth wireless technology 333 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages In this chapter Upgrading an existing email account About email accounts Creating an account Getting and reading messages Sending an email message You already know how efficient email is for staying in touch with personal and business contacts. Now the VersaMail® application brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and colleagues anywhere you can make an Internet connection. Working with email folders Working with email messages Working with attachments Advanced VersaMail application features Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne You can email photos to your friends and family, or create Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit at your convenience. If your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® on your device. Benefits • Access email on the go • Send and receive photos, sound files, Word and Excel files, and more • Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time 334 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Upgrading an existing email account If you already use the VersaMail application on a different device and want to keep your username, you can upgrade your existing email account for use on your new device. 0 1 Synchronize your new device with your computer. When prompted, select the username associated with your old device; this contains your existing account information. 2 On your device, go to Favorites and select VersaMail 3 Select Yes to accept the upgrade. . Done LifeDrive from palmOne 335 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? You can create up to eight email accounts. About email accounts Did You Know? The VersaMail application provides strong 128-bit AES encryption for your password. Tip Go to your email provider’s website or contact their customer support to obtain the setup information you need. The VersaMail application is software that lets you use your device to access email from an account with an email provider (either an Internet service provider, or ISP, such as Earthlink or Yahoo!, or a wireless carrier) or from your corporate email account. For each email account you want to access, you must set up an account in VersaMail. For example, if you have an Earthlink account and a corporate account, set up one account for each in VersaMail. After you set up an account, you can send and receive email directly to and from your device wirelessly. Or you can download new messages from your computer to your device—and upload messages from your device to be sent from your computer’s email program—when you synchronize. [ ! ] IMPORTANT You must have an account with an email provider or a corporate account. VersaMail works with these accounts to transfer messages to and from your device. The application is not an email service provider. Using an email provider If you are setting up a new email account and have a well-known email provider (ISP or wireless carrier) such as Earthlink or Yahoo!, many of the settings you need during account setup are automatically filled in. For other ISPs, you need the following information: • Your email address and password • The protocol used for incoming mail, such as Post Office Protocol (POP) or Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) NOTE Some free web-based email providers such as Hotmail do not support either the POP or the IMAP protocol. You cannot use VersaMail to download messages to your device from an account with one of these providers. • The name of the incoming mail server LifeDrive from palmOne 336 » CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term Firewall A system set up to protect against unauthorized access into a private network. • The name of the outgoing mail (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, or SMTP) server Did You Know? With a corporate email account, you may be able to access Microsoft Exchange, IBM Lotus Domino, or Sun iPlanet mail servers, among others. • Your account’s security feature (if it has one), such as Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), Authenticated Post Office Protocol (APOP), or Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (ESMTP) Using a corporate email account If you want to access email on your device using your corporate email account, you create this account in exactly the same way that you would with any other account, with one exception: For a corporate email account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN). If your company has a Wi-Fi® wireless technology network or a Bluetooth® wireless technology access point located behind the corporate firewall, you may not need to set up a VPN to access your corporate email account. See the next section for details. To set up a corporate email account, you need certain information. Check with your company’s server administrator to obtain the following: Username and password This might be your Windows username and password, your Lotus Notes ID username and password, or something else. Protocol Most corporate mail servers use the IMAP protocol for retrieving mail. In rare cases, your company server may use the POP protocol. NOTE Some corporate mail servers do not use either protocol. In this case, you cannot send and receive email wirelessly using VersaMail. You can, however, synchronize email on your device with email in Outlook or Lotus Notes on your computer (Windows only). Incoming and outgoing mail server settings obtain these settings. Check with your company’s server administrator to NOTE If your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your device. For more information, see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. LifeDrive from palmOne 337 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages VPNs If you want to access email on your device using your corporate email account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your device. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate mail server through the company’s firewall (security layer). Without a VPN, you cannot pass through the firewall to gain access to the mail server. You need to set up a VPN to access corporate email in either of the following situations: • Your company’s wireless local area network (LAN) is located outside the firewall. • Your company’s wireless LAN is located inside the firewall, but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location or at home). Check with your company’s server administrator to see if a VPN is required for you to access the corporate network. NOTE The Auto Sync feature in VersaMail may not work with a VPN connection. Also, you cannot use scheduled sending retry of email with accounts that use a VPN connection. The Enterprise Software link on your device software installation CD contains a link to purchase and download VPN software for the device. Once you purchase and download the software, you set up a VPN connection in Preferences on your device. If you are using a VPN connection, make sure the connection is on in VersaMail. In the message list, open the Options menu, and then select Connect VPN. NOTE If your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® on your device. For more information, see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. LifeDrive from palmOne 338 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Connecting to a VPN After you set up a VPN, you need to connect to it in order to retrieve email messages from your corporate mail server. You may need to connect to the VPN each time you open VersaMail to retrieve messages from the server. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 Connect to your VPN: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Connect VPN. c. Enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN. d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 339 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Creating an account Before you can use the VersaMail application with a given email account, you need to set up the account in VersaMail. If you have multiple email accounts, you must set up a VersaMail account for each one. You have three setup options: • On a Windows computer, if the email account is already set up on your computer—for example, if you use Outlook Express on your computer to access your Earthlink account—you can transfer the account settings to your device in just a few steps. • On a Windows computer, if this is a new account, you can quickly set up the account on your computer and synchronize to transfer the information to your device. The steps for setting up an account on your computer depend on whether you are using a common email provider such as Earthlink or Yahoo! or you are using a less common provider. • For either a new or an existing account on a Windows or Mac computer, you can set up the account directly on your device. If you are setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for setup instructions. You can open VersaMail account setup on a Windows computer in one of two ways: • During software CD installation, select the option to set up your email software on the final installation screen. • From the Start menu, select Programs, navigate to the palmOne program group, and then select VersaMail Setup. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you plan to synchronize your new device using an existing username from another device, you must do so before you enter your email account information in VersaMail. If you enter the email account information first and then synchronize your device with your computer using an existing username, the email account information you entered is overwritten. LifeDrive from palmOne 340 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? Your username and email address are already entered on the Account Settings screen based on the account settings that VersaMail finds on your computer. Transferring settings from an existing account WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 4 Open VersaMail account setup. Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next. Select the option to synchronize with an email account detected on your PC, and then select the account from the list. Click Next. Enter the basic account information: a. In the Name this account field, enter a descriptive name or use the one shown. b. In the Enter your Password field, enter your email account password. c. Click Next. 5 Click Next on the mail servers screen. This information is already filled in based on the account whose settings you are transferring to your device. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 341 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 6 [ & ] OPTIONAL accounts: Set up other a. Select the option to set up another account, and then click Next. b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account you want to set up. When you have set up the last account, go to the next step. 7 Finish setting up accounts: a. Select the option to synchronize information for this account, and then click Next. b. Click Finish. 8 Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 342 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting up an account on your computer: Common providers WINDOWS ONLY The settings for many common providers are already included in VersaMail. If you have an account with one of these providers, you just need to enter your username and password during account setup. 0 0 1 2 3 Open VersaMail account setup. Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next. Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then select your mail service from the list. Click Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 343 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? Your incoming and outgoing server settings and whether the account needs ESMTP authentication are already entered based on the account type you select. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 4 Enter the basic account information: a. Enter a descriptive name for the account or use the one shown. b. Enter your account username and password. Your email address is entered automatically based on the username you enter. 5 6 Click Next on the mail servers screen. This information is already filled in based on the mail service you selected. [ & ] OPTIONAL Do one of the following: • To enter advanced settings for this account, click Advanced Settings. • To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My Settings. Click OK after settings have been tested. 7 Click Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 344 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 8 [ & ] OPTIONAL accounts: Set up other a. Select the option to set up another account, and then click Next. b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account you want to set up. When you have set up the last account, go to step 9. 9 Finish setting up accounts: a. Select the option to synchronize information for this account, and then click Next. b. Click Finish. 10 Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 345 » CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term Protocol Settings your email provider uses to receive email messages. Most providers use the Post Office Protocol (POP); a few use the Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). Setting up an account on your computer: Other providers WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 4 Open VersaMail account setup. Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next. Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then select Other. Click Next. Select the protocol for this account. Check with your system administrator if you do not know which protocol is used. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 346 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? Your incoming mail server is also called your POP or IMAP server; your outgoing mail server is also called your SMTP server. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 5 Enter the basic account information: a. Enter a descriptive name for the account. b. Enter your account username and password. c. Enter your email address for this account. d. Click Next. 6 7 Enter the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers for this account, whether the account requires Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (ESMTP), and, if so, the username and password required for ESMTP. Check with your email service provider for this information. [ & ] OPTIONAL Do one of the following: • To enter advanced settings for this account, click Advanced Settings. • To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My Settings. Click OK after settings have been tested. 8 Click Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 347 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 9 [ & ] OPTIONAL Set up other accounts: a. Select the option to set up another account, and then click Next. b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account you want to set up. When you have set up the last account, go to step 10. 10 Finish setting up accounts: a. Select the option to synchronize information for this account, and then click Next. b. Click Finish. 11 Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 348 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? The Desktop Connection field displays the mail client you use to download messages to your computer—for example, Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes— based on the settings VersaMail detects. If no client is detected, VersaMail displays Direct POP or Direct IMAP connection to server, depending on your account protocol. Entering advanced account settings on your computer When you set up an account, VersaMail automatically enters advanced settings such as incoming and outgoing server names, any authentication required, maximum message size, and so on. You can check the advanced settings either to verify that VersaMail entered the information you want or to change a default entry—for example, to change the maximum message size. 0 1 2 During account setup on your computer, click Advanced Settings on the Account Information screen. Click the General tab and verify or edit any of the following settings: Synchronize Local Notes (Lotus Notes accounts only) Check the box to synchronize email on your device with email in the local copy of Notes on your computer. You are prompted to enter your Lotus Notes ID and password. Click Browse if you need to locate your Notes ID. Enable HotSync synchronization By default, this box is checked, meaning you can both send and receive email wirelessly and transfer messages to your device from your computer when you synchronize. If you uncheck the box, you can send and receive email wirelessly only. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 349 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If you have a POP email account, VersaMail downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them (for example, on your desktop or on the web). Did You Know? The actual message size you can download may be smaller than 5000KB, because some message space is necessary for transferring the message over the Internet. Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont’d Unread Messages Only For IMAP accounts only, select whether to download all messages to your device, or unread messages only. By default, the box is unchecked, meaning that all messages are downloaded. For POP accounts, this box does not appear on the screen. Download Attachments Select whether to download attachments when you retrieve new messages. By default, the box is checked; if you uncheck it, only the body text of any message containing an attachment is downloaded to your device. Mail from the last X Days downloaded. Set how many days’ worth of email should be Max Message Size (KB) Enter the maximum message size that can be downloaded to your device—from 1 to 5000KB. The smaller the maximum size, the faster the download, but you must use the More button to download any messages over that size. On the other hand, choosing a larger size means that more messages can be completely downloaded automatically, but downloading takes longer. Format of Incoming Messages Select HTML or Plain Text. If you select HTML, any email messages sent as HTML are displayed on your device with basic HTML formatting intact. If you select plain text, all messages are received as plain text only, regardless of the format in which they were sent. The default is HTML. Synchronize Outbox Folder Check the box to synchronize messages in your device’s Outbox with messages on your computer during the next synchronization. If the box is unchecked, your Outbox is not included when you synchronize, so messages in your device’s Outbox are not sent. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 350 CHAPTER 18 Tip Check with your email provider or your system administrator for any incoming or outgoing mail settings you do not know. Also check to see if your account uses SSL, APOP, or ESMTP; or whether you need to change the default port number. Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont’d 3 Synchronize Inbox Folder Check the box to synchronize messages in your device’s Inbox with messages on your computer during the next synchronization. The box is checked by default; if unchecked, your Inbox is not included when you synchronize, so new messages in your computer’s Inbox are not downloaded to your device. Click the Incoming Mail tab and verify or edit any of the following settings: Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on email messages. User Name Enter the username you use to access email for this account. Password Enter your email account password. E-mail Enter the email address for this account. Incoming Server Enter the address of your incoming mail server. Mail Server Protocol Select the protocol for this account. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 351 CHAPTER 18 Tip Do not check the Secure connection box if VersaMail displays Direct POP or Direct IMAP connection to server in the Desktop Connection field. If you check the box, you cannot receive incoming messages correctly. To use SSL with your account, set up the account on your device and check the Use Secure Connection box on the appropriate screen. Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont’d Port Number By default, the port number setting is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers. You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection (see the next item). Secure connection To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection, check the box. The port number for incoming mail then changes to 995. APOP (POP accounts only) To encrypt your username and password when they travel over the network, check this box. Some services work properly only if APOP is used, while others do not work properly if APOP is used. 4 Click the Outgoing Mail tab and verify or edit any of the following settings: Outgoing Server Enter the address of your outgoing mail server. Port Number The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. Secure connection To send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection, check the box. This server requires a secure connection (SSL). Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 352 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? If you synchronize a folder, any changes you make to a folder on your device—for example, moving or deleting messages—are automatically updated on the mail server, and vice versa. Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont’d 5 Authentication Check the box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires ESMTP authentication. If you select this option, username and password fields appear. These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered. In most cases, the information displayed is correct; however, occasionally your authentication username and/or password is different from your account username or password. (IMAP accounts only) Click the Folders tab and verify or edit any of the following settings: Sent Folder Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server. Trash Folder Stores deleted email in the folder you specify on the server. Server Folder Synchronization To synchronize messages on your device with messages on a server folder, click in the Synchronize column to the right of the folder name to select Yes. 6 When you have finished entering or verifying advanced settings, click OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 353 » CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term Protocol Settings your email provider uses to receive email messages. Most providers use the Post Office Protocol (POP); a few use the Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). Setting up an account on your device Tip If your email provider appears on the Mail Service pick list, you don’t need to select a protocol. The correct protocol is automatically displayed. If you have already set up an account on your computer, you don’t need to set up the account on your device. Just do a full sync to transfer the account settings to your device. If you are setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your device to synchronize email and Calendar information on your device with the info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for setup instructions. 0 0 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 Open the Account Setup screen: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 354 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? Your incoming mail server is also called your POP or IMAP server; your outgoing mail server is also called your SMTP server. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Enter the basic account information: a. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name. b. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select your email provider. Select Other if your provider is not listed. c. If you chose Other, select the Protocol pick list, and then select POP or IMAP. d. Select Next. 4 Enter the account username and password: a. Enter the username you use to access your email. b. Select the Password box, enter your email account password, and then select OK. c. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 355 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 5 If you chose a common email provider in step 3b, this screen is already filled in. If not, enter the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers: a. Enter your email address. b. Enter the names of your mail servers. c. Select Next. 6 Do one of the following: Finish setup Select Done to finish setup and go to the Inbox of the account you set up, where you can begin getting and sending email. Set additional mail options Select Advanced to set advanced mail options. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 356 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Check with your email provider or your system administrator for any incoming or outgoing mail settings you do not know. Also check to see if your account uses SSL, APOP, or ESMTP, or whether you need to change the default port number. Setting advanced mail options on your device 0 1 Set incoming mail server options for the account: a. Select any of the following: Port Number By default, the port number setting is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers. You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection. Use Secure Connection (SSL) To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection, check the Use Secure Connection box. If you check the box, the port number for incoming mail changes to 995. Use Authentication (APOP) (POP accounts only) Encrypts your username and password when they travel over the network. Some services do not work properly without APOP, while others do not work properly if APOP is used. b. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 357 CHAPTER 18 Tip If you need to enter new authentication information, enter your username, select the Password box, enter a password, and then select OK. Check with your email service provider for authentication username and password information. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Set outgoing mail options: a. Select any of the following: Port Number The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. Use Secure Connection (SSL) Check the box to send outgoing mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection. Use authentication (ESMTP) Check the box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires ESMTP authentication. If you select this option, username and password fields appear. These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered. In most cases, the information displayed is correct; however, occasionally your authentication username and/or password is different from your account username or password. b. Select Done. Done Testing your new account After you finish setting up a new email account, the Inbox of the account you just created is displayed. You can test whether the email account is set up and working properly by getting messages. LifeDrive from palmOne 358 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can also edit an account by selecting Start in the lower-left corner of your computer screen, selecting Programs, navigating to palmOne, and then selecting VersaMail Setup. Select the username associated with the account, click the Edit an existing account button, and then click Next. Edit the information on the account information screens. Editing an account As with setup, you can edit an account either on your computer or on your device. Editing an account on your computer WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Select the account to edit: a. Select HotSync® Manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen. b. Select Custom, and then select VersaMail. c. Click Change, and then select the name of the account to edit in the pane on the left of the screen. 2 Select one of the following: Delete Account Click the button and click to confirm the deletion. Edit Account screens. Click the button and edit the account settings on the following Advanced Click the button and edit the advanced account settings on the following screens. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 359 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Editing an account on your device 0 1 Select the account you want to edit: a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select the name of the account to edit, and then select Edit. 2 The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an account. Go through the screens by selecting Next, and change the entries you want to edit on the appropriate screens. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 360 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip On a Windows computer, do a full sync to free up the memory associated with an account after you delete it. Deleting an account When you delete an account in the VersaMail application, the account is removed from your device. The account still exists on the server, however. For example, deleting your Yahoo! account from the VersaMail application deletes the account only from your device. Your email account still exists at Yahoo.com. You can delete all but one of your email accounts; you must have at least one account. Tip You can also delete an account on a Windows computer by selecting HotSync Manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, selecting Custom, selecting VersaMail, and then selecting Change. Select the account you want, and then click Delete Account. 0 1 Select the account you want to delete: a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select the name of the account that you want to delete, and then select Delete. 2 Delete the account: a. Select Yes in the Delete Account dialog box to delete the account and all associated email messages. b. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 361 » CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Key Term ESMTP Acronym for Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A method for authenticating outgoing email messages. Adding ESMTP to an account Tip If you need to enter new authentication information, enter your username, select the Password box, enter a password, and then select OK. Check with your email service provider for authentication username and password information. Some services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and password on an SMTP server. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web email provider supports ESMTP, check with your email provider. 0 1 Select the account to which you want to add ESMTP: a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select the name of the account, and then select Edit. 2 The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an account. Go through the screens by selecting Next, and check the Authentication box on the advanced outgoing mail options screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 362 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip To get and view messages for a different account, open the Accounts menu and select the account you want. Select the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then select Inbox to display messages in the Inbox. Getting and reading messages Tip For IMAP accounts, you have the option of wirelessly synchronizing mail folders if the Get Mail Options dialog box is displayed. When you get messages, you can choose to see only the subjects of your email (which include message size, sender, and subject), so that you can decide if you want to download the entire message. Or you can choose to get the entire message for all of your incoming email. NOTE See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for special considerations when using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information on your device with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 [ & ] OPTIONAL 3 . If you are using a VPN connection, connect to your VPN. Choose whether to get message subjects only or full messages: a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select the account you want. c. Select Get or Get & Send. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 363 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL If you have selected Ask Every Time in VersaMail Preferences, select whether to download subjects only or entire messages. Done A list of your messages appears in the Inbox. Auto Sync with notification NOTE Some email service providers, such as CompuServe and AOL, do not support the Auto Sync feature. Check with your provider to see if Auto Sync is supported. You can set up VersaMail to automatically download new email messages to your device with the Auto Sync feature. If Auto Sync downloads any new messages, your device lets you know with a sound or vibration. A list with the number of new messages retrieved appears on the Reminders screen. The Auto Sync feature downloads only the first 3KB of each message. You can select the More button on the message screen to download the entire message. Auto Sync recognizes any filter criteria you set up for downloading messages. Messages that don’t meet these filter criteria are not downloaded during Auto Sync. You need to turn off all filters and manually retrieve these messages. NOTE See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for special considerations when using Auto Sync with a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. LifeDrive from palmOne 364 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? If more than one scheduled Auto Sync happens at the same time (for example, for two separate email accounts), Auto Sync performs any past-due Auto Sync first, and then performs current Auto Sync retrievals according to the order of email accounts in the Accounts menu list. Scheduling Auto Sync You can set up different schedules for each of your email accounts, but you can set up only one schedule for each account. For example, if you set up a schedule to get mail on weekdays for your Yahoo! account, you can’t set up a separate schedule for weekends for that account. Auto Sync may not work with your specific VPN connection. It also doesn’t work if your security preferences include encrypting databases on the device. 0 1 Select Auto Sync for a given account: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Auto Sync, and then check the Sync automatically box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 365 CHAPTER 18 Tip Be sure to manually retrieve any messages using Get or Get & Send after setting up a scheduled Auto Sync. Then only new messages are retrieved during Auto Sync. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Set schedule options: Interval Select the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 5 minutes to 12 hours. Note that if you set a more frequent interval, you may need to recharge your device’s battery more often. Start/End Time Select the Start and End Time boxes, and then select the hour, the minute, and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to take place. Select OK. Days Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any number of days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email account. 3 Select OK. 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL Select Get or Get & Send. Done Auto Sync notifications The Auto Sync feature provides two types of notifications during and after it gets messages: Alerts You can choose to have your device alert you with a beep or other sound when a new message arrives in your account. LifeDrive from palmOne 366 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? Any custom sound you install on your device appears on the Alert Sound pick list. Reminders screen If Auto Sync discovers and downloads new messages for an email account, a notification appears on the Reminders screen, telling you the account name and the number of new messages. If Auto Sync is scheduled for more than one account, a separate notification appears for each account. Setting alert options Tip You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound. You can choose an alert—such as a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you know when new email arrives. 0 1 Open the Alerts screen: a. From the Inbox or another folder, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Auto Sync, and then select Alerts. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 367 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? If you are viewing the Inbox and an Auto Sync downloads new messages, those messages do not appear on the Reminders screen, because you can already view them in the Inbox. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Select alert options: a. Check the Alert me of new mail box. b. Select the Alert Sound pick list, and then select a sound. The device plays a brief demo of the sound. c. To receive alerts of successful Auto Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of failures box. Leave the box checked if you want to receive alerts for both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals. d. Select OK. Done Viewing and using the Reminders screen The Reminders screen on your device shows info about new email messages. It also shows alerts from other applications, such as Calendar appointments. To view the Reminders screen, tap Alert on the status bar when it is blinking. You can do any of the following: • Check the box to clear a reminder from the list. • Select the reminder (either the mail icon or the text description) to go to the Inbox of that account or to read a detailed error message. LifeDrive from palmOne 368 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If the Reminders screen shows an Auto Sync error message for an account, select the message to view more detailed information about the error. You can choose to disable notifications for Auto Sync failures. • Select Done to close the Reminders screen and return to whatever you were doing on your device before the Reminders screen appeared. • Select Clear All to delete all reminders on the Reminders screen. When a notification appears on the Reminders screen, select it to go to the Inbox of that account, or open the VersaMail application and go to that account. Once you open the Inbox, any new messages are removed from the Reminders screen, even if you don’t open them. Auto Sync then starts at the next scheduled interval, with the Reminders screen counter reset to 1. Auto Sync retries If the interval for a scheduled Auto Sync is set at “Every 1 hour” or less frequently, and an Auto Sync fails for any reason, the VersaMail application tries to retrieve email every 30 minutes until either the next scheduled Auto Sync occurs or the end time for scheduled email retrieval is reached. If the interval is set for more frequently than “Every 1 hour,” the VersaMail application waits until the next scheduled Auto Sync. Resource issues with Auto Sync The Auto Sync feature can cause the following resource constraints: Decreased battery life If you set the Auto Sync interval for more often than once per hour, your device’s battery charge may drain more quickly, and you may need to recharge the battery more frequently. Increased monthly charges Some wireless providers charge a fee for data transactions. If you use one of these providers, using the Auto Sync feature can substantially add to your monthly charges. This is especially true for POP accounts, because POP messages take longer to download than IMAP messages. LifeDrive from palmOne 369 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Inbox icons in the VersaMail application The icons to the left of a message in the Inbox tell you the message’s status. Only the subject header information is downloaded. Part or all of the message text is downloaded. Part or all of the message text and attachment information is downloaded. Downloaded message has been marked high priority by the sender. Setting preferences for getting messages 0 1 Open the Delivery Options preferences: a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Delivery Options. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 370 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If you have a POP email account, the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them (for example, on your desktop or on the web). Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Select preferences: Get Select whether to get message subjects only or entire messages. Ask Every Time Check to display a dialog box for choosing subjects only or entire messages each time you retrieve email. Leave unchecked to retrieve messages according to the option you select in the Get pick list. Get only Unread messages (IMAP account only) Check the box to download only unread mail to your device. If you don’t select this option and you select Get & Send, all of your messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you have already read. NOTE For POP accounts, the Unread messages box does not appear on the Delivery Options screen. Mail from last X days specify (default is 7). Get messages sent within the number of days you Download attachments Check the box to automatically download files attached to email messages to your device. Attachments that exceed the maximum message size cannot be downloaded. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 371 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? Basic HTML includes bold, italics (small font only), colored words, bulleted and numbered lists, and so on. In an HTML message, certain types of graphics (for example, JPEG or GIF files) may be displayed as a URL in the body of the email message. In some cases, you can select the URL to open the graphic. Tip Because downloading large messages can consume device resources, the VersaMail application displays the size of the message and asks if you want to continue downloading any message that exceeds your maximum message size, up to a total size of 5MB. LifeDrive from palmOne Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont’d Maximum message size Enter the maximum size of an incoming email message in kilobytes (KB). The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default, but you can enter any size up to 5000KB (approximately 5 megabytes, or 5MB), including attachments. The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments. Message Format Select to retrieve messages in HTML or plain text format. If you select HTML, any messages sent to you in HTML format are displayed with basic HTML formatting intact. Other messages are displayed as plain text. If you select Plain Text, all messages are displayed as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were sent. The default setting is HTML. NOTE The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, with all HTML tags stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML. Done 372 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you use the 5-way navigator to select and open a message, press Center after reading the message to close it and return to the folder where you started. Reading email messages Tip Highlight a message and press Right on the 5-way to open a menu of message commands such as Forward, Reply, and Delete. Tip Change the font size of a message you are reading by opening the Options menu and selecting Use smaller font or Use standard font. To read email, select the email message in the Inbox or the folder where the message is located. Select to read on the message screen If you chose to get messages by subjects only, select the More button to view the body of the email message, plus any attachments, up to the maximum message size you select. If the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only a partial message is displayed. Select the More button to view the entire message. If you chose to get entire messages, the body of the message is displayed. However, if the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only part of the message is displayed. Select the More button to view the entire message. Tip Use landscape mode to see more of the message on a single screen. Select More to view the entire message LifeDrive from palmOne 373 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can also update an existing Contacts record with a new email address, or create a second Contacts record for a name that has an existing record. The procedure is the same as for adding a new Contacts record. If you select Add to Contacts from an email message and a record already exists for the recipient name, you are prompted either to update the email address for the recipient or to create a new record for the recipient. Adding or updating a contact directly from a message You can add an email address to Contacts directly from the body of a received email message. 0 1 Open the Add Contact dialog box: a. Open the message you want. b. On the message screen, open the menus. c. Select Options, and then select Add to Contacts. 2 [ & ] OPTIONAL If a display name exists for this Contacts record, the dialog box displays the name in the Last name and First name fields. If the Last name and First name fields are blank, enter the first and last name associated with the “From” email address. 3 Select OK to add the email address to Contacts, and then select OK in the confirmation dialog box. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 374 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip To mark an outgoing message as high priority, on the message screen, open the Options menu and select Set Priority To High. Sending an email message Did You Know? You can set up your device to automatically try resending any messages that are not sent correctly the first time. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 Open a new message: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, select the account you want, and then select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 375 CHAPTER 18 Tip You can’t see the whole list of addresses in a field if the list is longer than two lines. To see the whole list, select the word To, cc, or bcc. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Address and compose your message: a. Enter the recipient’s email address. b. In the Subject field, enter the subject of your email. c. In the area below the Subject line, enter the text of your email. 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL 5 Select one of the following options to send your message: Attach one or more files to send with your message. Send Sends the email immediately. If the message is not sent successfully on the first attempt, it is moved to the Outbox. Outbox Stores email so you can compose email offline and then send it all during one connection with the server. To send your email, select Get & Send. Drafts Saves your message so you can work on it at another time. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 376 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can also type the first initial and last name of the person you want. Smart Addressing displays any entries matching the initial and last name. Entering an address using Smart Addressing Tip Tap the email header icon in the upper-right corner of the screen to display the cc: and bcc: fields. Smart Addressing completes a recognized email address. 0 1 2 3 On the New Message screen, navigate to or tap in the To field. Start entering the person’s name. Smart Addressing displays matching names and email addresses from Contacts. Email header When the name you want appears, select it to enter it on the To line. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 377 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? When you put addresses in the copies (cc:) field, they are visible to all other recipients. Addresses in the blind copies (bcc:) field are hidden from all other recipients. Entering an address directly in the To field Tip As with Smart Addressing, when you begin to enter a name or address on the Recipient List screen, VersaMail displays any matching entries from Contacts. Select a match to automatically enter it in the Recipient List. Tip It’s OK to enter commas instead of semicolons between addresses, because they’re changed to semicolons. But you can’t use other punctuation or no punctuation between addresses. LifeDrive from palmOne 0 1 2 On the New Message screen, select or navigate to the To field. Enter an address using one of the following methods: To field Enter the address, and then select Done. For multiple addresses, enter a semicolon (;) and then a space between recipient names. Recipient List Select To and enter the name or address on the Recipient List screen, and then select Done. Use the shortcut buttons at the bottom of the screen for quick address entry. For multiple recipients, enter a semicolon (;) and then a space between recipient names. Done 378 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Entering an address using Contacts You can enter a recipient’s address by using the Lookup screen to select the address. The names and addresses on the Lookup screen come from Contacts. 0 1 Open the Lookup screen: a. On the New Message screen, select the word To. b. On the Recipient List screen, select Lookup. 2 Enter the address: a. On the Address Lookup screen, select the address you want, and then select Add. b. Select Lookup and repeat step “a” for each address you want to add. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 379 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Attaching a personal signature You can attach a personal signature, with info like your company's address and telephone number, to the bottom of all messages you send. 0 1 Open the VersaMail Preferences: a. From the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Signature. 2 Add a signature: a. Check the Attach Signature box. b. Enter your signature information, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 380 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? Send retry doesn’t work for VPN connections, or for accounts for which your ISP requires you to log in to the mail server before sending mail. It also doesn’t work if you have configured the security preferences on your device to encrypt databases on the device. Send retry Tip Select the notification to view a detailed error message. Viewing the error message deletes the notification from the Reminders screen. If a send attempt fails for any reason after you select Send (for example, your device is out of range, or the application cannot connect to the mail server), you can choose to have the application move the message to the Outbox and keep trying to send the message every 30 minutes, a maximum of three times. If you put a message in the Outbox, you must select Send to send the message on the first try. The VersaMail application attempts automatic send retry only after the first send attempt fails. Keep in mind the following regarding automatic send retry: • Automatic send retry occurs only if you select Send to send the message manually. It doesn’t work if you select Get & Send. • To select automatic send retry, select Yes in the dialog box notifying you that manual send has failed. • If automatic send retry succeeds, the message is moved to the Sent folder. • If automatic send retry fails after the third try, you must send the message manually. Send retry notifications If automatic send retry fails after the third try, a notification appears on the Reminders screen. Send retry notification features include the following: • A broken envelope icon shows that automatic send retry has failed. A separate notification appears for each email account. • You can choose to disable notifications for send retry failures. • The Reminders screen shows only the most recent notification for an email account, no matter how many automatic send retries have been attempted for that account. LifeDrive from palmOne 381 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you perform a soft reset or synchronize during a send retry, the retry is canceled. You must manually send any messages in the Outbox. Modifying messages in the Outbox A message in the Outbox waiting for the next automatic send retry can be edited, moved, or deleted. However, if you edit the message, you must manually send the message. If the manual send fails, you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send retry. During automatic send retry, any message that the VersaMail application is trying to send is in a locked state. You cannot edit, move, or delete these messages. If you try to modify a message in the locked state, an error message appears. If a send retry fails after the third try, the message is stored in the Outbox in the error state. You can send the message again manually, or edit, move, or delete the message. However, if you edit the message, you must send the message manually. If the manual send fails, you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send retry. Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications The icons to the left of a message in the Outbox show the message’s status. Message is waiting either to be manually sent or to be sent during the next send retry. You can edit, move, or delete a message in this state. Send retry is currently in process; you cannot edit, move, or delete a message in this state. Third automatic send retry has failed. You must manually send a message in this state by selecting Get & Send. LifeDrive from palmOne 382 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with email folders By default, the VersaMail application displays the messages in an account’s Inbox folder. You can easily view the messages in a different folder. You can also customize the appearance of the message list in your email folders, move messages between folders, and create and edit folders. Viewing another folder 0 1 2 On a folder screen, select the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen. Select the folder you want to view. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 383 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? The customization options you choose apply to all email folders, not just the one you are in. Customizing the appearance of the message list You can change display options on the message list, as well as the size of columns in the list. NOTE Changing column size is available for one-line message view only. 0 Tip Select Sort on the message list to quickly sort the list by date, subject, or sender. 1 In the Inbox or on another folder screen, select Display. 2 Customize any of the following: Sort by Select the Sort by pick list, and then select the column name. Default is Date. Sort order Select Descend or Ascend. Default is Descend. One- or two-line column view Select the Show pick list, and then select 1 line or 2 line view. Default is 2 line. Columns shown Check the box under the Show pick list for each column you want to show. The column options change depending on whether you choose a one-line or a two-line view. Defaults are Sender, Date, and Subject. Font Select the Font field. Select each pick list in the Select Font dialog box (Font, Size, Style) and select the option you want. Default is Palm 9 Plain. Unread and read message color Select the Read and Unread pick lists, and then select the color you want for each type of message. Default is black. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 384 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 4 Select OK. If you selected 1 line view in step 2, change the size of columns in the message list: a. Tap on the column divider. Column divider b. Drag the column divider to change the width of the column. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 385 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can use the 5-way to move a single message. Select the message you want to move, press Right to open the Message menu, and then select Move To. Then select the folder you want from the folders list. Moving messages between folders Tip You can also open the menus, select Message, and then select Move To. LifeDrive from palmOne You can move one or more email messages between folders. 0 1 In the Inbox or on another folder screen, select the folder pick list in the upper-right corner and select the folder containing the message(s) you want to move. Continued 386 CHAPTER 18 Tip To select a group of adjacent messages, drag the stylus to the left of the message icons. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Move a single message: a. Tap the envelope icon to the left of the message you want to move, and then select Move To from the list. b. From the folders list, select the destination folder you want. 3 Move multiple messages: a. Tap to the left of the icon for each message you want to move. A checkmark appears next to each selected message. b. Tap a message icon next to a selected message, and then select Move To from the list. c. From the folders list, select the destination folder you want. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 387 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Creating and editing mail folders The VersaMail application has certain preset folders, such as Inbox, Outbox, Sent, Drafts, and Trash. You can create new folders so that you can store email messages by subject, person, or project. 0 1 2 In the Inbox or on another folder screen, select the folder pick list in the upperright corner, and then select Edit Folders. Do one of the following: Create a new folder Select New, and then enter the new folder name. Rename a folder Select the folder name from the list on the screen, select Rename, and then enter the new folder name. Delete a folder Select the folder name from the list on the screen, and then select Delete. NOTE For IMAP accounts only, check the box if you want the change (create, rename, or delete) to take place on the server as well as on your device. 3 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 388 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? You can forward email messages from any folder other than the Outbox folder. Working with email messages Did You Know? Forwarded messages are always sent as text only, even if you received the original message in HTML format. When you receive an email message, you can reply to it or forward it to someone else. You can also open web addresses (URLs) within messages. Forwarding an email message 0 1 2 On a folder screen, select the folder pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select the folder that contains the message you want to forward. Select the message you want to forward: a. Select the email message to open it. b. Select Fwd (Forward). Select Fwd 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL 4 Address and send the message. Add any desired text to the message beneath the subject line. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 389 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? Replies are always sent as text only, even if you received the original message in HTML format. Replying to an email message Tip On the message screen, you can also select Reply from the Options menu. Tip To reply to a message from the message list, tap the envelope icon next to the message you want, and then select Reply from the list. Or open the Options menu and select Reply. You can reply to an email message as you are reading it, or you can reply to messages in the message list. 0 1 Select the message you want to reply to. 2 Create the reply: a. Select Reply. b. Select whether to reply to the sender only or to all message recipients listed in the menu. c. Enter a reply. 3 Select Send to send the reply now, Outbox to send it later, or Drafts to work on it later. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 390 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting reply preferences You can set reply preferences, including whether to include the original message text in a reply, as well as the name and email address to show on your reply. The preferences you set apply to all reply messages you send. 0 1 Open Reply Options preferences: a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Reply Options. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 391 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Set the preferences you want: Message text Select whether to include original message text with a reply. Your name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages, such as “Joe Smith.” Reply to Address with Enter the email address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your email messages, only if this is different from the email address from which you are sending the message. For example, if you are sending a message from me@yahoo.com but you want recipients to reply to me@earthlink.net, enter the reply-to address here. A reply-to address makes it look as though the email came from the address you entered. BCC Check the BCC box to send a blind copy of any email message you send to another email address. The blind copy email address is not seen by the other recipients of the message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from your device to be sent to your corporate email account, enter that email address. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 392 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip URLs, email addresses, and phone numbers in HTML messages appear as blue underlined text. In text messages, most URLs begin with “http://” or “www.” To view a page or file associated with a URL that does not begin with “http://” or “www,” select the URL, copy it, and paste it into the address bar in the web browser. Working with URLs, email addresses, and phone numbers in a message Tip To receive an alert confirming that you want to delete a message, open the Preferences menu, select Deletion, and check the Confirm deletions box. In email messages you receive, you can do the following: • Select a URL to view the web page or file associated with the URL. Selecting the URL opens the web browser on your device so that you can view the page or file. • Select an email address to open a new message screen with the address in the To field. • Select a phone number to dial that number. Deleting a message You can delete email messages from any folder. For example, you can delete old messages in the Inbox or messages that you were working on in the Drafts folder. When you delete a message, it is placed in the Trash folder. 0 1 2 On a folder screen, select the folders pick list, and then select the folder that contains the message you want to delete. Select the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete. To select adjacent messages, drag the stylus across the bullet to the left of each message. Lift the stylus and drag again to select additional adjacent messages. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 393 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can also select the message icon next to a message and select Delete in the menu to delete a message. Tip To delete messages on the server when you empty the trash on your device, select the Delete Msgs on Server setting in VersaMail Preferences. Many email providers have size restrictions for mail storage. If your mailbox on the server becomes full, messages are returned to the senders. 3 Delete the message or messages: a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete in the Message menu. c. Select Also delete message(s) on server if you want to delete the messages from the server now. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you delete a message from the server, you cannot retrieve it and view it again later. d. Select OK. Done Deleting old messages 0 1 Open the Delete Old Messages dialog box: a. On a folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Delete Old on the Message menu. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 394 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? Messages you delete from a folder are moved to the Trash folder and remain there until you empty the trash. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Choose settings for deleting old messages: a. Select the Folder pick list, and then select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete. b. Select the Older than pick list, and then select One Week, One Month, or Choose Date. If you select Choose Date, select a date from the calendar. 3 Delete messages: a. Select Delete. b. Select Also delete message(s) on server if you want to delete the messages from the server now. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you delete a message from the server, you cannot retrieve it and view it again later. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 395 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip You can set a preference to automatically empty the trash. Emptying the trash Did You Know? Many email providers, such as Yahoo!, have size restrictions for mail storage. If your mailbox on the server becomes full, messages are returned to the senders. When you delete a message, it is moved to the Trash folder. Deleted email accumulates in the Trash folder and takes up space on your device. To increase memory, you should empty the trash regularly. 0 1 Open the Empty Trash dialog box: a. On a folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Empty Trash on the Message menu. NOTE If you select to automatically empty the trash, a message asks if you want to delete the trash. 2 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL Select Details to see how many messages are in the trash and whether the messages are set to be deleted from the server. Select one of the following options for emptying the trash: To delete messages from your device as well as from the server Select Yes if you want to update the server now. To delete the message from only your device now Select Both. Select Device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 396 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? By default, trash is set to be emptied automatically, and the time interval is set at Older Than 1 Day. Setting the trash to be emptied automatically 0 1 Open the Deletion preferences: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Deletion. 2 Select the settings for automatically emptying the trash: a. Check the Auto-Empty Mail from Trash box if it is not checked. b. Select the pick list, and then select one of the following: • Select Immediately if you want the trash emptied automatically each time you delete messages. • Select a time period if you want messages emptied from the trash periodically. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 397 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? In one-line view, read messages appear in plain text in the message list; unread messages appear in bold text. Marking messages as read or unread Did You Know? POP mail servers do not support the read or unread message feature. For POP accounts, messages that you mark appear in plain or bold text on your device, but the difference is not recognized on the server. When you select a message to read it, it is automatically marked as read. You can also manually mark messages as read or unread. 0 1 Select the message or messages to mark: a. In the Inbox or on another folders screen, select the folders pick list, and then select the folder containing the message you want to mark. b. Select the icon next to the message you want to mark. To mark multiple messages, select the bullets next to the messages you want to mark. 2 Do one of the following to mark the message or messages: Single message Select Mark Read or Mark Unread from the list. Multiple messages Open the menus, select Message, and then select Mark Read or Mark Unread. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 398 CHAPTER 18 Tip Selecting Both and then OK also processes any other pending actions on the server, such as deleting messages in the Trash folder. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 For IMAP accounts only, select one of the following: To mark the messages as read or unread on your device only Select Device. To mark the messages on both your device and the server and have the messages marked on the server immediately on the confirmation screen. Select Both, and then select OK To mark the messages on both the device and the server and have the messages marked on the server the next time you synchronize or connect to the server Select Both, and then select Cancel on the confirmation screen. Done Working with attachments Email may contain attached files, such as Microsoft Word documents, photos, or videos, that you want to save, view, or install on your device. When you receive a message that has an attachment, the VersaMail application scans your device to see if you have an application that can open the attachment. Attachment file types you can download and open include photos and videos; Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files; HTML pages; text files; and information from applications on your device such as Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks. You can also work with attached Palm OS® applications and related files (PRC and PDB files), as well as compressed ZIP files that contain other files. LifeDrive from palmOne 399 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If an attachment is not downloaded, the paper clip does not appear on the envelope icon. You need to open the message and download the complete message to see if there are any attachments. For other types of files, your device may contain a viewer that can open and view attachments for that file type. You can open the attachment only if your device has such a viewer. Among the file types that may be supported are MP3 and AAC files. Did You Know? You can download a maximum of ten attachments for any received messages. Working with a downloaded attachment In the message list, a paper clip on a message’s envelope icon indicates that the message has an attachment that has been downloaded. You can save an attached file or view, edit, or install the file, depending on the file type. 0 1 In the Inbox, select the message with the attachment. Paper clip 2 [ & ] OPTIONAL If you choose to get messages by subject only, or if you choose to get entire messages but the message plus any attachments exceeds your maximum message size, select More to view the body of the email message plus any attachments. If prompted, select Yes if you want to download an attachment that exceeds your maximum message size. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 400 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? Because downloading large messages can consume device resources, the VersaMail application displays the size and asks if you want to continue downloading any message that exceeds your maximum message size, up to a total size of 5MB. Tip Downloaded attachments are automatically saved to the VersaMail Attachments folder on the hard drive. Select Save if you want to also save the attachment to a specific location on the drive or to an expansion card. Tip Tap and hold the stylus on the line above the attachment name and drag the line up to view more downloaded attachments. LifeDrive from palmOne Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Select the attachment you want from the list at the bottom of the screen, and then do one of the following: To open the attachment in the default viewer Tap the attachment name. To open the attachment menu Tap the folder icon to the left of the attachment name. 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL If you open the attachment menu, select Save to card to save the attachment to the hard drive or to an expansion card, or do one of the following, depending on the attachment file type: Viewable file: text, Word document, task, HTML, graphic, and so on Select View to view the attachment, or select Select Viewer to choose a viewer for that attachment. For example, if you have two photo-viewing applications on your device and you select a photo attachment from the list, you can select which application to use to view the photo. Continued 401 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont’d Palm OS application or database file (PRC or PDB) installed automatically. Select View. The file is Compressed Zip file Select Unzip. The file decompresses, and the files it contains are listed. Select the name of the file you want, and then select Save, View, or Install. 5 When you finish with the attachment, do one of the following: Done button appears on screen Select Done. This returns you to the list of attachments, where you can select another attachment. No Done button appears Go to Favorites and select VersaMail to the Inbox of the account you were viewing. to return Done LifeDrive from palmOne 402 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? Attachments must be fully downloaded before they appear in the VersaMail Attachments folder. This may take a few minutes for large attachments. Saving attachments Downloaded attachments are saved automatically to a default location on your device’s hard drive; in addition, you can manually save them to a location you choose. NOTE You cannot create any subfolders in the VersaMail Attachments folder. You can manually save attachments to any other folder or subfolder on the hard drive. Automatic By default, whenever an attachment is downloaded, it is saved in the VersaMail Attachments folder on your drive. The email message containing the attachment is saved in your device’s program memory; only the attachment is saved on the drive. Items in the VersaMail Attachments folder remain linked to the message to which they were attached. For example, if you delete the message in VersaMail, the attachment is deleted from the folder. Or, if the message is automatically deleted after a certain number of days, the attachment is deleted from the folder at that time. You can view and work with attachments in the VersaMail Attachments folder in the same way that you can view and work with any other file on your drive. Use Files to open, edit, or move the attachment, or use LifeDrive™ Manager to copy the attachment to your computer or to identify it as a sync item. NOTE If you edit an attachment in the VersaMail Attachments folder, you are prompted to save the attachment to a different location on the drive so that the original attachment stays unchanged. Manual When an attachment is downloaded, you can choose to save the attachment to a location you specify on your drive or to an expansion card. If you choose this option, the attachment is saved both in the VersaMail Attachments folder and to the selected location, where you can work with it as you do with any other file on the drive or on an expansion card. Attachments you manually save are no longer linked to the original message. If you delete the message in VersaMail, the attachment remains on the drive or on the card. LifeDrive from palmOne 403 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip If you open a message from the Drafts folder, you must first select Edit before you can add an attachment. Attaching files to outgoing messages Did You Know? You can attach a file to forwarded messages and replies as well as to messages you create. Tip You can attach files from any location on the hard drive or from an expansion card inserted into your device’s expansion card slot. LifeDrive from palmOne You can attach files on your device to email messages you send. For example, you can attach photos or videos; Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files; and entries from Contacts, Calendar, Memos, and Tasks. The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments. The maximum number of attachments for any email message is ten, regardless of the attachments’ total size. 0 1 On the New Message screen, tap the red paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. Tap here Continued 404 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? If you select Files on Card, the VersaMail application displays all file types on the card. You can select a particular file type, or select All Files to view all files on the card. 2 Attach the file: a. Select the Type pick list, and then select the file type. The VersaMail application displays all file types on your device that you can attach to an email message. Or select to browse files on your device’s hard drive or on an expansion card. Tip To remove an attachment from an email message, select the attached file in the Attachments box, and then select Delete. b. Select the file that you want to attach, select Add or Attach, and then select Done. For photos and videos, check the box next to the items you want, and then select Done. NOTE For some file types—for example, addresses or memos—the files to attach appear in the box at the top of the Attachments screen. For others—for example, Word or Excel files—a new screen appears from which you can select the file to attach. c. Repeat steps a and b for each attachment you want to add, and then select Done. Done 0 LifeDrive from palmOne 405 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Advanced VersaMail application features You can customize and optimize your experience using the VersaMail application in any of the following ways: • Creating and using filters to determine the types of email messages that are downloaded to your device • Managing settings for incoming and outgoing mail • Adding APOP to an account • Setting advanced account preferences • Changing email header details • Backing up mail databases • Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly • Working with root folders • Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Creating and using filters Filters provide efficient ways to manage email retrieval and storage. When you select Get or Get & Send, filters determine which email messages are downloaded to your device and in which folder the downloaded messages are stored. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you create a filter, only messages that meet the filter criteria are downloaded to your device. You don’t see any other messages that have been sent to you, even in your Inbox. To avoid this, you must set up two filters. For example, suppose you create a filter to have all messages with “onlinebroker” in the From field moved to your Finance folder. You must then create a second filter specifying that all mail not containing “onlinebroker” in the From field should be moved to the Inbox (or other folder you designate). If you don’t create this second filter, only messages containing “onlinebroker” in the From field are downloaded to your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 406 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 0 Tip Use filters to organize your incoming messages. For example, create a filter so that whenever you receive email about sales meetings, it goes immediately into a folder you create called Sales. Or create a filter so that stock quotes sent to you by your online brokerage service go to a folder you create called Finance. 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 Open the Filters dialog box: . a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Filters. d. Select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 407 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? Filters you create on your device also apply when you synchronize email on your device with email on your computer. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Enter the filter information: a. Enter a short description of the filter in the Name field. b. Enter filter criteria: To pick list Select the message header field with the information contained in the edit line: To, From, Subject, cc, Size. For example, you might select From to download only messages from a particular sender. Contains pick list Contain. Select a filter action: Contains, Starts with, Does NOT Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field. For example, if you want to sort email with the subject Sales, enter “Sales.” If you enter more than one criteria, separate each with a comma—for example, Sales, New York. Then get mail and move to pick list Select the folder or mailbox into which you want your filtered email to go. You can also create a new folder for storing the incoming email. Select Edit Folders, and then create a new folder or delete or rename existing ones. c. Select OK. The filter appears in the Filters list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 408 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Filters that are turned on execute in the order in which they appear on the Filters list. To ensure that filters execute in the correct order, move them up and down the list by selecting the pick list to the left of the filter name. Turning filters on and off A filter that is turned on applies to all subsequent downloads of email until you deselect it. More than one filter can be in effect at once. Before you download email, be sure to turn on the filters you want and turn off those you don’t want. 0 1 Open the Filters dialog box: a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Filters. The Filters dialog box appears with the filters you created. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 409 CHAPTER 18 Tip If you don’t want a filter to apply to any downloads at all, be sure to deselect the filter under both Connected and Synchronize. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Turn filters on or off: a. Select the pick list in the upper-left corner and select one of the following: Connected Applies a filter to messages downloaded to your handheld over a network connection. Synchronize Applies a filter to messages downloaded to your handheld when you synchronize. b. Check or uncheck the filter boxes to select the filters you do and don’t want to use for subsequent email transactions. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 410 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Edit a filter to change either its name or any of its criteria. Editing or deleting a filter 0 1 Select the filter to edit or delete: a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Filters, and then select the name of the filter. 2 Do one of the following: Edit Revise your entry in the Name field, your selections in the pick lists, or the text in the edit line. Select OK. Delete 3 Select Delete, select Yes to confirm the deletion, and then select OK. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 411 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Any connection preferences you set are account-specific; they apply only to the account you are currently in. Setting connection preferences Did You Know? The default Timeout setting is 45 seconds. It can be any number greater than 0 seconds; however, if you set the number too low, your connection attempt may time out before you make a connection with the email service provider. 0 1 Open the Connection Preferences screen: a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Connection. 2 Select any of the following preferences: Timeout Sets the number of seconds to try to connect before timing out. To change the timeout period, select the Timeout field and enter a new value. Auto-disconnect Automatically disconnects your remote connections after each command. Each command you perform initiates a new call to your ISP. This setting is not recommended if you plan to perform multiple email transactions in a short amount of time. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 412 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Cont’d Disconnect on Exit Disconnects from the network only after you leave VersaMail. This feature is an alternative to Auto-disconnect. This option keeps your connection active while you perform multiple transactions in the VersaMail application, but automatically disconnects when you move on to a different application on your device. If this option is not selected, you must manually disconnect from your ISP. Modem wait Displays the number of seconds that the modem takes to initialize itself. If you have a modem, select and enter a number of seconds for the wait. The typical setting for a wireless modem is 3, and the typical setting for most normal modems is 0. Done Setting server preferences Server preferences differ for POP and IMAP email accounts. 0 1 Open the Server Preferences screen: a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Server. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 413 CHAPTER 18 Tip Any server preferences you set are accountspecific; they apply only to the account you are currently viewing. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Select any of the following preferences: Leave mail on server (POP accounts only) To get email on your device but leave it on the server so you can view it later on your computer, check the Leave mail on server box. Root Folders (IMAP accounts only) Defines the root folder on your IMAP server. Deleted Mail (IMAP accounts only) specify on the server. Sent Mail (IMAP accounts only) the server. Stores deleted email in the folder you Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on Delete mail on the server Check this box to delete messages on your provider’s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 414 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Changing email header details When viewing a message in any folder, you can change the view of the message header. The email header options are as follows: Short header Shows sender’s name or address (From field) and subject line (Subj field). Select icon to switch to full header Full header • • • • • Shows the following: Sender’s name or email address (From field) Subject line (Subj field) Date message was composed, sent, or received (Date field) Size of message including any attachments (Size field) Recipient’s name or email address (To field) Select icon to switch to short header LifeDrive from palmOne 415 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are composing. Short header shows the To and Subject fields only; full header shows the To, cc:, bcc:, and Subject fields. Select to switch to full header Select to switch to short header To switch between short and full headers on either a folder screen or a message screen, select the header icon in the upper-right corner of the screen. Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly If you create an IMAP folder in an account on your device that matches a folder on the mail server, you can wirelessly synchronize email messages that you move into or out of the IMAP folder or that you delete in the folder with messages on your device. When you synchronize a folder with your device, any email messages in the selected folder on the mail server are downloaded to the same folder on your device. Any messages moved out of the selected folder on your device or deleted on your device are moved or deleted in the folder on the mail server. LifeDrive from palmOne 416 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? You can synchronize folders whose names are up to 16 characters in length. You can synchronize up to 11 custom folders you create, in addition to the default folders Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, Sent, and Trash. Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization Tip If you have a folder on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server, you do not need to do anything before synchronizing wirelessly. Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your device and/or the mail server, you may need to do one of the following before you can wirelessly synchronize email messages on your device with messages on the server: • If you need to create a folder on both your device and the server, create the folder on your device and check the Also create on server box. • If there is a folder on the mail server but you need to create it on your device, you do not need to check the Also create on server box. You can turn folder synchronization on or off when getting mail, or you can set synchronization options from a menu. Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off If you choose to display the Get Mail Options dialog box, you can turn IMAP folder synchronization on or off in the box. 0 1 2 From within an IMAP email account, select Get or Get & Send. Check or uncheck the Sync IMAP Folders box, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 417 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? After you select the folders to synchronize, a connection is made to your email service provider to update the server with changes from your handheld, and to update your device with changes from the server. Synchronizing device and mail server IMAP folders from the Options menu 0 1 Open the Sync IMAP Folders screen: a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen of an IMAP account, open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Sync IMAP Folders. 2 Select the folder or folders you want to synchronize from the pick list. Done Working with root folders For IMAP accounts, if you want to synchronize email messages on your device with messages on the mail server folder, you need to enter the root folder for the account on your device. Check with your email provider to find out the root folder for your IMAP account. Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol designed to ensure that data you send or receive over a network or the Internet is secure and authentic. The VersaMail application uses SSL to help guarantee the secure transmission of email messages that you send or receive. When you set up an account in the VersaMail application, you are given the option of selecting SSL for incoming and outgoing mail. LifeDrive from palmOne 418 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages [ ! ] IMPORTANT For most email providers that support SSL, you must select SSL for both incoming and outgoing mail. If you select just one or the other, your messages cannot be sent or received successfully. If you set up an account that uses an SSL connection on Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora, then SSL is supported in the VersaMail conduit when you synchronize with that account as well. Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync If your corporate email system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® on your device. Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the VersaMail and Calendar applications on your device to directly download email and calendar information from the server—without going through your desktop computer. When you create a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in the VersaMail application, both your email and calendar info synchronize directly with info on the Exchange server; they do not synchronize with info in your desktop software application, such as Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook. Other information on your device, such as contacts, tasks, and memos, continues to synchronize with information in your desktop software application. What do I need to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync? To use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your device, you must obtain the following information from your system administrator: • Whether the corporate mail system uses a Microsoft Exchange 2003 mail server. If it does not, you cannot use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. • The name of the mail server that provides wireless access to your mail system. Some companies do not give out this information because they do not want wireless access to the system. If you cannot obtain the server name, you cannot use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. • Whether a proxy server is used, and, if so, the name of the server. • Whether a virtual private network (VPN) is required to access the server. LifeDrive from palmOne 419 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? When you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, all existing Calendar events are purged from your device. Then, when you synchronize your device with your Exchange server, events from the past seven days are downloaded to your device. So you don’t end up with duplicate events. How does a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account differ from other accounts? Tip Another way an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync differs from other accounts is that there is no bcc option when you send a message. An email account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync differs from other accounts in the following areas: • Setting up an account • Getting messages • Sending messages • Downloading attachments • Receiving and working with meeting invitations • Receiving and working with Calendar events These features are discussed in this chapter. Most other features of a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, such as attaching files to messages, work like the features of any other account. NOTE Email accounts that use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync do not support mail filters. Also, you cannot set server preferences from the VersaMail Preferences screen for this type of account. Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account Although Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with both the VersaMail and Calendar applications, you must set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail. On a Windows computer, you can quickly set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your computer and then synchronize the settings to your device. On a Mac computer, you must set up the account on your device. You can set up only one Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account. LifeDrive from palmOne 420 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? If you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your computer, you cannot synchronize email messages and Calendar events on your computer with messages and events on your device by doing a full sync. You must select Sync within VersaMail to synchronize messages and events on your computer with messages and events on your device. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you set up an email account to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, Calendar events on your device automatically synchronize directly with info on the Exchange server, along with email messages. You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. If you do not want to synchronize Calendar events with info on the server, do not set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail. Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your computer WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 2 3 Open VersaMail account setup. Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next. Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then select Exchange ActiveSync. Click Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 421 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 4 Enter the basic account information: a. Enter a descriptive name for the account. b. Enter your account username and password. c. Enter your email address for this account. d. Click Next. 5 Enter the name of the Exchange server, the port number for the server, and the maximum message size you want to download. Check one or both boxes if the server requires authentication and/or if you are using a proxy server. Check with your system administrator to obtain this information. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 422 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 6 7 [ & ] OPTIONAL Next. If you are using a proxy server, enter the server name. Click [ & ] OPTIONAL To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My Settings. Click OK after settings have been tested. 8 Click Finish. 9 Do one of the following: a. To synchronize the account information to your device, click the top button. b. To set up another email account, click the bottom button. NOTE You can set up only one Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account. If you choose to set up another email account, it must be a different type. 10 11 Click Next. When you have finished setting up all accounts, click Finish on the Transfer Settings screen. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 423 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting up an account on your device 0 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 Open the Account Setup screen: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select Account Setup. c. Select New. 3 Enter the basic account information: a. In the Account Name field, enter a descriptive name. b. Select the Mail Service pick list, and then select Exchange ActiveSync. c. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 424 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 4 Enter the account username and password: a. Enter the username you use to access your email. b. Select the Password box, enter your email account password, and then select OK. c. Select Next. 5 Enter your email address and Exchange mail server name. Select Next. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 425 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 6 Do one of the following: Finish setup Select Done to finish setup and go to the Inbox of the account you set up, where you can begin getting and sending email. Set additional mail options Select Advanced to set advanced mail options. Test settings Select Test My Settings to test settings for this account, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 426 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip In most cases, you do not need to change the default advanced mail options. Check with your system administrator to see if you need to change the port number, uncheck the Use Secure Connection box, or enter proxy server information. Setting advanced mail options on your device 0 1 Set incoming mail server options: a. Select any of the following: Port Number By default, the port number setting is 443. You may need to change the port number if you choose not to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection. Use Secure Connection (SSL) By default, this box is checked, meaning you can retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection. Uncheck the box if you do not want to receive email over an SSL connection. b. Select Next. 2 If you use a proxy server, enter the proxy server name and port number, and check the box if your server requires authentication. Check with your system administrator for this information. When you have finished, select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 427 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Increase the time interval for how many days’ worth of email to retrieve so that recent messages are not removed from your device. Note that the interval for Calendar event retrieval is always seven days. Getting email messages Did You Know? When you set preferences for getting messages for a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, the Ask Every Time option does not appear. The steps you take for manually getting messages in a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account are the same as for all other accounts, with one exception: You select Sync instead of Get or Get & Send. However, what takes place during message retrieval for this type of account is different from that of other accounts. Here are the important differences: NOTE These differences apply to an account that uses Microsoft Exchange AutoSync whether you manually retrieve messages or set up an Auto Sync schedule. Message retrieval When you get messages manually or through Auto Sync, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync not only retrieves email messages directly from the server for the time interval set on your device (default is seven days); it also retrieves all Calendar events directly from the server for the preceding seven days. The interval for Calendar event retrieval is always seven days, regardless of the interval you set on your device. Wireless synchronization Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync supports wireless synchronization with the server only. To retrieve email messages and Calendar events, you must select Sync in VersaMail to make a wireless connection to the server. If you synchronize your device with your computer, info from other applications—Contacts, Memos, and so on—is synchronized, but email messages and Calendar events are not. Message removal Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync removes any email messages from your device that fall outside the time interval set on the device. For example, if the time interval is set at seven days, any email messages that are eight days old are removed from your device. This info is not removed from the Exchange server. LifeDrive from palmOne 428 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? When you synchronize a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, a copy of any messages sent from your device is placed in the Sent Items folder on the Exchange server. A copy of any messages deleted from your device is placed in the Deleted Items folder on the server. Did You Know? When you forward or reply to a message, the text is sent from the server copy of the message, not from the copy on your device. This is faster and may save on data charges. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 0 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 [ & ] OPTIONAL 3 Get messages: . If you are using a VPN connection, connect to your VPN. a. Open the menus. b. Select Accounts, and then select your Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account. c. Select Sync. This updates your Calendar events also. Done A list of your messages appears in the Inbox. To see downloaded Calendar events, tap Calendar . Sending messages You manually send messages from a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in the same way that you send messages from any other type of account. However, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts feature a “Live Outbox”: If a message isn’t sent successfully the first time, the message is stored in the Outbox and VersaMail keeps trying to send the message until it is successful. LifeDrive from palmOne 429 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? For Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts, if you turn off your device or go outside a coverage area while a message is still in the Outbox, the VersaMail® application will try to send the message when you turn your device back on or reenter a coverage area. Because of the Live Outbox feature, you do not need to set up scheduled sending retry for a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account. Tip You can add names and email addresses directly to Contacts from the To field of an invitation. Did You Know? If you receive meeting invitations, the Reminders screen displays both the number of new email messages and the number of new meeting invitations for that account—for example, 5 new messages/2 new meetings. LifeDrive from palmOne Previewing attachments 0 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts let you view a list of all attachments to a message, with approximate file size, so you can decide which ones you want to download. Unlike with other accounts, you do not need to fully download a message to view the list of attachments; it appears dimmed at the bottom of the message screen whether or not the message is fully downloaded. Also unlike other accounts, a paper clip icon appears next to a message with an attachment in the Inbox whether or not the attachment is fully downloaded. Select an attachment from the list to download it. Once the message is downloaded, you can work with it just like any you work with other attachment. Working with meeting invitations For Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts only, each time you retrieve messages either manually or through Auto Sync, Exchange meeting invitations are downloaded to your Inbox. NOTE You cannot create meeting invitations on your device. You can only receive meeting invitations sent to you. 430 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 0 Tip After opening an invitation, you can switch between full and concise meeting details by switching between full header view and short header view. Did You Know? You can forward meeting invitations in the same way that you forward email messages. The recipient receives the message as a meeting invitation. 1 Go to Favorites and select VersaMail 2 Get messages. 3 4 . Select a meeting invitation to open it. Meeting invitations are displayed with a unique icon . [ & ] OPTIONAL If the invitation contains an attachment, open the attachment and view or save it before responding to the invitation. Once you respond to the invitation the attachment is removed. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 431 CHAPTER 18 Did You Know? When you send your response, the server is updated with the new meeting event and immediately synchronizes the event to the Calendar application on your device. If you select Accept, the event appears as a confirmed appointment. Tip If you receive an updated meeting invitation, you can again choose to accept, decline, or tentatively accept. If you receive a meeting cancellation, you don’t need to do anything. Sending and Receiving Email Messages 5 Respond to the invitation: a. After reading the invitation, select Accept , Decline or Tentative (tentatively accept). , b. Select the response option you want from the dialog box: Respond without comments Sends an immediate email response to the meeting organizer by means of the Exchange server. Respond with comments Opens an email response form to which you can add comments before sending your response. Select Send to send the response to the meeting organizer by means of the Exchange server. Don’t respond Updates the server with your reply, but does not send a response to the meeting organizer. NOTE If you decline an invitation, the invitation is automatically put into the Trash folder. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 432 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with Calendar events When you set up an account in VersaMail that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, the Calendar application is synchronized directly with the info on the Exchange server as well. Any new Calendar events on the server for the preceding seven days are downloaded to your device. The interval for synchronizing Calendar events is always seven days, even if you set a different interval on your device for synchronizing email messages. [ ! ] IMPORTANT You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. If you want to stop synchronizing Calendar events with the server, you must delete the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. Only Calendar and VersaMail information is synchronized directly with info on the Exchange server. Other information on your device, such as contacts, tasks, and memos, continues to be synchronized with information in your desktop software application—either Palm Desktop or Outlook. When using Calendar with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, note the following important features: Time zones Time zones are always included for Calendar events when you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. When you synchronize your device with the Exchange server and download new events, the time zone information is included with each event. If you travel to a different time zone, the event times are automatically adjusted in Calendar on your device when you update your location on your device. Attendees For meetings, you can see a full list of attendees to the meeting. From the Day View, select the event, and then select Details. Select the With field. NOTE The Attendees field does not appear if the event is not a meeting. It is not available for events you create on your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 433 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know? All Calendar events are also purged from your device when you change the time interval for retrieving email for a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, or when you change the username, password, or server name for this type of account. The next time you synchronize your device with the Exchange server, all events are downloaded to your device, so you don’t end up with duplicate events. Synchronizing Calendar events using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync When you synchronize Calendar events with the info on Exchange server, all of the following take place: • Any events you create on your device are synchronized with info on the server. NOTE You cannot create meeting invitations on your device. You can only receive meeting invitations sent to you. • Any events you create or change in Outlook on your computer that are on the Exchange server are synchronized to your device. • Any meeting invitations are displayed in the Inbox of your Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail. When you respond to an invitation, your device is synchronized with the server to transfer the response to the server, and then the server is synchronized with your device to transfer the response to Calendar on your device. Updating Calendar events when you delete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. If you want to stop synchronizing Calendar events with info on the server, you must delete the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. When you delete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, all Calendar events are purged from your device. Then, when you synchronize Calendar with your desktop software application— Palm Desktop or Outlook—the events synchronize to your device, so you don’t end up with duplicate events. LifeDrive from palmOne 434 CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with the VersaMail application or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around Using the Graffiti® 2 command stroke in email messages Entering Info Cutting, copying, and pasting text from an email message Managing Info Downloading email messages from your computer to your device Connecting Setting up a phone connection for sending and receiving email wirelessly Customizing Setting preferences for connecting to a network Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about the VersaMail application 435 CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages In this chapter Creating and sending a text message Receiving and viewing a text message Editing a draft text message Setting advanced messaging features Related Topics If you need to get a short message to a friend or co-worker fast, send a text message from your device by means of your mobile phone (GSM phone with IR or Bluetooth® wireless technology required; sold separately) to their mobile phone. Messaging is a popular way for people to stay connected using the text messaging features of their mobile phone. Benefits • Enjoy quick communication • Use text messaging to chat with friends LifeDrive from palmOne 436 CHAPTER 19 [ ! ] Before You Begin Before you can send and receive text messages, you must set up a phone connection on your device to send and receive information wirelessly. » Key Term SMS More commonly known as text messages, Short Message Service messages can be received by most mobile phones. Sending and Receiving Text Messages Creating and sending a text message [ ! ] IMPORTANT Many SMS service providers charge per text message or part of a text message. Each message or part is 160 characters. If you create a text message under 161 characters, you are charged for one message. If you create a message that is 161 to 320 characters, you may be charged for two messages, and so forth. A counter appears at the top of the page to indicate the number of characters. Even though a message has more than 160 characters, the message appears as one message to the person receiving the message. 0 1 Go to Applications and select SMS 2 Select New. . Unread message Read message Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 437 CHAPTER 19 Tip If you are concerned about the length of your messages, you can have a warning appear when multipart messages exceed the specified number of parts. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Select Details and then select the number of parts from the Warn over pick list. Did You Know? You can create a signature that you use to sign your messages by opening the Options menu and selecting Preferences. Enter a signature on the lines. You can add your signature to your message by opening the Options menu and selecting Add Signature. Sending and Receiving Text Messages 3 Enter the recipient’s address using one of the following methods: Select To Select the recipient’s name on the Mobile Number Lookup list, and then select Add. Enter directly 4 5 Enter the recipient’s mobile phone number on the To line. In the area below the To line, enter the text of your message. Number of characters [ & ] OPTIONAL You can store your message in your Draft category and work on it later: a. Open the menus. b. Select Draft on the Message menu. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 438 CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages 6 Send your message: Select Send Sends the current message now. Selecting Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox. Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 439 CHAPTER 19 Tip If you want to check your messages but you don’t want to send the messages stored in your Outbox, open the Messages menu and select Check. Tip You can also send all the messages in your Outbox by opening the Messages menu and selecting Send. Did You Know? You can set an alert that lets you know a new message has arrived. Open the Preferences menu and check the Alert sound box. Select the Alarm pick list to choose a sound. LifeDrive from palmOne Sending and Receiving Text Messages Receiving and viewing a text message 0 1 Go to Applications and select SMS 2 Select Send & Check. 3 Select the message to open and read it. . Continued 440 CHAPTER 19 Did You Know? You can change how your messages are listed. You can sort the messages in order of one of the following: Alphabetic, Date, Phone Number, and Status. You can also choose to display the date the message was received. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Select from the Sort by pick list and select Show date. Sending and Receiving Text Messages 4 Store, delete, or reply to the message: Select Done The message is kept in the Inbox. Select Reply A new message is created with the sender’s phone number in the To line. Any selected text is copied into the new message. Select Delete The message is sent to the Trash category. Archive the message You can store your message in the Archive category: a. Open the menus. b. Select Archive on the Message menu. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 441 CHAPTER 19 Did You Know? You can store your message in your Draft folder and work on it later by opening the Message menu and selecting Draft. Sending and Receiving Text Messages Editing a draft text message 0 1 Go to Applications and select SMS 2 Edit the message: . a. Select Draft from the categories pick list. b. Select the message you want to edit. c. In the message view, select Edit and edit your message. 3 Send or store the draft message: Select Send Sends the current message now. Selecting Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox. Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later. Select Cancel Opens a dialog box that asks if you want to save the message in the Draft category. Select Yes to keep your changes and return the message to the Draft category. Select No to discard your changes and return the message to the Draft category. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 442 CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Setting advanced messaging features 0 1 Go to Applications and select SMS 2 Go to the Preferences menu: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. elect 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL Set the following parameters: Confirm Deleted Message Indicates whether a confirmation message appears each time you delete a message or you select the Empty Trash option from the Message menu. To display confirmation messages, check this box. Delete After Transfer Indicates whether data messages are deleted after you accept the data in the appropriate application. To keep data messages after you transfer them to the application, uncheck this box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 443 CHAPTER 19 Did You Know? Outgoing SMS message settings may depend on the service offered by your SMS carrier. Sending and Receiving Text Messages 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL Select Details and set the following parameters: Leave Messages on Phone Indicates whether messages are deleted from your phone after you download them to your device. To keep messages on your phone after you transfer them to your device, select this box. Return Receipt Determines whether you receive receipt confirmation notices. To receive receipt confirmation notices, select Requested. Expires Indicates how long unsent messages remain in your Outbox. Select from the following options: 4 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 2 Weeks, 1 Month, and Max. Time. Message Center Indicates whether your device obtains your mobile phone service provider’s Message Center number directly from the phone, or whether you need to enter the number manually. If your phone is already configured to use SMS, you do not need to change this setting. 5 Select OK twice. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 444 CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related Topics Support If you’re having problems with SMS or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. Click the link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Using menus Categories Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them Privacy Keeping messages private by turning on security options Sharing • Exchanging messages with other palmOne™ device users by beaming them • Sending messages to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device Connecting LifeDrive from palmOne • Opening applications Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth technology on your device to send and receive messages wirelessly 445 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web In this chapter Accessing a web page Quickly jumping to a page Changing how you view a page Bookmarking your favorite pages Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet You use the web for so many things: checking email, finding driving directions, getting news, buying gifts. Now you can take the web with you almost anywhere you go. Use your device to make a Wi-Fi® or Bluetooth® wireless Internet connection through a network, computer, or even your mobile phone, and the web browser opens the entire web to you. Downloading files and pages Communicating with other users Changing your home and start pages Setting advanced browser options Benefits of the web browser • Carry the web with you • View web pages in device-friendly format • Store pages for offline viewing Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne 446 CHAPTER 20 [ ! ] Before You Begin To browse the web, you must set up a connection to the Internet from your device. If you are accessing a VPN network, you need to install VPN software and set up VPN access. You can turn on VPN from the web browser by opening the Options menu and selecting Connect VPN. » Browsing the Web Accessing a web page You can open web pages, navigate the pages, and do the same things you can do with a desktop browser. Accessing a web page using the action bar 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web . Go to the web page you want to view: a. Select Go to Web Page . Key Term URL Stands for uniform resource locator, the technical name for a web address. For example, the URL for palmOne is http:// www.palmone.com. b. Enter the address of the web page you want to visit. Use the buttons in the Go to Web Page dialog box for quick entry of characters commonly used in web addresses. If the web browser recognizes the address that you are entering due to a previous entry and autofill is enabled, autofill automatically completes the address. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 447 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip You can also hide the address field to show more of the web page. Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Uncheck the Show Address Bar box. Accessing a web page using the address field Tip Create a bookmark to save the location, or create a saved page to save the content of a web page indefinitely. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web . Go to the web page you want to view: • Enter the address of the web page in the address field, and then select Go. Address field Address field pick list of recently visited web pages • If you are going to a web page you recently visited, select the Address field pick list, and then select Go. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 448 CHAPTER 20 Tip Some websites allow you to check a box to have your sign-in name automatically entered each time you visit a particular web page. Browsing the Web Using a password to access a web page Some websites require you to use a password to gain access to information. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Go to the web page where you must enter the password. 3 Enter your password to access the web page: . a. Enter your sign-in name in the appropriate field. b. Tap in the password box, enter your password, and then select OK. c. Select the button that lets you view the page (Sign In, Enter, Go, and so on). Done LifeDrive from palmOne 449 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Did You Know? Find locates any text, whether it is letters or numbers. Find is not case-sensitive. Finding information on a web page Tip Because of the limited space on the device screen, sometimes the current web address (URL) is not fully visible. Use the Page Properties dialog box to view the full URL. Open the Page menu, select Page, and then select Page Info. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Open the Find field: . a. Go to the web page you want to search. b. Open the menus. c. Select Page, and then select Find Text on Page. 3 Search the web page: a. Type the text you want to find. b. Select Find. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 450 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Quickly jumping to a page The action bar icons allow you to quickly move from page to page. Following a link Many web pages contain underlined links, which are text or pictures that, when selected, take you to another web page or to another part of the same page. Select the link to go to another web page Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited No matter where you navigate on the Internet, you can always return to your home page quickly or return to a page you have recently visited. Select the back and forward arrows to go to previous pages Select the Home icon to go to your home page LifeDrive from palmOne 451 CHAPTER 20 Tip You can change your font size for easier viewing. Did You Know? In the Optimized mode, use the navigator to browse the web page. Press Left or Right to jump to the previous or next link. When a link is highlighted, press Center to go to the link. Press Up and Down to scroll through the web page. Browsing the Web Changing how you view a page You can change how you view web pages by selecting different display views and dragging the screen to view different parts. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Go to the web page you want to view. 3 Select the Display View icon . in the action bar. Display View icon 4 Select from one of the following views: Optimized Displays a modified version of the web page so that it is optimized for device viewing. Wide Page Displays the web page as it would appear in a desktop computer web browser. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 452 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 5 [ & ] OPTIONAL If the web page is larger than your screen, you can tap and drag the stylus to move the web page in any direction to view different parts of the web page. To activate the Tap and Drag scrolling, you must set the Tap and Drag setting in the General Preferences tab under the Options menu. This feature is disabled when you turn on Writing Area Preferences and use the full screen for Graffiti® 2 writing. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 453 » CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Key Term Bookmark A pointer to a web page. The actual page is not stored, only the URL. Also called a Favorite in some browsers. Bookmarking your favorite pages Tip You can set your bookmark list as your start page. Bookmarking your favorite web pages allows you to quickly return to those pages. Adding a bookmark 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Go to the web page that you want to bookmark. 3 Open the Bookmark Page dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select Add Bookmark. 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL Change the bookmark name, description, or URL. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 454 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip You can also view your list of bookmarks by selecting View Bookmarks from the Page menu. Did You Know? A saved page is displayed like a bookmarked page, except that at the top of the page appears the text “Page saved on date size k.” 5 Select OK. Done Viewing a bookmarked or saved page Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in the Bookmarks View. Saved pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper-right corner of the bookmark. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Select the Bookmark icon 3 . . Select the name of the bookmarked or saved page you want to visit. On the bottom right of the screen are five icons representing the first five Bookmarks pages. Select a Bookmarks page icon to display the page. You can also tap the arrow to go to the next page. Bookmark page arrow Bookmark page icons Done LifeDrive from palmOne 455 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip You can clean up your bookmark list by deleting old bookmarks or saved pages you no longer use. Select the bookmark, select Edit, and then select Delete. Editing information about a bookmark or saved page 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Select the Bookmark icon 3 Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box: . . a. Open the menus. b. Select Bookmarks, and then select Edit Bookmarks. 4 Edit the bookmark information: a. Select the name of the bookmarked or saved page that you want to edit. b. Change the bookmark or saved page name, description, or address (URL) by selecting the appropriate option. 5 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 456 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Arranging the bookmark list The web browser includes ten pages so that you can arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a logical fashion. For example, you can store travel links on one page, stock links on another, and business links on a third page. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box: a. Select the Bookmark icon . . b. Open the menus. c. Select Edit Bookmarks in the Bookmarks menu. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 457 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 3 Arrange the bookmarks: a. Use the stylus to drag and drop bookmarks into different slots on the current page to organize them. b. Move a bookmark to a different page by dragging and dropping it onto the Page icon. Ten page icons at the bottom of the dialog box represent the pages on each of which you can add ten bookmarks. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 458 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Did You Know? Generally, if you are using a GPRS service, you are charged only for the data sent. If you are using a GSM service, you are charged for the time you are connected. If you are using Wi-Fi, any charges depend on your service contract. Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet Tip When you are in another application and you tap a URL, the web browser connects to the Internet and displays the page. The web browser also opens when you select an HTML file that you receive as an email attachment. LifeDrive from palmOne While you’re working with stored information in the web browser, such as saved pages, stored versions of pages, and so forth, you can disconnect from the Internet to reduce usage charges. You can connect to the Internet again when you need access. Disconnecting from the Internet 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Disconnect from the Internet: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select Disconnect. Done 459 CHAPTER 20 Tip If the connection is not established, do one of the following: Select Cancel to stop the connection process. Select Change Network to select a different service to connect to. Browsing the Web Connecting to the Internet 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Connect to the Internet: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select Connect. Alternately, you can enter a URL on the address line and select Go. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 460 CHAPTER 20 Tip If you decide that the download process is taking too long, you can stop it. To stop a web page from downloading, select the Stop icon in the action bar. To stop a file from downloading, select Cancel in the Download dialog box. Browsing the Web Downloading files and pages You can download files or save files for viewing when you are not connected to the Internet. Downloading a file 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Go to the web page you want to view. 3 Select the link of the file you want to download. 4 Select a download option: . Application name Downloads the file to an application. For example, if you are downloading a Word document, the file downloads into Documents To Go. Card If you have an expansion card installed, the file downloads onto the card. If you don’t have an expansion card installed, the file is downloaded into the default folder for that file type on the device’s internal drive. If that file type does not have a default folder, it downloads into a folder called Blazer Downloads. 5 Select Yes. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 461 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Did You Know? Saved pages are listed with the bookmarks in the Bookmark List. The saved pages have an orange corner. Saving a web page Did You Know? The web browser also functions as a viewer, enabling you to quickly view certain files while working in other applications. For example, if you read an email message that has a file attached in HTML format, select the file and the web browser opens so that you can view the file. Tip Saving a web page on your device allows you to view a web page without being online. LifeDrive from palmOne If you want to save a web page (such as a travel itinerary or Internet order receipt) indefinitely, you can create a saved page. The copy is stored on the device until you delete it. 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Go to the web page you want to save. 3 Go to the Save Page dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Page, and then select Save Page. 4 Save the web page: a. Change the page name or description if you want. b. Select OK. Done 462 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip Suppose you have an HTML file on your desktop computer that you want to carry with you. Download the file onto the device’s internal drive or expansion card and use the web browser to view the page on your device. Viewing a saved file You can use the web browser to view web pages or image files that are on the device’s internal drive or an expansion card. The types of files that can be viewed include HTML, HTM, GIF, and JPG. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Select a file or folder to open it. . A web browser icon appears to the left of the file name in the Files list if it is a file that is automatically opened in web browser. 3 Enter the file name using the format file:// / . Done LifeDrive from palmOne 463 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Communicating with other users You can communicate with others by means of email or beaming. Sending email by means of an Internet email account You can use your Internet email account to send an email message and attachments. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Log in to your Internet email account. 3 Compose your email message. 4 Send or save the email message. . Done LifeDrive from palmOne 464 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Changing your home and start pages You can change the page that your Home Page icon browser starts with when it is first opened. goes to, or change the page that the web Changing your home page You can choose a home page from any web address. 0C 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Open the Preferences Page dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select the Page tab. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 465 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 3 Select the Home Page box. 4 Enter a URL on the Address line. 5 Select OK twice. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 466 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Changing your start page You can select the start page you want your device to open to when you first open the web browser. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Open the Preferences Page dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Page tab. 3 Select the Start with pick list, and select the page you want to start with when you first open the web browser: Home Page The page you have set as your home page. Last Page Viewed The last page you viewed before exiting the web browser. Bookmarks The Bookmarks dialog box opens. The web browser does not connect to the Internet. Blank Page 4 Select OK. An empty page with no URL or dialog box 0 Done LifeDrive from palmOne 467 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Setting advanced browser options You can change options on your device to improve the speed, ease of use, and security of your browsing experience. Changing how images are downloaded Images in web pages can be very large. You can set an option to make web pages download faster by removing images altogether. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Open the General Preferences dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select General tab. 3 Check or uncheck the Disable Images box to disable or enable images. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 468 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tip Filling out an order form or application on the web usually requires entering several pieces of information: your name, address, phone number, and so on. When you enable autofill, your device stores the information you entered in these fields. The next time you use that order form and type the first few letters in a field, your device remembers the last item you entered in that field that started with those letters, and fills in the field. Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and form fields Your device can store information, such as web addresses and form fields. If autofill is enabled, when you enter the first few letters of a URL you’ve entered before in the URL Entry field, your device completes the URL for you. Also, when you are filling out forms and applications, your device can complete the information for you. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web . Open the General Preferences dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select General tab. 3 Check or uncheck the Disable Auto Complete box to disable or enable autofill. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 469 » CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Key Term Cookie Some websites store information in a small text file, called a cookie, that is saved on your device. A cookie usually stores information about you and your preferences for that website. A site can use this information to customize the pages you see the next time you visit. Allowing a website to create a cookie does not give the site access to the rest of your device. A cookie stores only the information you provide while visiting the website. Allowing websites to remember personal information By default, your device saves the cookies it receives. If you want more privacy, you can tell your device not to accept cookies. 0 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web . Open the General Preferences dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select General tab. 3 Check or uncheck the Disable Cookies box. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 470 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Clear Cookies and cache preferences 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Advanced tab. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 471 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 3 Clear Cookies and the cache by using the following options: Cookies Indicates how much memory is being used by cookies. Clear Cache Clears the cache immediately and frees the memory. Clear cache on exit Check the box to clear the cache each time you exit the web browser. Uncheck the box to keep the cache from session to session. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 472 » CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Key Term Proxy server A server that provides access to files from other servers by retrieving them either from its local cache or from the remote server. Setting preferences for using a proxy server Your device comes with the proxy server turned off. You can turn the proxy server on and configure a proxy server. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select Advanced tab. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 473 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web 3 Set your proxy server preferences: a. Select Set Proxy. b. Check or uncheck the Use Proxy box to use or not use a proxy server. c. If you want to use a proxy server, select the Use Proxy box and enter the appropriate server address and port number. d. Select OK. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 474 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Setting whether to accept JavaScript You can choose to bypass JavaScript elements on the web pages you view. JavaScript is often used on web pages for interactive content. 0 1 Go to Favorites and select Web 2 Open the General Preferences dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. c. Select General tab. 3 Check or uncheck the Disable JavaScript box to disable or enable JavaScript. 4 Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 475 CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with the web browser or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Categories Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them Bluetooth® Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your device Wi-Fi® Setting up a network connection using Wi-Fi wireless technology on your device VersaMail® Sending email messages. 476 CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device In this chapter Dialing a number Using speed dial Related topics Need to dial a number? You can dial phone numbers directly from a contact using Quick Connect. If you don’t have the number listed as a contact, you can tap out the number on the Dialer keypad, tap Dial. Your mobile phone begins dialing (GSM phone required; sold separately). Your call history stays on your device for easy access later. Benefits of Dialer • Easily dial numbers that are not in Contacts by using the keypad on your device screen • Keep your call history on your device • Quickly dial numbers using speed dial LifeDrive from palmOne 477 CHAPTER 21 [ ! ] Before You Begin Before you can dial a number, you must set up a phone connection on your device. Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Dialing a number Tapping out a number on your device is sometimes easier than using your mobile phone. Entering a number 0 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Tap the telephone number on the keypad. . Digits appear in the numeric display Enter phone number and tap Dial Tap Clear to delete last digit from numeric display. Tap and hold to clear entire numeric display Tap and hold the 0 key to add a + (plus) to the number sequence 3 Tap Dial. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 478 CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Redialing the most recently used number 0 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Dial the most recently used number: . a. Tap Dial to display the most recently used number. The most recently dialed number is displayed Tap Dial b. Tap Dial again to dial the number. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 479 CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Did You Know? Dialer keeps a list of 11 of the most recently dialed numbers. Dialing a number from the Call History List Did You Know? If the number is a speeddial entry, the name from the speed dial entry appears in the Call History list. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Dial the number from the list: . a. Tap History. b. Tap an entry from the History list. Tap entry to enter number on Dialer view c. Tap Dial. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 480 CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Using speed dial Speed dial allows you to store ten of your most commonly used numbers and to dial one with a single tap. Adding a speed-dial entry 0 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Add a speed-dial entry: . a. Tap Speed. b. Tap an empty speed-dial button. Tap empty speed-dial button c. Enter a name and telephone number. d. Tap OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 481 CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Dialing a number using speed dial 0 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Dial the number: . a. Tap Speed. b. Tap one of the named speeddial buttons. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 482 CHAPTER 21 Tip You can go directly to the Edit Entry dialog box by tapping and holding a speed dial button. Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Editing a speed-dial entry 0 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Edit an entry: . a. Tap Speed. b. Tap Edit. Tap Edit c. Tap an entry. d. Edit the entry. e. Tap OK, and then tap Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 483 CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Dialer or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around Opening applications Connecting Connecting your device to a mobile phone Contacts Using Quick Connect and Tap-to-Connect in Contacts to dial phone numbers 484 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information In this chapter Using the Send command Beaming Other ways of sharing information Related topics You have to get this memo to your boss—now. Or the photo of the grandkids in their Halloween costumes to your mom. After you’ve used your device to create or capture that important business and personal information, it’s time to share it with others. Your device comes equipped with a variety of options for sharing information, so that you can choose the quickest, most convenient way of sending your info. LifeDrive from palmOne Benefits of sharing • Keep others up-to-date with meaningful business and personal information • Choose the most convenient sharing method from a variety of options • Create an informal backup copy of important info 485 CHAPTER 22 [ ! ] Before You Begin You must complete all the prerequisites for the messaging application. To use your device’s builtin Bluetooth wireless technology, you must set up a phone connection. To use it with your device’s IR port, run Phone Link Updater, and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection. Did You Know? You can also easily send information from the desktop component of many applications. For example, you can send photos from the palmOne™ Media desktop application. See the online desktop help for information. Sharing Information Using the Send command You can send information from within an application—such as a photo or video, a contact, or an appointment—to other Palm OS® device users. You can also send a category of information or even an entire application. You can use the Send command in many applications to send information wirelessly using one of the following methods: • Using the built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology on your device • As an attachment to an email message • As part of a text message Sending information from within an application using Bluetooth® technology You can use your device’s built-in Bluetooth technology to send information directly to another device that includes Bluetooth technology. You must be within range of the receiving device to send information using Bluetooth technology. The maximum range is approximately 25–30 feet (8–10 meters); however, the shorter the range, the more quickly and accurately you can send information. Tip If you are unable to send information to another device, try moving closer to the receiving device. LifeDrive from palmOne 486 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information 0 Did You Know? In most applications, the leftmost menu is named Record. 1 Select the information you want to send: a. Open an application. b. Select the entry you want. 2 Select a sending method: a. Open the menus. b. Select the Send menu item in the leftmost menu. In most applications, the leftmost menu is named Record. c. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK. 3 Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The information is sent to the receiving device. 487 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tip Create a category of Calendar events such as your child’s soccer schedule, and then send the entire category to your spouse’s device. Sending a category using Bluetooth technology Tip When you send a category, the individual entries within the category (contacts, memos, photos, and so on) appear as unfiled items on the receiving device. 0 1 Select the category you want to send: a. Open an application. b. From the list view, select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the category you want. This takes you to the list view within the selected category. 2 Send the category: a. Open the menus. b. Select the Send Category menu item in the leftmost menu. c. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK. 3 Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The information is sent to the receiving device. 488 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tip Select the Send From pick list to send an application from an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot. Sending an application using Bluetooth technology 0 1 Select the application you want to send: a. Go to Applications. b. Open the menus. c. Select Send on the App menu. d. Select the application you want to send. NOTE You cannot send an application that has a lock icon next to the application size. 2 Send the application: a. Select Send. b. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK. 3 Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne The information is sent to the receiving device. 489 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Using the Send command with the VersaMail® application You can send information as an attachment to an email message using the Send command. Follow the procedures for sending information, a category, or an application. Select VersaMail in the Send With dialog box. The VersaMail® application opens, displaying a blank message with the information you want to send as an attachment. Address the message, enter a subject line, and then select Send or Get & Send. Using the Send command with SMS NOTE You cannot send a category or an application with SMS. You can send information as part of a text message using the Send command. Follow the procedure for sending information. Select SMS in the Send With dialog box. The SMS application opens, displaying a new text message with the information you want to send as the body of the message. Address the message, and then select Send. LifeDrive from palmOne 490 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tip For best results when beaming, the devices should be between 4 and 39 inches (10 centimeters and one meter) apart, and there should be a clear path between them. Beaming Tip Beaming works best for smaller items. If you have larger items, you can use Bluetooth® wireless technology. Expansion cards are convenient for sharing very large items. Beaming information from within an application Using the IR port on your device, you can beam information from within an application, such as a photo or video, a contact, an appointment, or a task, to other Palm Powered™ devices. You can also beam a category of information or even an entire application. NOTE The receiving device must be turned on. Depending on the receiving device model, not all information may be sent correctly. 0 1 Select the information you want to beam: a. Open an application. b. Select the entry you want. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 491 CHAPTER 22 Tip The leftmost menu in most applications is named Record. Tip In Contacts, you can create a contact with your own information and select it as your business card by opening the Record Menu and selecting Business Card. Beam your business card to other devices by holding down the Contacts Quick button until the Beam dialog box appears. Sharing Information 2 Beam the information: a. Open the menus. b. Select the Beam menu item in the leftmost menu. The leftmost menu in most applications is named Record. c. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your device’s IR port directly at the IR port of the other device. IR port 3 Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 492 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tip Create a category of Calendar events such as your meeting schedule, and then beam the entire category to your business partner’s device. Beaming a category Tip When you receive a beamed item, you can file the item in a category using the Receive dialog box. 0 1 Select the category you want to beam: a. Open an application. b. From the list view, select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the category you want. This takes you to the list view within the selected category. 2 Beam the category: a. Open the menus. b. Select the Beam Category menu item in the leftmost menu. c. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your device’s IR port directly at the IR port of the other device. IR port 3 Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 493 CHAPTER 22 Tip Select the Beam From pick list to beam an application from an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot. Sharing Information Beaming an application 0 1 Select the application you want to beam: a. Go to Applications. b. Open the menus. c. Select Beam in the App menu. d. Select the location of the app from the Beam From pick list. e. Select the application you want to beam. NOTE You cannot beam an application that has a lock icon next to the application size. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 494 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information 2 Beam the application: a. Select Beam. b. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your device’s IR port directly at the IR port of the other device. IR port 3 Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete. Done Other ways of sharing information Here are some other ways of sharing information: • Copy information or an application onto an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot, and view the information by inserting the card into the slot on another Palm Powered device. • Copy information such as a photo or video from your device to your computer, or from your computer to your device by synchronizing. LifeDrive from palmOne 495 CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with sharing information or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Info Sharing information by synchronizing your device with your computer Expansion Sharing information by saving it to an expansion card that can be viewed from another device Connecting Setting up a connection with a phone to share information wirelessly VersaMail Sending information as an attachment to an email message SMS Sending information as part of a text message Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about sharing information 496 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses In this chapter Adding an expense Choosing currency options Deleting expenses Tired of trying to re-create your business trip when you return? Expense makes it easy to keep track of what you paid for that dinner in New York with your new sales group. Customizing the expense list Working with Expense on your computer Related topics You can track costs for meals, lodging, transportation, entertainment, and more, and save all of the information in one convenient place. You can even transfer the information to a spreadsheet on your computer. Benefits of Expense • Monitor your business and personal expenses • Easily retrieve expense information • Create expense reports faster LifeDrive from palmOne 497 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Did You Know? Expense is not just for business. Use it to help plan your budget by figuring out how much you spend each month on things like entertainment and dining out. Adding an expense Tip Add an expense simply by entering the first letter of the expense type. For example, entering D opens a dinner item with today’s date. To enable this feature on your device, open the Options menu and select Preferences. Check the automatic fill box. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 2 Enter the expense: . a. Tap New. b. Enter the amount of the expense. c. Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type. NOTE You must select an Expense type if you want to save the item. Expense type pick list Tip Change the date of an expense by selecting the date of the item. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 498 CHAPTER 23 Tip Add extra information to your expense items. Select the item and select Details. Then select Note and enter the information. Managing Your Expenses 3 Enter the details of the expense: a. Tap Details. b. Select each field where you want to enter information, and enter it. Category Select a category to sort your expenses. Tip Select Lookup in the Attendees list to pull names from Contacts. Type Did You Know? After you synchronize, you can send your expense information to a spreadsheet on your computer. Enter the expense type. Payment Select how you paid for the expense. Currency symbol. Select the currency used to pay the expense. You can preset this Vendor and City Enter the vendor and city associated with the expense. For example, a business lunch might be at Rosie’s Cafe in San Francisco. Attendees Enter the people associated with the expense. c. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne That’s it. Your device automatically saves the expense. Make sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often. 499 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Tip If you travel a lot, update the currency pick list, so that you can quickly get to the symbols you need. Choosing currency options Did You Know? Use separate categories for related expenses. For example, create a London category for a trip to London. After you file your expense report for the London trip, you can easily delete the related expenses with the Purge command. Customizing the currency pick list Expense is even easier to use when you customize the currency list. You can choose what currencies appear in the pick list, and what symbol automatically appears in new expenses, and you can even create your own currency symbol. Place the currency symbols that you use most often in the currency pick list. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 2 Open the Receipt Details dialog box: . a. Tap an expense item. b. Tap Details. 3 Select the currency symbol(s) that you want to see in the pick list: a. Select the Currency pick list, and then select Edit currencies. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 500 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Tip If you’re entering several expenses that all use the same currency, change the preset currency to that symbol to save time. Cont’d. b. Select one of the Currency pick lists and select the name of the country whose currency symbol you want to display. Currency pick list c. Select OK, and then select OK again. When you’re finished with those expenses, change it again to the next one you’ll use. Done The expense list now displays the currencies you selected. Presetting the currency symbol Choose which currency symbols appear when you add a new expense. 0S 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 2 Open Expense Preferences dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Preferences. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 501 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses 3 Choose the default currency: a. Select the Default Currency pick list. b. Select the symbol you want to appear when you add new expenses. c. Select OK. 0 Done Creating a currency symbol If the currency you want to use is not in the pick list of countries, you can create your own symbol. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 2 Open the Custom Currencies dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Custom Currencies. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 502 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses 3 Create the custom symbol: a. Select a Country box. b. Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want. c. Select OK, and then select OK again. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 503 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Deleting expenses Delete individual expenses, or an entire category of expenses at once. Deleting an individual expense 0 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 2 Tap the expense you want to delete. 3 Delete the item: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Delete Item in the Record menu. 4 5 [ & ] OPTIONAL computer. Check the box to save an archive copy of the expense on your Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 504 CHAPTER 23 Tip To combine expenses from different categories, rename one category to match the other category’s name. Did You Know? There is another way to delete a category. Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories. Select the Delete command to delete the selected category and move all of its entries to the Unfiled category. Managing Your Expenses Deleting an entire category of expenses 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select Expense . Open the Purge Categories dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Purge on the Record menu. 3 Delete the category and all of its items: a. Select the category you want to delete. b. Select Purge. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 505 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Did You Know? Customizing the expense list makes it easy to see how much you spent on each type of expense. For example, to see how much you spent on taxis, sort your expenses by type so that all your taxi expenses appear together in the list. Customizing the expense list Use categories to further refine your list. You can change the appearance of the expense list. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 2 Select Show. 3 . Select the pick lists to change any of the following items, and then select OK: Sort by Sort expenses by date or type. Distance Show distance in miles or kilometers. Show currency Show or hide the currency symbol in the expense list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 506 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Working with Expense on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use Expense on your computer to view and manage the expenses you create on your device. Check out the online Help in Palm® Desktop software to learn how to use Expense on your computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics: • Adding, editing and deleting expense items • Organizing your expenses by date, type, amount, notes, or category • Viewing expense items as a list, large icons, or small icons • Converting a list of expenses to a single currency • Printing expense reports • Transferring expense information to other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, using the Send or Export command in Palm Desktop software To open Expense on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop, and then click Expense on the Launch bar. LifeDrive from palmOne 507 CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Expense or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. Entering Information Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus • Adding contacts to the attendees list with Lookup • Entering information with Graffiti® 2 characters and ShortCuts Calculator Performing basic math calculations associated with your expenses Categories • Creating and editing categories • Organizing expenses by type and sorting them Customizing LifeDrive from palmOne Setting number formats 508 CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations In this chapter Calculator buttons Viewing recent calculations Related topics Whether you’re figuring the tip on a restaurant bill or balancing your checkbook, it’s always nice to have a calculator on hand. And because it’s part of your device, there’s no need to carry a separate calculator. Benefits of Calculator • Always have a calculator with you • Store calculations for later use LifeDrive from palmOne 509 CHAPTER 24 Tip Use the memory buttons to store and recall a number you enter in multiple calculations. Tip If you make a mistake entering a number in the middle of a calculation, use the CE button to re-enter the number without starting the calculation over. Tip Open the Options menu and select Advanced Mode to display a scientific calculator. Performing Calculations Calculator buttons 0 Clear any value in the Calculator memory. Recall the stored value from the memory and enter it into the current calculation. Place the current number into memory. The current number is added to the total that is already in the memory. Tapping this button does not affect the current calculation; it just places the value in memory. Clear the last number you entered. Clear the entire calculation so that you can start over. Enter a number, and then select this button to change it to a percentage. Enter a number, and then select this button to calculate the square root of the number. Enter a number, and then select this button to make it negative. LifeDrive from palmOne 510 CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations Did You Know? Viewing recent calculations is helpful when double-checking the math in your checkbook register. Viewing recent calculations Did You Know? Calculator History also has these functions: View recent calculations to confirm that you entered everything correctly. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Calculator 2 Open the History dialog box: Clear Select to clear the calculator’s history. a. Open the menus. Copy Select to copy the history of calculations. Then paste them into another application by opening the Edit menu and selecting Paste in the other application. b. Select Edit, and then select Show History. LifeDrive from palmOne . c. Select OK. Done 511 CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations Accessing different calculators Do you need a scientific or financial calculator? Your calculator has a variety of modes that can help you calculate formulas in a number of different areas. 0 1 Go to Applications and select Calculator 2 Access the advanced mode calculators: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Advanced Mode. You can now use the scientific calculator. c. If you want to use other calculators, such as finance, logic, statistics, or area, open the menus, select Options, and then select a mode from the list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 512 CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with Calculator or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click the links below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Entering Information Entering numbers with Graffiti® 2 characters 513 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private In this chapter Choosing a security level Marking information as private Setting the level of privacy Using a password You probably wouldn’t leave your door unlocked at night, so why should it be any different with your device? When you think about the amount of personal and private information stored there, you’ll definitely want to protect it. Locking your device Using Quick Unlock Encrypting your information Limiting the number of password attempts Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne Benefits of privacy • Protect information if your device is misplaced • Hide private information • Unlock your device using only one hand 514 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tip Use the Enterprise Software link to download software to create a secure wireless connection to your corporate network and encrypt individual files and folders to protect your critical information. Choosing a security level There are a variety of security levels available for your device. Choose the level that provides the best mix of security and convenience. Activating no security features All entries are accessible to anyone who has your device. This includes entries that are marked private but are not masked or hidden. Masking private entries without creating a password Masked entries are displayed when selected. This provides some degree of privacy for private entries, but anyone can view the info by simply selecting it. Hiding private entries and creating a password is entered. This is the basic level of security. Private entries are displayed when the password Encrypting entries (requires assigning a password) Entries are scrambled whenever your device locks, and are only displayed when the password is entered. Choose to encrypt all information, or just private entries. This feature provides better security than hiding private entries and assigning a password. Limiting the number of password attempts Selected information is deleted after a specified number of incorrect password attempts. Use this feature along with encryption for the highest level of security. LifeDrive from palmOne 515 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Marking information as private Marking an entry as private is the first step in protecting your info. 0 1 Open an application. 2 Create a new entry, or select the entry that you want to make private. 3 Mark it as private: a. For existing Contacts, select Edit. b. Select Details. c. Check the Private box. d. Select OK. Private box e. In Contacts and Memos, select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 516 CHAPTER 25 Tip You can also set the level of privacy from within certain applications. Open the Options menu, select Security, and then select the level of privacy from the Privacy pick list. Keeping Your Information Private Setting the level of privacy Add further protection to your private entries by setting the privacy level (hidden/masked). Hiding or masking private entries 0 1 Open Security: a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs . b. Select Security. 2 Select the display option for private entries: a. Select the Private Records pick list. b. Select one of these options, and then select Done. Show Display private entries. Mask Cover entries with a gray mask; you can see the mask onscreen, but you can't see the content of the entry. Hide Make private entries invisible. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 517 CHAPTER 25 Tip Use a password to protect confidential work or personal information. If your device is lost or stolen, this information will be safe. Keeping Your Information Private Cont’d. Masked entry Done Viewing an entry that is masked To open a masked entry, select the entry. If you have a password, enter it in the Show Private Records dialog box, and then select OK. When you close a masked entry, it remains masked. Using a password Further protect your hidden or masked entries by creating a password, which is needed to display the contents of hidden/masked entries. LifeDrive from palmOne 518 CHAPTER 25 Tip The best passwords consist of a mix of letters, characters, and numbers. Longer passwords are better than short ones. Any password you create is case-sensitive. Keeping Your Information Private Creating a password 0 1 Open Security: Password box a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs . b. Select Security. 2 Create a password: a. Select the Password box. b. Enter a password with Graffiti® 2 writing, the numeric keypad, or the onscreen keyboard. c. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 519 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tip In Palm® Desktop software, you can require password entry for private info to display. Open the Tools menu and click Options, and then click Security. The password is the same one used by your device. 3 Confirm the password and enter a hint: a. Enter the password again, and then select OK. b. Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it, and then select Done. 4 Select Done. Done Changing a password You can change your password at any time. You must enter the current password before you can change it. 0 1 Open Security: Password box a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs . b. Select Security. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 520 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 2 Enter your current password: a. Select the Password box. b. Enter the current password, and then select OK. 3 Change your password: a. Select OK. b. Enter a new password, and then select OK. 4 Confirm the password and enter a hint: a. Enter the password again, and then select OK. b. Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it, and then select Done. 5 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 521 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting a password You can delete your password at any time. You must enter the current password before you can delete it. 0 1 Enter your password: a. Select the Password box. b. Enter the current password, and then select OK. 2 Delete your password: a. Select Unassign. b. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 522 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting a forgotten password If you forget your password, your device displays the password hint (if you entered one) to help you remember the password. If you still can’t remember the password, you can delete it from your device. Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries marked as private. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize your device with your computer before and after this procedure, so you can restore any private entries that were deleted along with the password. 0 1 Open Security: Password box a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs . b. Select Security. 2 Open the Incorrect Password dialog box: a. Select the Password box. b. Tap any number on the keypad, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 523 CHAPTER 25 [ ! ] Before You Begin To use the locking feature, you must first create a password for your device. Keeping Your Information Private 3 Delete the forgotten password: a. Select Lost Password. Tip To start your device when it is locked, turn it on. Enter your password, and then select Done. b. Select Delete Password. 4 5 Synchronize your device with your computer to restore any private entries that were deleted. [ & ] OPTIONAL Create a new password. Done Locking your device Protect the entire contents of your device, whether marked private or not, by using your password to lock your device. You can set your device to lock automatically, or you can lock it manually. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you lock your device, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you forget the password, your device will show you the hint you entered to help you remember the password. If you still cannot remember the password, you must do a hard reset to resume using your device. A hard reset deletes all of the information on your device, including your password. You can restore the information by synchronizing your device with your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 524 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Locking your device automatically 0 1 Open Security: a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs . Auto Lock box b. Select Security. 2 Open the Lock Device dialog box: a. Select the Auto Lock box. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 525 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 3 Select one of these lock options: Never Always leave your device unlocked. When power is off Automatically lock your device whenever you turn it off. At a preset time Set a time when your device will automatically lock. After a preset delay Set a period of inactivity after which your device will automatically lock. 4 Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 526 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Locking your device manually 0 1 Open Security: a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs . b. Select Security. Lock 2 Select Lock. 3 Select Lock Device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 527 CHAPTER 25 [ ! ] Before You Begin To use Quick Unlock, you must first create a password for your device. Tip You can change a Quick Unlock combination at any time. Follow the same steps you used to create the combination. Keeping Your Information Private Using Quick Unlock You can unlock your device by creating a special combination sequence with the 5-way navigator—similar to the combination you use to open a padlock. Use this sequence in place of your password to quickly unlock your device. Quick Unlock works only with your first three attempts to unlock your device. After three attempts, you must use your password to unlock your device. Creating a Quick Unlock combination 0 1 Open Security: a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs Quick Unlock box . b. Select Security. 2 Open the Quick Unlock dialog box: a. Select the Quick Unlock box. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 528 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 3 Create a Quick Unlock combination sequence: a. Use the 5-way or tap the onscreen navigator to create a combination. For example, you might choose Left-Right-Left as a combination. b. Select OK. 4 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne When your device is locked, you can now unlock it by using the Quick Unlock combination. If you forget your combination, you are asked to enter your password. 529 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting your Quick Unlock combination 0 1 Open Security: a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs Quick Unlock box . b. Select Security. 2 Open the Quick Unlock dialog box: a. Select the Quick Unlock box. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. 3 Delete the Quick Unlock combination: a. Select Unassign. b. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 530 CHAPTER 25 [ ! ] Before You Begin To use encryption, you must first create a password for your device. Keeping Your Information Private Encrypting your information You can encrypt selected information whenever your device locks. This means that your information is scrambled so that it cannot be read. When you unlock your device and enter your password or Quick Unlock combination, the encrypted information is unscrambled. The more information you select for encryption, the longer your device takes to scramble (and unscramble) the information. Also, applications that use large files, such as palmOne™ Media, take a long time to encrypt. In these cases, consider the trade-off between security and convenience. 0 1 Open Security: a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs . b. Select Security. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 531 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 2 Open the Encrypt Data dialog box: a. Select Options and then select Security Options. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. c. Check the Encrypt data when locked box. d. Select Choose Applications. 3 Select the applications you want to encrypt, and then select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 532 CHAPTER 25 Tip Synchronize your device with your computer frequently to prevent loss of information if intrusion protection is triggered. Keeping Your Information Private 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL To encrypt only the private entries in the applications you selected, check the Encrypt private records only box. Did You Know? Incorrect Quick Unlock attempts are not included in the intrusion protection counter. 5 Select OK, and then select Done. Done Limiting the number of password attempts You can set the number of incorrect password attempts that are allowed before selected information is deleted from your device. This feature, called intrusion protection, protects sensitive information from an intruder who uses an automated means to try every possible combination until the password is found. Use intrusion protection if you keep highly confidential information on your device. [ ! ] IMPORTANT If you limit the number of password attempts, be sure to use Quick Unlock to prevent accidental password attempts while your device is in a purse or pocket. LifeDrive from palmOne 533 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private 0 1 Open Security: a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs . b. Select Security. 2 Set the number of password attempts: a. Select Options and then select Security Options. b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK. c. Select the Intrusion Protection box. Intrusion Protection box d. Enter the number of password attempts that are allowed before selected information on your device is deleted. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 534 CHAPTER 25 Tip The number of password attempts must be between 5 and 99. Keeping Your Information Private 3 Select the information that is deleted after the set number of failed attempts: a. Select the Delete pick list and select one of these options: No Data No information is deleted after the set number of failed attempts. Private Records All entries marked private are deleted after the set number of failed attempts. All Data All information you entered and all applications you installed on your device are deleted after the set number of failed attempts. b. Select OK. 4 Select OK two more times, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 535 CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with private entries or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Managing Info Creating a backup of your information Customizing Entering your owner information in case your device is lost or stolen Maintaining Doing a hard reset Common Questions Answers to frequently asked questions about privacy 536 CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information In this chapter Adding a category Renaming a category Deleting a category Placing information in a category Viewing information by category Related topics If you’re like most people, you use your device to manage your work life and your personal life. Yet these two areas contain so many details: your children’s after-school activities, your conference schedule, your shopping list for the week, and entertainment. Categories help you organize different aspects of your life, no matter how you choose to group them. Benefits of categories • Better organize your information • Easily retrieve the information you need LifeDrive from palmOne 537 CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Did You Know? You can have up to 15 categories in an application. Adding a category Tip Colors make it easy to find the info you need in Calendar. You can add categories in many applications: Contacts, Expense, Memos, Note Pad, Tasks, and palmOne™ Media. (In palmOne Media, categories are called albums.) Place individual entries in these categories to easily get to a group of related items. In addition to putting individual entries into a category, you can also put entire applications into categories. For instance, you may find it convenient to put Expense and Calculator into a category called Money. 0 Tip Add a category in Contacts that contains all of your medical numbers for quick access. Other useful categories in Contacts are Emergency, for fire, ambulance, and police; Children, for your children’s school and friends; and Entertainment, for restaurants or theaters that you visit often. 1 Do one of the following: • To add a category for individual entries in one of the applications above, open that application. • To add a category for applications, go to Applications. 2 Add a new category: a. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Edit Categories. b. Select New and enter the name of the new category. c. Select OK, and then select OK again. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 538 CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip If you want to combine items in different categories, rename one category to the other category name. Renaming a category Did You Know? Some categories, like All and Unfiled, come with your device and cannot be changed. 0 1 Do one of the following: • To rename a category within an application, open that application. • To rename a category for applications, go to Applications. 2 Rename the category: a. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Edit Categories. b. Select the name of the category you want to change, and then select Rename. c. Enter a new category name, and then select OK. d. Select OK again. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 539 CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip In Expense, you can delete a category, including its contents, with the Purge command. Deleting a category Tip To display the category pick list in Calendar Day View, open the Options menu, select Display Options, tap Day, and then check the Show Category List box. If you delete a category, the items in that category will move to the Unfiled category. 0 1 Do one of the following: • To delete a category within an application, open that application. • To delete a category for applications, go to Applications. 2 Go to the Edit Categories dialog box: Calendar Select an event, select Details, select the Category pick list, and then select Edit Categories. All other applications Select the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Edit Categories. 3 Delete the category: a. Select the name of the category you want to delete. b. Select Delete. c. Select Yes d. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 540 CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip You can also enter new information into a category by opening the application, and then selecting the category from the upper-right corner. Select New and enter the information. Placing information in a category You can place individual entries into categories within an application. For example, you may want to place some of your contacts in a category called Medical. You may also find it convenient to view applications in groups. You may want all of your games in one category, or all of your multimedia applications in another. Then you can go right to the group of applications you need. NOTE An entry or application cannot be placed in more than one category. Placing an entry in a category 0 1 Open an application that contains a category option. In Calendar, go to Day View. 2 Open an entry. 3 In Note Pad only: skip to step 5. 4 Open the Details dialog box: Contacts Select Edit, and then select Details. All other applications Select Details. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 541 CHAPTER 26 Tip To place an entry in a different category, simply select a different category from the Category pick list. Using Categories to Organize Information 5 Place the entry in a category: a. Select a category from the Category pick list. Category b. If necessary, select OK. c. If necessary, select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 542 CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Placing an application in a category 0 1 Go to Applications. 2 Open the Category dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Category in the App menu. 3 Place the application in a category: a. Select the pick list next to the application you want to place in a category. b. Select a category, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 543 CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tip In Applications view, scroll through the categories by pressing Right or Left on the 5-way navigator. To view all of the applications on your device, select the All category. Viewing information by category Tip Scroll through the categories in Contacts by repeatedly pressing the Contacts button. 0 1 Do one of the following: • To view entries by category, open an application that contains categories. • To view applications by category, go to Applications. 2 Display the category you want to view: Calendar Select Show Category List, and then select the category you want to view from the pick list. All other applications Select the category you want to view from the pick list in the upper-right corner. Pick list Done LifeDrive from palmOne 544 CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with categories or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Calendar Color-coding your events in Calendar Media Organizing photos or videos into albums Sharing Beaming a category to another Palm Powered™ device 545 CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings In this chapter Checking the current date and time Setting the primary location Choosing secondary locations for other time zones Forget your watch? Or just forget to reset it when you landed in Toronto? Neither matters, as long as you have your device. Not only can you rely on it for the correct time, but you can even set an alarm so you don’t miss that early flight back home. Modifying the locations list Setting the alarm clock Changing the clock display Related topics Benefits of World Clock • Always have the correct time, no matter where you are • No need to carry a separate alarm clock LifeDrive from palmOne 546 » CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Key Term Primary location Typically a city in the time zone in which you live. Checking the current date and time You can easily check the current date and time: a. Go to Applications and select World Clock b. Tap the Calendar . icon in the input area, and select the Agenda View icon . c. Tap the System Info icon on the status bar. Setting the primary location In World Clock, you can set the location, date, and time for a primary location. The settings for this primary location are used by all of the applications on your device. 0. 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock 2 Select the primary location: . Primary location pick list a. Select the primary location pick list. b. Select the location you want to be the primary location. If you need more choices, modify the locations list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 547 CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Did You Know? When the Daylight Savings settings are active, the time changes according to the rule for the primary location. For example, in North America, the time changes at 2:00 a.m.; in Europe, it changes at 1:00 a.m. Setting the date and time for the primary location You can set the date and time in Preferences, as you did during the initial setup of your device, or in World Clock. When you change the date and time in one application, it is automatically changed in the other. 0 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock 2 Select Set Date & Time. 3 Set the date: . Year a. Select the Set Date box. Month b. Select the arrows to select the current year. Day c. Select the current month. d. Select the current day. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 548 CHAPTER 27 Tip Selecting a time zone when creating a new event in Calendar allows you to travel and have your events automatically adjust to the time zone in your new location. Time zones in Calendar work only if you are synchronizing with Outlook or Exchange ActiveSync. Managing Clock Settings 4 Set the time: a. Select the Set Time box. b. Select the hour and minute boxes, and then select the arrows to change them. Hour Minute c. Select AM or PM, and then select OK. 5 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 549 CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Tip If you have friends, family, or colleagues in another time zone, select a city in their zone as your secondary location. When you need to contact them, you can easily check to see what time it is where they are. Choosing secondary locations for other time zones Set World Clock to display the date and time for two other locations. 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select World Clock . Select the pick list next to one of the secondary locations. Pick list 3 Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location. If you need more choices, modify the locations list. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 550 CHAPTER 27 Tip If you know what you’re looking for in a long pick list, use Graffiti® 2 writing to find it faster. Enter the first letter of the word, and then locate your item. Managing Clock Settings Modifying the locations list You can edit the locations list so that the locations you use most often are easy to find. Adding new locations 0 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock 2 Open the Edit List dialog box: . a. Select a location pick list. b. Select Edit List. 3 Add the new location: a. Select Add. b. Scroll through the list to select a location that is in the same time zone as the city you want to add. c. Select OK. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 551 CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings 4 [ & ] OPTIONAL Select each setting you want to change. Name Enter the name of the location. Time Zone Select the time zone for the location. Daylight Saving Time box Check for your device to automatically adjust the date and time for Daylight Saving Time in this location. Start and End dates Select the boxes to change the start and end dates of Daylight Saving Time, if necessary. 5 Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 552 CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Deleting a location 0 1 2 Go to Applications and select World Clock . Select the location you want to delete: a. Select a location pick list. b. Select Edit List. c. Select a location, and then select Remove. 3 Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 553 CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Did You Know? Use World Clock to set an alarm within the next 24 hours. Set alarms outside of this time frame in Calendar. Setting the alarm clock Did You Know? Remember to put your device on local time. If you travel from San Francisco to London, make London your primary location so that all your alarms ring on time, instead of eight hours late. 0 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock 2 Set the alarm: . a. Select the Alarm box. b. Select the time columns to set the hour and minute, and then select OK. NOTE Alarms set in World Clock use the time set for the primary location. Alarm box Tip Set an alarm while you’re working to remind you when to leave to get to your appointment on time. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 554 CHAPTER 27 Tip To turn off an alarm before it sounds, select the Alarm box, and then select Alarm Off. Managing Clock Settings 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL Select the alarm sound and volume: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Alarm Preferences. c. Select the pick lists to select the alarm sound and volume. NOTE This volume setting does not affect the other sounds on your device, including the alarms you set in Calendar. You can change the volume of these other sounds in Preferences. d. Select OK. Done Responding to the alarm clock When the World Clock alarm sounds, select one of these three options: OK Cancel the reminder message and return to the current screen. Snooze Close the alarm reminder message and return to the current screen. The message appears again in five minutes. In the meantime, an indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind you of the upcoming alarm. Go To LifeDrive from palmOne Cancel the reminder message and open World Clock. 555 CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Changing the clock display 0 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock 2 Open the Display Options dialog box: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Display Options. 3 Select any of the following options, and then select OK: Show Multiple Locations Display the secondary locations. Uncheck it to display only the primary location. Show Date Display the date in World Clock. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 556 CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with World Clock or anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Calendar Setting an alarm outside of the next 24 hours Customizing Changing the volume of other system sounds 557 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device In this chapter Customizing Favorites View Customizing Applications View Making the screen easier to read Assigning a button to your frequently used applications Although customizing your device is optional, it’s like changing the preset radio stations in your car. Since you’re probably not driving around with the dealer’s preset radio stations, why not personalize your device, too? Setting the date and time Customizing the way you enter information Selecting sound settings Entering your owner information Conserving battery power Connecting your device to other devices You can easily customize the sound levels, fonts, and screen colors on your device by using preferences and menus. Or customize the Star button to open your most important application with one press. Preference settings can even help extend the life of your device’s battery. Benefits of customizing • • • • Access applications quickly Conserve power Enjoy your device more Make your screen easy to read Customizing network settings Setting up a VPN Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne 558 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Customizing Favorites View You can personalize Favorites View by changing the background image to your favorite photo. You can also change the entries to those you use most often. Changing the background photo in Favorites View Use your favorite photo as the background in Favorites View. 0 1 Go to Favorites. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 559 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 Open the Display Options dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Display Options. 3 Select a photo for the background: a. Check the Background box. b. Select the picture box. c. Select a picture. d. Select Done. 4 Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo, and select OK. Done Changing entries in Favorites Change the entries in Favorites View to include the applications, files, folders, or web links you use most often. LifeDrive from palmOne 560 CHAPTER 28 Did You Know? You can move a favorite to a different location on the Favorites list by opening the Favorite menu and then selecting Rearrange Favorites. Drag the favorite you want to the new location. Customizing Your Device 0 1 Go to Favorites. 2 Open the Edit Favorites dialog box: Tip You can also tap and hold on the favorite you want to change. a. Using the 5-way, highlight the favorite you want to change. b. Tap Menu on the status bar. c. Select Edit Favorite. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 561 CHAPTER 28 Tip You can also add a new favorite to any of the four Favorites pages. Tap and hold the stylus on any blank favorite space to open the Edit Favorite dialog box, and then select and enter the information for the new favorite. Customizing Your Device 3 Change the favorite: a. Select the favorite type from the Type pick list: application, file/folder, or web link. b. Select the application from the Original pick list, select to browse to the file or folder, or select to enter the web address you want. c. Enter a name for your new favorite and select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 562 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Customizing Applications View Use your favorite photo as the background in Applications View. You can also display your application icons in list format with small icons so that you can see more applications without scrolling. 0 1 2 Go to Applications. Open the Display Options dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Display Options. 3 4 Select the View By pick list and select List or Icon as the display format. If you want the last category you viewed to reappear the next time you go to Applications, check the Remember Last Category box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 563 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 5 Select a photo for the background: a. Check the Background box. b. Select the picture box. c. Select a picture. d. Select Done. e. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo. f. Select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 564 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Making the screen easier to read In many applications, you can change the font style to make text easier to read. There are four font styles available. In certain lighting conditions, you may also need to adjust the brightness to read the information on the screen. Changing the screen fonts Small font Small bold font LifeDrive from palmOne Large font Large bold font 565 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 0 1 Open an application. 2 Open the Select Font dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Options, and then select Font. 3 Select the font style you want to use, and then select OK. Small bold Large bold Small Large Done LifeDrive from palmOne 566 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Adjusting the brightness 0 1 2 Tap System Info , which shows the current time, on the status bar. Drag the slider to adjust the brightness level, and then tap outside the dialog box. Done Brightness slider LifeDrive from palmOne 567 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Changing screen colors Choose a new set of text and background colors for all your applications. 0 1 Open Color Theme Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Color Theme. 2 Select a theme, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 568 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Changing handedness orientation of the screen The Handedness preferences enable you to select right-hand or left-hand orientation when you rotate the screen into landscape mode. 0 1 Open Handedness Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Handedness. 2 Select your orientation, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 569 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip To restore all the buttons to the original palmOne settings, select Default. Assigning a button to your frequently used applications Did You Know? You can assign input area icons to different applications also. Tap and hold the input area icon and select an application from the dialog box. Tired of going to Applications View to open an application you use frequently? Use the Buttons Preferences screen to reassign the applications associated with the buttons on the front of your device and the sync button. Customize the Star button so that it opens your most important application, and then reassign the other buttons as needed. For example, if you use Documents often, you can assign Documents to a button so that you don’t have to scroll through Applications View whenever you want to use that application. 0 1 Open Buttons Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Buttons. Select pick list 2 Select the pick list next to the button you want to reassign, and select the application that you want to assign to that button. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 570 CHAPTER 28 » Key Term Full-screen pen stroke A stroke that is drawn from the bottom of the input area to the top of the screen. You can use this stroke as a quick way to do a selected task, such as opening the Graffiti® 2 Help screen. Tip If you have purchased an external modem accessory (sold separately), you can also assign the sync button on the modem by selecting the second pick list. Customizing Your Device 3 Assign the full-screen pen stroke: a. Select More. b. Select the pick list and select the action you want to assign to the full-screen pen stroke. Pick list c. Select OK. 4 Assign the sync button: a. Select HotSync. b. Select the pick list next to the icon labeled Cradle and select the application you want to assign to the button. c. Select OK. 5 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 571 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Did You Know? The location you select also appears as the primary location in World Clock. Setting the date and time You can set the date, time, and location for all the applications on your device that require this information. You can also select the format in which the date, time, and numbers appear. Selecting a location You can set the current date and time based on your location. When you travel to a new time zone, change the Location setting to quickly reset the date and time. Your appointments stay at the time you entered them—no adjustments for time zones. So always enter your schedule based on the time zone you will be in on the day of the event. 0. 1 Open Date & Time Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Date & Time. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 572 CHAPTER 28 Tip You can rename the location to the city where you live. Select the Name field, and then modify the location name. Customizing Your Device 2 Select the location: Name field a. Select the Location pick list, and select a city in your time zone. If you found a city in the list, go to step 3. Tip If you are synchronizing with Outlook on your computer, you can also select a time zone when creating a new event in Calendar No nearby city? Select Edit List, and do steps b through e. b. Select Add. c. Select a city in your time zone, and then select OK. d. Select OK again, and then select Done. e. Select the Location pick list, and select the city you just added. 3 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 573 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Resetting the date and time In most cases you won’t need to reset the date and time. However, you may need to do this if you do a hard reset on your device. 0 1 Open Date & Time Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Date & Time. 2 Select the location. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 574 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 3 Set the date: a. Select the Set Date box. Year arrows b. Select the arrows to select the current year. c. Select the current month. d. Select the current date. 4 Set the time: a. Select the Set Time box. b. Select the hour and minute boxes, and then select the arrows to change them. c. Select AM or PM, and then select OK. NOTE If you’re using a 24-hour clock format, you won’t see the AM and PM options. 5 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 575 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Selecting formats for dates, times, and numbers Would you rather see the time displayed in a 24-hour format, or dates that begin with the month or year? Use the Formats Preferences screen to change these settings and to apply them to all the applications on your device. You can quickly choose the preset formats based on geographic regions where you might use your device. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or PM suffix. You can use the original preset formats or change them based on your personal preferences. 0 1 Open Formats Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Formats. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 576 CHAPTER 28 Tip The country setting changes only the way the date and time look. It doesn’t change your device’s time to that country’s time. To do that, go to Date & Time Preferences or to World Clock. Customizing Your Device 2 Select a country: a. Select the Preset to box to open the Set Country dialog box. b. Select a country. c. Select OK. 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL Customize any of the following preset formats: Time Controls whether the time is displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour format and which symbol separates the numbers. Date Controls the sequence in which the day, month, and year appear and which symbol separates the segments. Week starts Controls whether applications treat Sunday or Monday as the first day of the week. Numbers 4 Controls the decimal and thousands separator symbols. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 577 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Did You Know? You can change the input area anytime by tapping and holding Input on the status bar. Customizing the way you enter information Your device lets you choose how you enter information. You can choose the input area—the area where you write Graffiti® 2 characters—choose Graffiti 2 strokes, and create ShortCuts to make entering information faster. Customizing the input area You can configure your input area with preferences for keyboards or for Graffiti® 2 writing. You can also choose to see your strokes as you write. 0 1 Open Input Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Input. 2 Select the type of input area you want: • Keyboard • Wide • Classic Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 578 CHAPTER 28 Tip Right after you write a character, your device interprets a quick tap on the screen as a period character. If you want to tap a button, either wait a few seconds or tap the Full-screen writing icon on the status bar. Customizing Your Device 3 [ & ] OPTIONAL Uncheck the Show Graffiti Strokes box if you don’t want to have the Graffiti strokes shown as you write a character in the input area. Done Customizing Graffiti® 2 strokes There is more than one way to write certain Graffiti 2 characters. Use the Graffiti 2 Preferences screen to select an alternate stroke shape for these characters. 0 1 Open Graffiti 2 Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Graffiti 2. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 579 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 Select alternate strokes: a. Tap a character to view its alternate stroke. b. Check the box to use the alternate stroke, and then select Done. 3 Repeat step 2 for each stroke you want to reassign, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 580 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You may want to add a space character after the last word in your ShortCut text. This way, a space automatically follows the ShortCut text. Setting up ShortCuts Tip To learn how to use ShortCuts while entering information, see Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts. Did You Know? Your ShortCuts are backed up on your computer when you synchronize. LifeDrive from palmOne Are you looking for a quicker way to enter information on your device? Use ShortCuts to define abbreviations for any words, letters, or numbers that you enter often. You can use your ShortCuts anywhere you enter info with Graffiti 2 writing. 0 1 Open ShortCuts Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select ShortCuts. Continued 581 CHAPTER 28 Tip The ShortCut Text can be 45 characters long. That’s long enough for a name whose spelling you always forget or a complex email address. Customizing Your Device 2 Create a ShortCut: a. Select New. b. On the ShortCut Name line, enter the abbreviation. c. On the ShortCut Text line(s), enter the text you want to insert when you write the abbreviation. d. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 582 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip To delete a ShortCut, open ShortCuts Preferences and select the ShortCut. Select Delete, select Yes, and then select Done. Changing ShortCuts After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time. 0 1 Open ShortCuts Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Shortcuts. 2 Edit the ShortCut: a. Select the ShortCut you want to change. b. Select Edit. c. Make your changes. d. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 583 » CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Key Term Touchscreen Another name for your device’s screen and the internal circuitry that enables it to respond appropriately to taps. Correcting problems with tapping Is your screen not responding to taps? Are you getting unexpected results when you tap? For example, when you tap the number keyboard icon, does the Bluetooth® dialog box open instead? If this happens, it’s time to align the screen. 0 1 Tip If your screen is not responding to taps, use the 5-way navigator to open Touchscreen Preferences. » Key Term Calibration The process of aligning your device’s touch-sensitive screen so that when you tap an element on the screen, your device detects exactly what you want it to do. Open Touchscreen Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Touchscreen. 2 Tap the targets on the screen as precisely as possible, and then select Done. NOTE You need to tap at least three targets—maybe more if you don’t tap carefully. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 584 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You can choose different types of sounds for Calendar, Tasks, and World Clock. Go to the application, open the Options menu, and then select Preferences. Selecting sound settings Are sounds too soft or too loud? Set the volume levels for the system, game, and alarm tones, or turn sounds off altogether with the Silent profile. 0 1 Did You Know? When you connect headphones to your device, the external speaker is automatically silenced, the Sounds & Alerts settings are maintained, and all volume levels are automatically adjusted for use with headphones. Open Sounds & Alerts Preferences: Profile boxes a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Sounds & Alerts. 2 Select Custom, Silent, or All Off. 3 If you selected Silent or All Off in step 2, select Done. If you selected Custom in step 2, select the System Sound, Game Sound, Alarm Sound, and Alarm LED pick lists and select the volume level for each sound; then select Done. Done 0 LifeDrive from palmOne 585 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip In addition to entering owner information, you can assign a name to your device for Bluetooth communication. Entering your owner information Did You Know? If you use Security Preferences to turn off and lock your device with a password, your owner info appears when you select the Owner button the next time you turn on your device. Tip If you assigned a password in Security Preferences, you must select Unlock and enter your password to change your owner info. LifeDrive from palmOne It’s a good idea to enter information that could help someone contact you if you ever lose your device (if there’s enough battery power to turn it on). By default, the Owner Preferences screen contains the information you entered when you installed the software installation CD and set up your device, but you can update or add to this information. Owner information does not include your username or passwords. 0 1 Open Owner Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Owner. 2 Modify or enter the text, and then select Done. Done 586 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip You can also save battery power by turning Keylock on to prevent your device from turning on accidentally. Conserving battery power You can save battery power by adjusting the Power Preferences settings. NOTE The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your device. When you recharge your device, all of your existing information in program memory and on the drive reappears. Selecting power-saving settings The Power Preferences screen enables you to set power consumption options. 0 1 Open Power Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Power. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 587 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 Select the pick lists to change any of the following settings, and then select Done. Auto-off after Select how quickly your device automatically turns off after a period of inactivity: 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. On while charging Select whether your device stays on continuously when it is connected to the AC charger. When this option is off, you can still turn on your device to view your info while your device charges, but it turns off automatically after a period of inactivity. Beam Receive Select whether you can receive beamed information on your device. Turn this setting on to receive beamed info, or turn it off to prevent receiving beamed info. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 588 » CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Key Term ISP Acronym for Internet service provider. This is the service you use to connect to the Internet, such as AOL, CompuServe, or Earthlink. Connecting your device to other devices Did You Know? You cannot rename or delete the preset connection settings. NOTE You do not need to use Connection Preferences if you are using the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology to connect your device to another device or using the Wi-Fi® functionality to connect your device to a Wi-Fi network. See the Bluetooth and Wi-Fi chapters for connection setup instructions. Use Connection Preferences for other connection types. Connection Preferences let you connect your device to other devices. You can use preset connection settings, modify the preset settings, or create your own connection settings from scratch. The list of preset connections varies depending on the applications you’ve added to your device. For example, you can create a connection between the IR port of your device and a modem so that you can dial in to your ISP or corporate network. The modem can be attached to or within a mobile phone or other device containing an IR port. (Some infrared phones can act as modems. To set up a phone connection, you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone enabled with data services and a driver for your phone. Check www.palmOne.com for available phone drivers or contact the phone manufacturer.) Changing the preset connection settings The following steps show you how to adjust the communication speed in the preset IR to a PC/Handheld connection setting. You can similarly edit other connections or settings. LifeDrive from palmOne 589 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 0 1 Open Connection Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Connection. 2 Open the Edit Connection dialog box: a. Select the IR to PC/device connection. b. Select Edit. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 590 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 3 Change the speed setting: a. Select Details. b. Select the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed. c. Select OK. d. Select OK again, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 591 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip To delete a connection that you created, select it on the Connection Preferences screen, and then select Delete. Creating your own connection settings If none of the preset connection settings are close to what you need, or if you’re already using all the connections as they are, you can create a new connection. NOTE See the Bluetooth and Wi-Fi chapters for instructions on setting up a new connection using the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology or Wi-Fi functionality on your device. 0 1 Open Connection Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Connection. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 592 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 From the Connection Preferences screen, select New. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 593 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 3 Enter the basic settings: Name Enter a name for your connection settings. This name will appear on the Connection Preferences screen so that you can select your connection later. Connect to Select the type of device you want to connect to: PC, Modem, or Local Area Network. Via Select the method you want to use to connect to the device you selected: Bluetooth—the Bluetooth radio on your device; Cradle/Cable—the USB sync cable that came with your device; Infrared—the IR port on your device. NOTE The Dialing and Volume settings won’t appear unless you select Modem as the Connect to setting. Dialing Select whether your modem uses TouchTone™ or Rotary dialing. Volume Select the volume level for your modem’s speaker: Off, Low, Medium, or High. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 594 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 4 Enter the details settings: a. Select Details. b. Select the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed. c. Select the Flow Ctl pick list and select whether the connection uses flow control: Automatic Your device determines when to use flow control. On Flow control is always on. Off Flow control is always off. d. For a modem connection, enter the initialization string. e. Select OK. 5 Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 595 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip If your phone doesn’t appear on the list, you need to install the phone settings for your phone onto your device. Connecting your device to a mobile phone NOTE You do not need to use Phone Preferences if you are using the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology to connect your device to a mobile phone enabled with Bluetooth technology. See the Bluetooth chapter for connection setup instructions. Phone Preferences let you configure your device to exchange messages and dial phone numbers when your device is connected to a GSM mobile phone (sold separately). The GSM mobile phone account must also include data services. 0 1 Open Phone Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Phone. 2 Select the connection: a. Select the Connection pick list and select your mobile phone from the list. b. Select Test to make sure the settings work with your phone. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 596 CHAPTER 28 [ ! ] Before You Begin You need the following: • A mobile phone with a Bluetooth radio or an IR port (sold separately) • A wireless service provider account that includes high-speed data services or that supports dial-up connections (additional fees may apply) • An ISP account or a corporate remote access account (additional fees may apply) • Connection Preferences settings for your mobile phone enabled with IR or Bluetooth wireless technology LifeDrive from palmOne Customizing Your Device Customizing network settings Your device includes software that lets you connect your device to your Internet service provider (ISP) or to a dial-in (remote access) server using a mobile phone. After you configure your network settings, you can establish a connection either by using the menus from the Network Preferences screen or by using a third-party application. Setting up a service profile Service profiles store the network settings for your ISP or dial-in server. You can create, save, and reuse service profiles. You can create additional service profiles from scratch or by duplicating an existing profile and editing the information. 0 1 Open Network Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Network. Continued 597 CHAPTER 28 Tip Instead of creating a new profile, you can copy an existing profile and change the settings. Select the profile you want to copy, and then open the Service menu and select Duplicate. Customizing Your Device 2 Service Select the Service pick list and select your ISP or your dial-in server type from the list. If your ISP or server type isn’t on the list, select New and enter a name for the service profile. User Name Enter your username. This is the part of your email address that’s before the @ sign and it’s the name that you use when you log in to your ISP or your dial-in server. This field can contain multiple lines of text, but only two lines appear onscreen. Did You Know? Most dial-in servers do not accept spaces in the username. Tip If you’re concerned about security, don’t enter a password. Just leave the word “Prompt” in the Password box and your device will ask you to enter a password each time you log in. Enter the basic settings: Password Enter the password you use to log in to your ISP or dial-in server, and then select OK. The word “Assigned” appears in this box and you don’t need to enter a password when you log in. Connection Select the Connection pick list and select the method you want to use to connect to your ISP or to a dial-in server. See Connecting your device to other devices for info on creating and configuring connection settings. 3 If you’re using a phone or modem connection, enter the phone settings: a. Select the Phone box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 598 CHAPTER 28 Tip It’s a good idea to add at least three commas before your calling card number to allow for the cue delay. Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds. Customizing Your Device Cont’d. b. Enter any of the following settings, and then select OK: Phone # Enter the phone number for your ISP or dial-in server. Dial prefix Check the Dial prefix box, and then enter the number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line. For example, many offices require that you first dial 9 to dial a number outside the building. Disable call waiting If your phone has Call Waiting, check the Disable call waiting box, and then enter the code to disable Call Waiting. Call Waiting can cause your session to end if you receive a call while you are connected. Contact your local phone company for the code that is appropriate for you. Use calling card If you want to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or dial-in server, check the Use calling box to select it. Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Because MCI works differently, enter the MCI calling card number in the Phone # field and the phone number in the Use calling card field. 4 Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 599 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press Down on the 5-way. To see more information, open the Options menu and select View Log. Connecting to your service After you set up your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection to your ISP or your company’s network (dial-in server) is easy. 0 1 Open Network Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Network. 2 Make the connection: a. Make sure the service profile you want to use appears in the Service field. If not, select it. b. Select Connect. 3 End the connection when you’ve finished using it: a. Select Disconnect. b. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 600 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Adding details to a service profile If you’re using one of the predefined service profiles, you probably need to enter only your username, password, and telephone number. If you’re creating a new service profile, you may need to use the Details dialog box to add more information to your service profile. 0 1 Open Network Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Network. 2 Open the Details dialog box: a. Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add details to. b. Select Details. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 601 CHAPTER 28 » Key Term DNS Domain name system. The Internet uses this system to translate the names of host computers into IP addresses. A DNS number identifies the server that handles the translation. Customizing Your Device 3 NOTE Ask your ISP or system administrator if you need information on any of these settings. Connection type Select the pick list and choose the communication protocol for this service: PPP, SLIP, or CSLIP. Most email applications use the PPP or SLIP protocols. Idle timeout Select the pick list and select how long your device waits before dropping the connection with your ISP or dial-in server when you switch out of an application that requires a connection: 1 Minute, 2 Minutes, 3 Minutes, or Never. Each IP address has four numbers (from 0 to 255) that are separated by periods. » Key Term IP Internet protocol. Everyone who logs in to the Internet needs a unique identifier (an IP address). Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP address upon login while others assign a permanent IP address. Adjust any of the following settings: Query DNS Check the Query DNS box if you’re not sure whether you need to enter DNS addresses. Many systems do not require that you enter DNS addresses. If you do need DNS addresses, uncheck the DNS box, tap the space to the left of each period in the Primary and Secondary DNS fields, and then enter the appropriate sections of each address. IP Address Check the IP Address box to use a temporary IP address. Uncheck the IP Address box to enter a permanently assigned address. 4 Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 602 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Deleting a service profile 0 1 Open Network Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Network. 2 Delete the service you want to delete: a. Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to delete. b. Open the menus. c. Select Delete in the Service menu. d. Select OK, and then select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 603 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip Windows You can also create login scripts with a text editor on your desktop computer. Create a file with the extension PNC, and then install the file on your device using Quick Install. Creating login scripts Did You Know? Your login scripts can also use non-ASCII and literal characters. A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network server—for example, your corporate network or your ISP. A login script is associated with a specific service profile created in Network Preferences. A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if you log in to the corporate servers from your device using a phone/modem or network connection. The script is generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need it. It automates the events that must take place to establish a connection between your device and the corporate servers. You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the Login Script dialog box. Some commands, such as Send, require you to supply additional information. If the command requires additional info, a field appears to the right of the command where you can enter the info. 0 1 Open Network Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select Network. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 604 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 Open the Login Script dialog box: a. Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add a script to. b. Select Details. c. Select Script. 3 Select the End pick list and select one of the following commands from the list: Wait For Tells your device to wait for specific characters from the server before executing the next command. Wait For Prompt Detects a challenge-response prompt coming from the server, and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value. You then enter the challenge value into your token card, which in turn generates a response value for you to enter on your device. This is a two-part command that is separated by a vertical bar (|) on the input line. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 605 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Cont’d. Send Transmits specific characters to the server that you’re connecting to. Send CR Transmits a carriage return or line feed (LF) character to the server. Send User ID Transmits the User Name field from Network Preferences. Send Password Transmits the Password field from Network Preferences. If you didn’t enter a password, this command prompts you to enter one. The Password command is usually followed by a Send CR command. Delay Tells your device to wait a specific number of seconds before going to the next command in the login script. Get IP Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your device. This command is used with SLIP connections. Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter certain text (for example, a password or a security code). End 4 Identifies the last line in the login script. Complete the script: a. Repeat step 3 until the login script is complete. b. Select OK, and then select OK again. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 606 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tip For more info on creating plug-in applications, contact Developer Support at PalmSource. Adding plug-in applications You can create plug-in applications containing script commands that extend the functionality of the built-in script commands. A plug-in application is a standard PRC application that you install on your device just like any other application. After you install the plug-in application, you can use the new script commands in a login script. For example, you might use a plug-in application in the following situations: • You need the login script to properly respond to different connection scenarios defined by the authentication server. • You want to perform conditional tests and branching as part of the login process. Plug-in applications have the following characteristics: • Written in C language • Compiled into a device executable • Called properly from a login script • Able to return control to a login script after it terminates • Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS® software, such as Metrowerks CodeWarrior tools. LifeDrive from palmOne 607 CHAPTER 28 [ ! ] Before You Begin You must purchase and install a compatible VPN client onto your device. You also need the VPN settings from your corporate system administrator. Did You Know? Once you have installed and set up a VPN, you can connect or disconnect VPN from within the web browser. Customizing Your Device Setting up a VPN If you want to use your device to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your device. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company’s firewall (security layer). Without a VPN, you cannot pass through the firewall to gain access to the server. You need to set up a VPN to access a corporate server in either of the following situations: • Your company’s wireless local area network (LAN) is located outside the firewall. • Your company’s wireless LAN is located inside the firewall, but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location or at home). Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate network. If you need a VPN, you must either use the Enterprise Software link on the software installation CD to download and purchase a VPN client, or purchase and install a thirdparty VPN client, to use this feature. Setting up a VPN account on your device 0 1 Open VPN Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select VPN. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 608 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device 2 Set up a VPN account on your device: a. Select the Add Account box. b. Follow the instructions to enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator. c. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 609 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Establishing a VPN connection 0 1 Open VPN Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select VPN. 2 Establish a VPN connection: a. Select a VPN account from the VPN Account pick list. b. Select Connect VPN. c. If prompted, enter your VPN username and password. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 610 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Ending a VPN connection 0 1 Open VPN Preferences: a. Go to Applications. b. Select Prefs . c. Select VPN. 2 Select Disconnect VPN. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 611 CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Support If you’re having problems with customization or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Your Mobile Manager Locating the input area and other controls on your device Moving Around • Opening applications • Using menus Entering Information • Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter information • Using ShortCuts to quickly enter text phrases Connecting Customizing Bluetooth communication settings Privacy Keeping information private by locking your device with a password Categories Creating categories so you can organize your applications and information World Clock Viewing the date and time in other cities 612 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device In this chapter What type of expansion cards can I use? How can expansion cards help me? A Chinese proverb says, “Life just gives you time and space; it's up to you to fill it.” But doesn’t it always seem that no matter how much space you have, you still need more? Removing an expansion card Inserting an expansion card Opening an application on an expansion card Opening files on an expansion card Viewing card information Renaming a card Copying applications to an expansion card Removing all information from a card Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and limitless answer to the storage dilemma. When one card becomes full, simply use another card. Use the Camera Companion application on your device to work with photos and videos from a digital camera card. Also use expansion cards to install and run cool games and other types of software, from dictionaries to travel guides, on your device. Benefits of expansion cards • Import photos and videos from a digital camera card, and then delete them from the card to use it again • Back up info • Add more games and other software • Add accessories • Store, carry, and exchange info Related topics LifeDrive from palmOne 613 » CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Key Term SDIO An acronym for Secure Digital input/ output. What type of expansion cards can I use? Tip Looking for a handy way to carry your expansion cards? You can purchase a variety of carrying cases. Visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive and click the Accessories link. Your device is compatible with SDIO, SD, and MultiMediaCard expansion cards. SDIO expansion cards let you add accessories to your device. SD and MultiMediaCard expansion cards let you store information and applications. Your device also works with memory cards from your digital camera. How can expansion cards help me? Work with photos and videos. Insert a memory card from your digital camera and use the Camera Companion application on your device to import photos and videos and work with them on your device or copy them to your computer. Back up info. Make a copy of your important information for safekeeping in case your device becomes damaged or is stolen. Add games and other software. Purchase popular games, dictionaries, travel guides, and more. To check out the variety of expansion cards available for your device, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive and click the Accessories link. Add accessories. Attach SDIO accessories, such as a presentation module, to your device. Store all your info. Never worry about running out of space on your device. Purchase as many expansion cards as you need to store your music, photos, videos, and other information. Expansion cards come in a variety of capacities, and they’re very small, easy to store, and affordably priced. LifeDrive from palmOne 614 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip To prevent damaging the card and the info on it, always wait for your device to finish writing to the expansion card before you remove the card from the slot. Removing an expansion card NOTE Your device comes with a dummy card inserted into the expansion card slot. You must remove this card before you can put a real card into the slot. 0 1 2 Push lightly against the card with your thumb until you hear the confirmation tone. Slide the card out of the expansion slot. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 615 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Inserting an expansion card 0 1 2 Insert the card into the expansion slot with the label side facing the front of the device. Push the card in with your thumb until you feel the card “click” in place and hear the confirmation tone. NOTE No confirmation tone? Check the Sounds & Alerts Preferences to make sure the System Sound setting is turned on. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 616 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Did You Know? You can install applications and other files to an expansion card during synchronization. Opening an application on an expansion card Tip When the highlight on Applications View is not active, you can press and hold the Select button to open the category pick list. When you insert an expansion card into the expansion slot, your device adds the expansion card to the category list in the upper-right corner of Applications View. You can easily switch between applications installed on your device and on the expansion card. NOTE Some applications may not run correctly when you install them on an expansion card. Try installing these applications on your device instead. If you still have problems, contact the developer. 0 1 2 3 Insert the expansion card. Go to Applications and select the expansion card from the category pick list. Category pick list Select an application icon to open that application. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 617 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip Use LifeDrive™ Manager (Windows only) to install applications and transfer folders and files from your Windows computer to an expansion card. Opening files on an expansion card You can open files on an expansion card when you insert the card into the expansion slot. 0 1 Open the application associated with the files you want to open. 2 Insert the expansion card. 3 Select the entry you want to view. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 618 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip Reading and writing info on an expansion card uses more battery power than doing the same task on your device. If you have enough space on your device, consider copying the info to your device. Viewing card information It’s easy to forget which files you put on a particular expansion card. When you have a card inserted into the expansion slot, use the Card Info application to view the card name and type, available storage space, and a summary of the card’s contents. Go to Applications and select Card Info . Card name Space available Tip If your device’s battery is very low, access to the expansion card may be disabled. If this occurs, recharge your device as soon as possible. Summary of contents Did You Know? You can view and access files or folders on an expansion card using the Files application on your device, and manage your files on a card using LifeDrive Manager or Drive Mode. LifeDrive from palmOne 619 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip You can also use the Files application to rename your card. Renaming a card The expansion card name appears in the category pick list and in other lists that let you choose where to store your info. When you buy a new card, give it a name that helps you remember what’s on the card. You can rename the card later if you decide to store different info on the card. 0 1 Insert an expansion card. 2 Go to Applications and select Card Info 3 . Open the Rename Card dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Rename Card on the Card menu. 4 Enter the new name for the card, and then select Rename. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 620 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tip If you use a card reader to view your card on a computer, the file names may differ from the names you see on your device. Copying applications to an expansion card Did You Know? Some applications, such as Media, let you copy or move info between your device and an expansion card. See the information on each application for details. 0 1 Insert the expansion card, and then go to Applications. 2 Open the Copy dialog box: a. Open the menus. b. Select Copy on the App menu. 3 Copy the application: NOTE A lock appears next to applications that are copy-protected. You cannot copy or beam these applications. a. Select the Copy From pick list and select Device. b. Select the application you want to copy. c. Select Copy. d. Select Done. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 621 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Removing all information from a card Formatting a card removes all of its info and prepares it to accept new applications and files. [ ! ] IMPORTANT We do not recommend formatting backup cards. Formatting removes the backup application and turns the card into a blank memory card. 0 1 Insert an expansion card. 2 Go to Applications and select Card Info 3 Format the card: . a. Open the menus. b. Select Format Card on the Card menu. c. When asked if you want to format the card, select OK. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 622 CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device Tips & Tricks Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Sharing • Exchanging applications and information with other Palm Powered™ devices by exchanging cards or beaming items between devices • Sending applications and information to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device Support If you’re having problems with expansion cards or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne Managing Info Adding applications from your computer to an expansion card, and installing other files such as photos, videos, or music 623 CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Your device is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide you with years of trouble-free service. Taking care of your device helps keep it working properly and ensures that it’s available when you need it. Device do’s and don’ts To protect your device from damage and ensure reliable performance, follow these guidelines. Device do’s • Always store your device in the included pouch when not in use. • Use only the stylus to tap the screen—no pens, pencils, paper clips, or other sharp objects. • Use only the supplied AC charger to charge your device. • Keep the battery charged. • Keep the screen free of dust (or anything else that could make it dirty). • For general cleaning, use a soft, damp cloth. If the screen becomes dirty, use a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window-cleaning solution. • Use only 3.5mm stereo headphones (sold separately) in your device’s headphone jack. LifeDrive from palmOne 624 CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Tip Your device contains a hard drive and other components that may become warm when used for extended periods of time. This is normal and should not affect the performance or reliability of your device. • Be sure to get rid of any static electricity buildup before you connect your device to any cable or accessory. • If you are using your device in Drive Mode for an extended period of time or you are using the Camera Companion application, or if the battery is low while in Drive Mode or while using Camera Companion, keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet. • Synchronize often to maintain a backup copy of your important information on your computer. Device don’ts [ ! ] IMPORTANT Do not open your device for any reason. There are no user-serviceable parts inside. Attempting to remove the hard drive voids the warranty on your device. • Do not drop, bang, or otherwise cause a strong impact to your device. If you drop the device while the amber indicator light is flashing—indicating that the hard drive is processing information—you may damage the hard drive. • Do not carry your device in your back pocket; you might sit on it by mistake. • Do not let your device get wet; don’t even leave it in a damp location. • Do not expose your device to very hot or cold temperatures, including placing it near a heater, leaving it in the trunk of a car, or setting it by a window in direct sunlight. • Do not carry or use your device at extremely high altitudes, unless you’re in an airplane. • Do not place your device near strong magnetic fields such as wireless modems. This could cause loss of information on the hard drive. LifeDrive from palmOne 625 CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Resetting your device On rare occasions your device may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen. In this case, you need to reset your device. Doing a soft reset A soft reset tells your device to stop what it’s doing and start over again. None of your information will be lost. After a soft reset, a screen appears that lets you reset the date and time, if needed. To do a soft reset, use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the bottom of your device. Reset button If your device does not respond after a soft reset, you need to do a hard reset. LifeDrive from palmOne 626 CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Doing a hard reset Only do a hard reset if a soft reset doesn’t solve your problem, or if you want to clear all of your information from your device. [ ! ] IMPORTANT A hard reset deletes all records and entries stored on your device, including the username that identifies the device. This is another reason why it's important to synchronize often, so you have an up-to-date backup available. Before you do a hard reset, be sure to do a full sync. 0 1 2 3 Slide the power switch to the right and hold it in that position. While holding the switch to the right, use the tip of the stylus (or a similar object without a sharp tip) to gently press and release the reset button on the bottom of your device. Wait for the reset screen to appear, and then release the power switch. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 627 CHAPTER 30 Tip When doing a Secure Erase reset, be sure that the AC charger is connected to your device and plugged into an outlet. Tip When the reset screen appears, press Center on the 5-way to cancel the hard reset and keep all info on your device. Maintaining Your Device 4 On the reset screen, do one of the following: Quick Erase Press Up on the 5-way navigator to do a Quick Erase reset. This eliminates user information on the drive in such a way that there is no info available to anyone using the device. A Quick Erase reset takes approximately 5 minutes. Secure Erase Press Down on the 5-way to do a Secure Erase reset. This completely deletes all user info on the drive. A Secure Erase reset takes about 20-25 minutes. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Do a Secure Erase reset if you are turning the device over to a new owner. A Secure Erase helps prevent your files from being restored or recompiled by a new owner who might remove the hard drive and use a drive reader to access your information. Do a Quick Erase reset for a regular hard reset, to get your device to wake up and respond again. NOTE If you use a password to protect your device, you must do a Secure Erase when you hard reset your device; the Quick Erase option does not appear on the reset screen. During the reset process, a status screen appears with the words “Quick Erase” or “Secure Erase” and a progress bar, followed by screens showing the palmOne, Palm Powered™ and LifeDrive™ logos. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 628 CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device 5 6 When prompted, tap to align the screen, and then select the language you want to use on your device. A screen appears showing the palmOne logo and a progress bar. When the Welcome screen appears, the hard reset is complete. Follow the instructions to set up your device. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 629 CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device Restoring your information after a hard reset If you synchronized before doing a hard reset, you can now put that information back on your device. However, you may need to re-enter some of your personal settings, as well as your colorcoded categories in Calendar. WINDOWS ONLY 0 1 Open the Custom menu in the HotSync® application: a. Click the HotSync Manager the screen. icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of b. Click Custom. 2 Select the correct username from the list at the top of the box. Continued LifeDrive from palmOne 630 CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device 3 Set the transfer options: a. Select an application in the Conduit list, and then click Change. b. Select Desktop overwrites device. NOTE This change applies only to the next synchronization. c. Click OK. 4 5 Repeat step 3 for the other applications in the list that you want to restore, and then click Done. Synchronize your device with your computer. Done LifeDrive from palmOne 631 CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device My Device Make your device uniquely yours. For great tips, software, accessories, and more, visit www.palmOne.com/ mylifedrive. Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics: Managing Info Creating a backup of your information Customizing Customizing your device again after doing a hard reset Support If you’re having problems with resets or with anything else on your device, go to www.palmOne.com/ support. LifeDrive from palmOne 632 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions. Setup Nothing happens when I insert the CD. WINDOWS ONLY 1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Run. 2. Click Browse and navigate to your CD-ROM drive. 3. Select Autorun, click Open, and then click OK. I cannot install Palm® Desktop software. WINDOWS ONLY • Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer. • Close any open applications. • Make sure your computer has at least 170MB of disk space available. • Delete all temporary files. LifeDrive from palmOne 633 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions • Run ScanDisk (or another disk verification tool) on your computer. • Install the latest Windows software updates to your computer. • If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered™ device, remove any previous version(s) of Palm® Desktop software by clicking Start, navigating to Settings, and clicking Control Panel. Click Add or Remove Programs. • Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software. MAC ONLY • Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer. • Quit any open applications. • Make sure your computer has at least 190MB of disk space available. • Install the latest Mac software updates to your computer. • If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered device, remove any previous version(s) of Palm Desktop software. • Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software. LifeDrive from palmOne 634 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Device [ ! ] IMPORTANT Do not open your device; there are no serviceable parts inside. Opening your device voids the warranty and is not recommended under any circumstances. I want to see how much battery life I have left. A battery icon appears at the top of Favorites and Applications views. Check the icon periodically to see if your device needs to be recharged. If the battery becomes low, a message appears on the screen prompting you to recharge the battery. I’m not sure when I need to recharge my device. We recommend that you recharge your device for at least half an hour every day. Ideally, connect your device to a power source every night and recharge it while you sleep. My battery is drained. The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained completely. When you recharge your device, all of your existing information, both in program memory and on the hard drive, should appear. My battery drains too quickly. You can conserve battery life by doing any of the following: • Adjust the screen brightness. • Reduce the Auto-off setting. • Use Keylock to prevent your device from turning on by accident. • Stop music or video playback when not in use. LifeDrive from palmOne 635 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Tip After a soft reset, the Preferences screen appears with the Date & Time option highlighted so you can reset the date and time if necessary. • Keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet when using Drive Mode or Camera Companion for an extended period of time. • Respond to or cancel alerts promptly. • Turn off Bluetooth® wireless technology and Wi-Fi® functionality when not in use. • If using Auto Sync to automatically retrieve email messages, set the time interval to one hour or less often. • Minimize use of the expansion slot. When I connect my device to the AC charger, it does not charge. • Confirm that your device is firmly connected to the AC charger. • Confirm that your AC charger is plugged into an AC outlet that has power. A lightning bolt over the battery icon indicates that your device is charging. If your battery is completely drained, you’ll need to charge it for a few minutes before you can turn it on and see the battery icon. My device is not responding. On rare occasions your device may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen. If this happens, first check that Keylock is not turned on. If Keylock is off and your device is still not responding, you need to reset your device. A soft reset tells your device to stop and start over again. This does not affect any of the information or applications on your device. NOTE If you had a network connection that was cut off, your device may not respond for up to 30 seconds. Wait 30 seconds before performing a soft reset. LifeDrive from palmOne 636 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Tip When you purge or delete items, you are given the option to save an archive copy on your computer the next time you synchronize. If your device does not respond after a soft reset, you need to perform a hard reset. If your device still does not respond after a reset, check your third-party applications for incompatible applications. I don’t see anything on my device’s screen. • Press an application button to ensure that your device is turned on. • If your device was exposed to cold, make sure it is at room temperature. • Charge your device. • Perform a soft reset. If your device still doesn’t turn on, perform a hard reset. I get a warning message telling me my storage volume is full. The term “storage volume” refers to your device’s program memory. If you get a message that your program memory is full, try the following: • If you have installed additional applications on your device, remove them to recover memory. • Purge items from Calendar and Tasks. This deletes Tasks items and past Calendar events from the memory of your device. • Delete unused memos, photos, and other items, or save them to an expansion card. • Move infrequently used applications to the Applications folder on the hard drive. Note that some applications must be installed in program memory in order to run correctly. My device becomes warm when I use it for extended periods of time. Your device contains a hard drive and other components that may become warm when used for extended periods of time. This is normal and should not affect the performance or reliability of your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 637 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions My device keeps turning itself off. Your device is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity. This period can be set at 30 seconds or at one, two, or three minutes. Check the Auto-off after setting on the Power Preferences screen. My device is not making any sounds. Check the System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings. I get a blank screen when I reset my device. It takes a little while for your device to reset when you press the reset button. During a soft reset, you see a progress bar, then a screen with the Palm Powered™ logo. Resetting is complete when the Date & Time Preferences screen appears. The current date and time are incorrect. The current date and time are tied to the Location setting. If you change the date and time without changing the Location setting, the current date and time may appear incorrect. My application is responding slowly. WINDOWS ONLY If you are transferring files using LifeDrive™ Manager and you are working with a large application on your device such as a game, the application may perform slowly. Wait until the file transfer has finished before you use the application. LifeDrive from palmOne 638 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Moving around I can’t find the icon I want in Applications View. • Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select All. You may need to scroll down a bit, but you should now see an icon for each of the applications on your device. • The application you want may be installed on your device’s hard drive. To view these applications, select the category pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select LifeDrive. • Some of the applications that come with your device are not preinstalled. You need to install these extra applications from the software installation CD. • If you have an expansion card inserted in the expansion slot on your device, the application you want may be installed on the card instead of on your device. To view the applications installed on the card, select the pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select the expansion card’s name from the list. Entering information My device doesn’t respond to taps correctly. If your device is not responding to taps correctly, you need to align the screen. When I tap Menu on the status bar, nothing happens. • Tap the upper-left corner of the screen to try to open the menus. • Align the screen and try tapping Menu again. • If nothing happens, you may be in an application or screen that does not use menus. Switch to a different application and try tapping Menu. If it works in the second application, then the first does not use menus. • If tapping Menu does not work in the second application, try aligning the screen again. LifeDrive from palmOne 639 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I can’t get my device to recognize my handwriting. For your device to recognize handwriting input with the stylus, you need to use Graffiti® 2 writing. Use the Graffiti 2 help to learn how to write characters. NOTE Your device recognizes strokes entered with the stylus other than Graffiti 2 strokes in the Note Pad application only. • Make the Graffiti 2 character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area, not on the display part of the screen. If you want to write on the display part of the screen, turn full-screen writing on. • Write Graffiti 2 strokes for lowercase letters in the left side, strokes for capital letters in the middle, and strokes for numbers in the right side of the Graffiti 2 writing area. • Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in shift mode or in Punctuation Shift mode. The info I entered does not appear in an application. • Check the Categories pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View. Select All to display all the records for the application. • Did you set private records to be hidden? Check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records. • Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Make sure Show Completed Tasks is selected. I don’t know how to save the info I entered in an application. Each time you complete an entry such as a contact, memo, or note, your device automatically saves the information you entered. You don’t have to do anything special to save your info. To protect your info and create a backup of your info, do a full sync often to back up the info on your device to your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 640 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Tip Need more help with synchronizing your device? Open Palm Desktop software, go to the Help menu, and select HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide. Synchronizing I can’t synchronize my device with my computer. NOTE You must install the software installation CD before you can synchronize. • Make sure the USB sync cable is connected securely. • Make sure the date on your computer matches the date on your device. • Read the HotSync log for the user account for which you are synchronizing. WINDOWS ONLY Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make sure Local USB has a checkmark next to it. If not, click it. NOTE If you don’t see the HotSync Manager icon, click Start in the Windows taskbar, and then select Programs. Go to the palmOne program group and select HotSync Manager. MAC ONLY • Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled: Open the Palm folder and double-click the HotSync Manager icon. On the HotSync Controls tab, be sure Enabled is selected. If it is not, click it. • Disconnect the USB sync cable from your computer, and then reconnect the cable and restart your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 641 CHAPTER 31 [ ! ] Before You Begin You must have completed CD installation and chosen Palm Desktop software as your desktop application for synchronization in order to switch to Outlook. Note that you can choose Outlook as your synchronization software for Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos during CD installation. Common Questions When I synchronize, nothing happens on Palm Desktop software, and my device times out. • Perform a soft reset. • Make sure that HotSync Manager is running on your computer. • Make a copy of the folder containing your information. This folder is named with either your full username or a shortened version of the name. Uninstall and then reinstall Palm Desktop software. • Turn on your device, and go to Applications. Select HotSync , and then select Local. I want to change from synchronizing my device with Palm Desktop software to synchronizing with Outlook. WINDOWS ONLY During CD installation, you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your device. You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time. But if Microsoft Outlook already contains all of your contacts, appointments, tasks, and notes, you can change your synchronization method so that your device synchronizes with Outlook instead. You can also change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software. NOTE If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in Outlook. You can also set up the VersaMail® application to synchronize email messages on your device with email in Outlook. Other info, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software. 1. Insert the CD into your computer. 2. Select Change your synchronization method. 3. Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use. LifeDrive from palmOne 642 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I can’t synchronize my device with Microsoft Outlook. WINDOWS ONLY NOTE If you choose to synchronize your device with Outlook, information from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in Outlook. Other information, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software. • Click the HotSync Manager icon and select Custom. Check the following: • Make sure that you have the correct username selected from the drop-down list. • Make sure that the applications you want are set to synchronize the files. If not, select each application, click Change, and then choose Synchronize the files. • Make sure that the correct application name is selected. For example, the older version of Calendar was called Date Book. If you have upgraded from an older device, make sure that Calendar is set to Synchronize the files, and Date Book is set to Do Nothing. • If you synchronize your device with more than one computer, click Settings and select Enable synchronization to multiple PCs for each application you want to synchronize. This helps avoid duplicating the same information on a single computer. NOTE Check the Set as default box to use this setting each time you synchronize. Otherwise, it applies during the next synchronization only. • Be sure that the application you want is installed. Reinstall the HotSync Manager and make sure that the application is selected. • Reinstall Palm Desktop software and select the option to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook. I can’t synchronize wirelessly using my device’s Bluetooth technology. • Make sure that the HotSync Manager is running on your desktop computer. The HotSync Manager icon must appear in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. • Click the HotSync Manager icon LifeDrive from palmOne and verify that there is a checkmark next to Local. 643 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions • Your device may not be able to recognize the virtual serial port on your Windows computer. Try validating the virtual serial port you’re using, or create a different virtual port and change the HotSync Manager settings to use the new virtual port. To change the virtual serial port, click the HotSync Manager icon . Select Setup, and then select the Local tab. Select a port from the Serial port pick list. When you synchronize wirelessly, your device attempts to connect to a Bluetooth virtual serial port on your computer. First it looks for a Bluetooth serial HotSync port. If it cannot find that port, it then looks for a generic Bluetooth serial port. However, some generic Bluetooth serial ports do not support synchronization. Refer to the documentation that came with your computer operating system for instructions on creating/changing the virtual port for serial communication. If the virtual serial port you want to use is used by other applications, exit those applications before setting up your computer for wireless synchronization. Some of my applications do not synchronize. If you have synchronized successfully but you can’t find the information from your device on your computer, check to see that you have the correct username selected for viewing information. NOTE If you upgraded from a previous device, go to www.palmOne.com/support, select your country, select the LifeDrive™device from the main page, and click the Upgrade link. WINDOWS ONLY Click the HotSync Manager icon in the lower-right corner of your screen, and then select Custom. Check that the application is set to synchronize the files. If it is not, select the application, click Change, and then select Synchronize the files. Check the Set as default box to use this setting each time you synchronize. Otherwise, it applies during the next synchronization only. MAC ONLY Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings. Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and be sure that the application is set to synchronize. LifeDrive from palmOne 644 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I can’t open the HotSync Manager. On a Windows computer, uninstall Palm Desktop software from your computer, and then reinstall the software from the software installation CD. On a Mac computer, just reinstall Palm Desktop software. When I synchronize, I receive the 8009 error message: An application has failed to respond to a HotSync notification. WINDOWS ONLY The 8009 error indicates that the Windows registry is corrupt. You need to rebuild the HotSync Manager registry entries. For information on rebuilding the registry entries, go to www.palmOne.com/support and search the palmOne Knowledge Library for “error 8009.” My files didn’t install during synchronization. • If files do not install after you synchronize, the file type was not recognized. On your device, open the application associated with those files. Then synchronize again. If the files remain in the palmOne™ Quick Install list on your computer (Windows only), they are not associated with an application on your device and cannot be installed by synchronizing. You can install the files using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac or Windows). • If you are trying to install files to an expansion card, make sure that a card is inserted into your device’s expansion slot before you synchronize. I can’t add more files to the Quick Install list. Make sure the dialog box that confirms where the files will be installed is closed. You cannot add more files to the list when the confirmation dialog box is open. LifeDrive from palmOne 645 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions When I add a zipped file (ZIP) to Quick Install, some of the files don’t appear in the Quick Install list. Unzip the file with a file compression utility, such as WinZip, and then add the unzipped files to Quick Install. I receive an authentication error when I try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point. Make sure you entered the correct username and password for the selected network service profile in the Network Preferences screen. When I try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point, it connects, but nothing happens. • Make sure that Network is selected in the HotSync Manager menu on your computer. • Contact your system administrator to make sure your network computer is properly set up. I want to synchronize my computer with more than one device. If the computer running Palm Desktop software synchronizes with more than one device, each device should have a unique name. Synchronizing more than one device with the same username causes unpredictable results and, potentially, loss of your personal information. Assign a username to your device the first time you synchronize. If you are synchronizing with Outlook, make sure the right profile is selected for the applications you want to synchronize in HotSync Manager. In Palm Desktop software, click HotSync, and then select Custom. LifeDrive from palmOne 646 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions LifeDrive Manager/Drive Mode ™ I can’t move or copy files using LifeDrive™ Manager. WINDOWS ONLY • Make sure your device is connected securely to the USB sync cable, and that the cable is connected to a USB port on the back of your computer. • Make sure no other applications—such as HotSync Manager or Pocket Tunes™—are using the USB sync cable. To check, press the Home button . If Favorites opens, then no other applications are using the sync cable. If Favorites does not open, then another application may be using the cable. • Try to synchronize. If synchronizing doesn’t work, LifeDrive™ Manager doesn’t work, either. • If LifeDrive Manager was working but stops, disconnect and reconnect your device. If this does not solve the problem, perform a soft reset. I can’t see a file I moved from my computer to my device. Your device stores information in two places: in program memory and on the hard drive. When you view files on your device using LifeDrive Manager on your computer or Files on your device, only files on the drive are displayed. If you used Quick Install to move a file to your device, depending on the file type, the file may be located in your device’s program memory. If this is the case, you can’t view the file using LifeDrive Manager or Files, but you can access it by using the appropriate application. If you want to be able to see the file in the LifeDrive Manager window or the Files screen, copy it to your device’s drive using LifeDrive Manager. LifeDrive from palmOne 647 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I made updates to a file on my device, but when I synchronize, the changes don’t show up in the file on my computer. If you use LifeDrive Manager to transfer a file or folder to your device, you must select whether that item synchronizes. You can either select the Keep synchronized option during file transfer, or make the file or folder a sync item once it is on the hard drive. If you move an item into a sync folder on the hard drive, the item automatically synchronizes. However, the item synchronizes to the copy of the sync folder on your computer, not to its original location—the version in the original location remains unchanged. File transfer is taking place slowly. If you are working with large files or using large applications such as games on your device, file transfer may go more slowly. Quit all device applications to speed file transfer. I want to transfer files and use my device with a USB 1.1 connection. You may be able to connect your device to your computer using a USB 1.1 connection, but we do not recommend this, because the USB 1.1 connection is very slow. For best performance, connect your device to your computer using a USB 2.0 connection. You may need to purchase and install a USB 2.0 cable and software on your computer to do this. When I try to delete a file using LifeDrive Manager, a message appears saying the file is busy. If you are working with a file on your device—for example, editing a document or listening to a music file—you cannot delete the file using LifeDrive Manager. Close the file on your device and then delete it. I can’t write a memo or enter a contact when my device is in Drive Mode. When your device is in Drive Mode, it works just like any external drive such as a CD drive. You cannot enter or work with information directly on your device while it is in Drive Mode. To work with information directly on your device, turn Drive Mode off. LifeDrive from palmOne 648 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Tip Visit www.palmOne.com/ support for more information on what to do if your device does not show up as a drive on your computer when the device is in Drive Mode. When your device is in Drive Mode and is connected to a computer, you can open files from your device’s drive on the computer using Windows Explorer or My Computer (on a Windows computer) or Finder (on a Mac computer), and work with them there. Your device still displays alerts, such as for appointments or new email messages, when in Drive Mode. My device and/or the expansion card is not showing up as a drive in Windows Explorer or My Computer when I have the device in Drive Mode. WINDOWS ONLY When you turn on Drive Mode, connect your device to your computer, and then open My Computer or Windows Explorer, the window you open shows two new drives. These drives are assigned the next available drive letters, for example, E:, F:, and so on. If no letters are available because you have multiple external devices connected to your computer (such as a card reader or a camera), or because you are using mapped network drives, the window does not display your device or the expansion card as a drive. To display them, remove some of the external devices connected to your computer, or remove some of the mapped network drives. Calendar I selected the Today button, but it does not show the correct date. Make sure the Set Date box on the Date & Time Preferences screen displays the current date. I created an event, but it doesn’t appear in Week View. • If scroll arrows appear on the right of your screen, scroll down to see if the event appears farther down the screen. • If you have two or more events with the same start time, the events appear as multiple bars starting at the same time in Week View. To see the overlapping events, select the individual bars, or select Day View. For more information, see Finding events that overlap. LifeDrive from palmOne 649 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions • If you marked the event as private, check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records. Time zones don’t appear on my Palm Desktop software. Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones. Only Outlook recognizes times zones. I set the global time zone preference, but only some of my events are responding to my time zone change. Only new events created after the preference is set are affected. The events you created earlier without time zones do not have the time zone set. You can edit the earlier events to include a time zone. I created my event with a time zone, but only that event is responding to my time zone change. When you create an event with a time zone setting, only that event is affected. To have all events automatically include a time zone setting, set the New events include time zones preference. Memos I’m having problems listing memos the way I want to see them. If you cannot manually arrange the order of memos on the list screen, open the Options menu and select Preferences. Make sure that Sort by is set to Manual. If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize, the memos on your device still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting. In other words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your device. LifeDrive from palmOne 650 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Note Pad I’m having problems listing notes the way I want to see them. If you cannot manually arrange the order of notes on the list screen, select Preferences from the Options menu and make sure that Sort by is set to Manual. If you choose to view your notes alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize, the notes on your device still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting. In other words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your device. Media I can’t find the Media icon in Applications. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select Multimedia. You should now see an icon for the Media application. In Favorites View, the entry associated with the Media application is called Photos & Videos. You can edit the Favorites list to change this to Media, as well as to create or change any other favorite file, folder, web link, or application. Camera Companion I want to use the same expansion card both for saving photos on my camera and for storing applications for my device. Your device can read and use an SD card or MultiMediaCard formatted by your camera. Your camera, however, may be unable to read a card formatted by your device. Although you can use the same card to save pictures and videos with your digital camera and to store applications with LifeDrive from palmOne 651 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions your device, we recommend that you use one card for device applications and a different one for digital camera pictures. We also recommend that you use your camera to format any card that you are using to save photos. I cannot view the videos I transferred from my camera to my device. Some cameras take video in a format that your device is unable to recognize and play. You can transfer a video in any format to your device and then transfer it to your computer for viewing; however, you can only view videos in supported formats on your device. Pocket Tunes™ I would like better-quality sound during playback. Saving music files at a lower bit rate creates a smaller file size, but also gives a lower playback quality. Increase the bit rate to improve playback sound quality, but remember that this increases file size. My music file stutters during playback. WINDOWS ONLY If you are transferring files using LifeDrive Manager and you are listening to music files on your device, the music playback may stutter. Wait until the file transfer is finished to listen to the music file. My device doesn’t play the music files I burned from a CD. The Pocket Tunes application installed on your device plays music files in MP3 format only. You must change the settings in your desktop music application to save files from a CD as MP3 files.To play files in other formats such as WMA, upgrade to the deluxe version of Pocket Tunes—you can purchase it by using the Addit™ application on your device or visiting www.palmOne.com. LifeDrive from palmOne 652 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions My device doesn’t play the music files I downloaded from my favorite online music store. The Pocket Tunes application installed on your device plays music files in MP3 format only. To play files in other formats such as WMA, upgrade to the deluxe version of Pocket Tunes—you can purchase it by using the Addit™ application on your device or visiting www.palmOne.com. When I save songs from a CD, I do not see the song title or artist name. When capturing songs from a CD, you must have an active Internet connection to obtain song title and artist information. This information is supplied from the GraceNote server on the web. Tasks The info I entered does not appear in an application. • Open the Options menu and select Preferences. If Show Completed Tasks is selected, deselect it to display the missing tasks. • If you marked the task as private, check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records. Connecting wirelessly My passkey is rejected when I attempt to form a trusted pair with my mobile phone. Some mobile phones require that you enter the passkey within a specific time frame. Make sure you have a passkey in mind and that you enter it immediately when prompted. LifeDrive from palmOne 653 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions If your passkey is rejected, your phone may have a preassigned passkey; see the documentation included with your phone for information. The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pair, Bluetooth link, or bonded pair. My device cannot connect to my mobile phone. Use the following steps to test the connection: 1. Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen. You can select the indicator even if it is dimmed. 2. Make sure On is selected. 3. Select the Service pick list and select the service that you want to use to connect to your phone. 4. Select Connect. If the connection is successful, open the application that requires the connection and complete the desired task. If the connection is not successful, try the following steps: • Make sure that your phone is equipped with Bluetooth technology, that Bluetooth technology is enabled, and that the power is on. • You may need to set up a connection with your phone. See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process. My phone connection drops before I finish using it. You need to increase the Idle timeout setting on the Network Preferences Details screen. LifeDrive from palmOne 654 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I get an error message when I try to dial a phone number using my device. • Make sure that the proper phone driver is installed on your device. • You may need to set up a connection with your phone. See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process. • Check the Phone Preferences screen and make sure the correct phone connection is selected. The VersaMail application ® I am having problems accessing my account. Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up. If you followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems using the account, verify that the account complies with your email provider’s requirements by following these steps: • Verify both your password and your username for your email account. • If you are connecting using a mobile phone through the built-in Bluetooth technology on your device, a cable, or the IR port on your device, verify that you have either a data-enabled GSM or a high-speed GPRS account with your wireless service provider. • Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your email account. If this is the case, be sure to use your provider’s network as the connection type for the account. • Some wireless service providers have other requirements specific to their service. For example, Yahoo! requires you to pay for a POP account in order to download email messages from your Yahoo! account to your device. Check with your service provider to see if any provider-specific requirements exist. LifeDrive from palmOne 655 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions • Service provider settings frequently change. If your email account was working but you are currently experiencing problems, check with your service provider to see if any of the account settings have changed. I am having problems sending and receiving email. • Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or poor wireless coverage. If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of time, check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is working properly. • Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to send and receive email on a wireless device. Several providers, like Hotmail, do not offer this option at all. Auto Sync is not working. • If Auto Sync is occurring and you turn your handheld off or the connection to your email service provider is disconnected, Auto Sync fails. • If you are attempting Auto Sync over a network, you must be in range of a network access point for Auto Sync to work. I can receive email fine, but am having problems sending email. If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try these steps, in turn: • Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a wireless device. Several providers do not offer this option at all; other providers require an upgrade to access email on a wireless device. • Turn on ESMTP. Many services require authenticated access to use their SMTP servers, or ESMTP. • Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs, such as cable companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send email through their servers. In this case, you can almost always receive email from these accounts, but if you want to send email, you must send it through another server. LifeDrive from palmOne 656 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions I can’t download any messages. If the program memory on your device fills up, you cannot download any more messages to your device. Delete some messages to free up program memory, and try downloading again. I am trying to synchronize messages on my device with messages on my computer, but it’s not working. On your computer, check the advanced account settings for the account you want. Make sure that the box is checked that allows you to synchronize messages on your device with messages on your computer. My vCard or vCal email attachment isn’t forwarding correctly. WINDOWS ONLY Palm Desktop software provides several features that work with email client software on a Windows computer. For these features to work correctly, the email client software must be properly set up. Follow these steps to check the settings: 1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Settings. 2. Select Control Panel. 3. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab. 4. Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software. 5. Click OK. 6. Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client. Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more information. LifeDrive from palmOne 657 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Privacy I’ve made records private, but I can’t remember my password to display them. First, use the password hint to try to remember the password. If this doesn’t help or if you do not have a password hint, you can use Security Preferences to delete the password, but your device deletes all entries marked as private. However, if you synchronize before you delete the password, the synchronization process backs up all entries, whether or not they are marked private. Then you can follow these steps to restore your private entries: 1. In Security Preferences, tap in the password box and enter a guess at the password. 2. In the dialog box that appears, select Lost Password. 3. Select Delete Password to remove the password and delete all private records. 4. Synchronize your device with your computer again. I forgot the password, and my device is locked. First, use the password hint to try to remember the password. If this doesn’t help or if you do not have a password hint, you must perform a hard reset to continue using your device. Performing a hard reset deletes all of the information on your device. To protect your info and create a backup of your info, do a full sync to back up the contents of your device to your computer often. LifeDrive from palmOne 658 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Sharing I can’t beam information to another device or other device. NOTE Depending on the receiving device model, not all information may be sent correctly. • If you are beaming to another Palm Powered device, confirm that your device and the other device are 4 to 39 inches (approximately ten centimeters to one meter) apart and that the path between the two devices is clear of obstacles. Beaming distances to other devices with an IR port may be different. • Move your device closer to the receiving device. • Make sure the receiving device has beam receive enabled. • Perform a soft reset on both your device and the receiving device. • Avoid beaming in bright sunlight or fluorescent light. These produce infrared noise that can make beaming go slower or, in some cases, prevent it from working at all. When someone beams information to my device, it doesn‘t receive the info. • If you are receiving info from another Palm Powered device, confirm that your device and the other device are 4 to 39 inches (approximately ten centimeters to one meter) apart and that the path between the two devices is clear of obstacles. Beaming distances to other devices with an IR port may be different. • Move your device closer to the sending device. • Make sure your device has beam receive enabled. • Perform a soft reset on both your device and the beaming device. LifeDrive from palmOne 659 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions When someone beams information to my device, I get a message telling me it is out of memory. • Your device requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the info you are receiving. For example, if you are receiving a 30KB application, you must have at least 60KB free. • Purge old Calendar events and delete unused or unnecessary applications. I cannot send information to another Bluetooth device. • Make sure that Bluetooth communication is enabled on both your device and the other device. • Make sure that the receiving device has a compatible Bluetooth application installed. • The receiving device must be within range of your device, approximately 25 to 30 feet (8 to 10 meters). Other Bluetooth devices cannot find my device. • Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen and make sure that Bluetooth is turned on. • Select Prefs and make sure the Discoverable setting is set to Yes. LifeDrive from palmOne 660 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions Problems with incompatible applications palmOne, Inc. works with developers of third-party add-on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your device. Some third-party applications, however, may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your device. Possible symptoms of incompatible applications include: • Fatal errors needing resets • Nonresponsive device requiring a reset • Slow performance • Abnormal screen display or uneven sound quality • Problems using Bluetooth technology or other features • Problems opening an application • Problems synchronizing You can determine whether an incompatible application is causing problems by deleting the application and then operating your device. After you have deleted the application, try to replicate the operation that created the error. If removing the application solves your problem, contact the application developer for a solution. Also, go to www.palmOne.com/us/support/contact/incompatible_apps.html to provide feedback to palmOne on the application. Finding a third-party application that is causing a problem If you have multiple third-party applications installed on your device or have upgraded from an earlier model of a Palm Powered device, perform the following procedure to remove all third-party applications from your device. Once you have removed all of the third-party applications, you can install one application at a time to determine which application is causing the problem. LifeDrive from palmOne 661 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions The following procedures erase all information from your device. Before removing the applications, do a full sync to back up the contents of your device to your computer. 1. On a Windows computer, open the palmOne folder on your computer, and then open the user folder for your device. User folder names are often abbreviated as last name, first initial. On a Mac computer, locate the folder Home/Documents/Palm/Users/ /Backups. 2. Select and drag the Backup folder to the desktop. Make sure you see the Backup folder on the desktop. 3. On a Windows computer, close the palmOne folder. 4. Perform a hard reset. Synchronize your device with your computer to restore info to your device’s program memory, and use LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac) to restore info to your device’s drive. 5. Operate your device and try to replicate problem operations. 6. Do one of the following: •If your device still has problems, review this Common Questions section for solutions to the problem. Fix the problem before reinstalling the third-party applications. •If your device no longer has problems, install the third-party applications one application at a time using the following procedure: a. Open the Backup folder you moved to the desktop in step 2. b. Double-click a PRC file. On a Windows computer, the Quick Install window opens with the PRC file listed. On a Mac computer, the HotSync Manager window opens with the PRC file listed. NOTE Alternatively, on a Mac computer, you can drag the PRC file to the Send To Device droplet instead of double-clicking it. c. Click Done. d. Synchronize your device with your computer. LifeDrive from palmOne 662 CHAPTER 31 Common Questions e. Operate your device and try to replicate problem operations. f. Do one of the following: •If installing the application re-creates your problem, remove the application and contact the application developer for a solution. Continue to reinstall your applications one application at a time to make sure another application is not creating a problem. •If installing the application does not cause a problem, go to step a and reinstall another application. g. Go to www.palmOne.com/us/support/contact/incompatible_apps.html to provide feedback to palmOne on the application. NOTE Some applications use more than one PRC file. You should continue to check each PRC file even if you identify one associated with an application that is causing a problem on your device, since that application may use other PRC files. LifeDrive from palmOne 663 CHAPTER 32 Getting Help This guide is meant to tell you everything you need to know to set up, customize, and use your device. However, you may occasionally run into an issue that is not addressed in this guide. Here are some resources to help you if that happens. Self-help resources If you run into a problem with your device, be sure to check these resources first: • Answers to common questions about your device and its features • The Palm® Desktop online Help • The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide located in the Documentation folder on your installation CD • The palmOne™ Knowledge Library, accessible at www.palmOne.com/support • The most recent palmOne LifeDrive™device HelpNotes on your regional website LifeDrive from palmOne 664 CHAPTER 32 Getting Help Technical support If, after reviewing the self-help resources, you cannot solve your problem, go to www.palmOne.com/support or send an email to your regional Technical Support office. Before requesting technical support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem. When you do contact Technical Support, please provide the following information: • The name and version of the desktop operating system you are using • The actual error message or state you are experiencing • The steps you take to reproduce the problem • The version of device software you are using and available memory To find version and memory information, follow these steps: 1. Go to Applications. 2. Open the menus. 3. Select Info from the App menu. 4. Select Version for version info, and Size for memory info. LifeDrive from palmOne 665 Product Regulatory Information FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC rules. [ ! ] IMPORTANT Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the manufacturer’s Regulatory Engineering Department. Changes or modifications made without written approval may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. In August 1996, the FCC of the United States with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326 adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. The design of this product complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards. LifeDrive from palmOne 666 Exposure to radio frequency energy (SAR) In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, this device and its antenna must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The user of this device should ensure that the operation of this device is in compliance with these provisions. FCC ID: O3W830 Responsible Party: LifeDrive Product Family palmOne, Inc. 400 N. McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, California 95035 United States of America (408) 503-7500 Tested to Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Industry Canada The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. IC:3905A-830 Canadian Wireless Regulatory Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: a) this device may not cause any interference, and b) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors, and away from windows to prevent maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. CE Declaration of Conformity LifeDrive from palmOne palmOne, Inc., Declares the Product: Device PDA & HotSync® cable Model Name/Number: LifeDrive Manufacturer’s Name: palmOne Manufacturer’s Address: 400 N. McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, 95035-5112 667 Meets the following European Council Directives: • 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive) • 99/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) • 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive). Conforms with the following specifications: • EN 55024: 1998 (Emissions & Immunity) • EN55022:1998, CISPR 22 1997, Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions • IEC 61000-4-2, A1 1998-01, ESD Immunity, 4kV Contact, and 8kV Air Discharge • IEC 61000-4-3: 1995 RF Immunity, 80-1000MHz, 3V/M, 1kHz, 80% A.M. • ENV 50204:1996, RF Immunity, 895-905MHz, 3V/m, 200Hz, 50% AM • IEC 61000-4-4: 1995 EFT Immunity, 1kV on AC port, 5/50nSec, 5kHs Rep. Freq. • IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Surge Immunity, 1.2/50uSec, 2kV(peak), Common Mode, 1kV(peak) Differential Mode • EN61000-4-6:1996, Conducted Immunity, 150kHz-80MHz, 3V RMS, 1kHz, 80% AM • IEC 61000-4-11: 1994, 100% Voltage Dip 0.5 period, 30% Dip 25 periods and >100% Dip 250 periods LifeDrive from palmOne Authorized palmOne Representative: David Woo palmOne Compliance Engineer Date: April 18, 2005 668 Battery Warning Do not mutilate, puncture, or dispose of batteries in fire. The batteries can burst or explode, releasing hazardous chemicals. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with your local regulations. Varning Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. Advarsel! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverandøren. Varoitus Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. Advarsel Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefait av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. Waarschuwing! Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd. Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA. Uwaga LifeDrive from palmOne 669 Intrinsic Safety Warning Warning – Explosion Hazard • Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2; • When in hazardous location, turn off power before replacing or wiring modules, and, • Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous. Wireless Notices—Usage Cautions In some situations, the user of the wireless device may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard an airplane, in hospitals, near explosive environment, in hazardous locations etc. If you are not certain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization prior to turning on the device. Static Electricity, ESD, and Your palmOne™ Device Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence. Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock -- the discharge event -- when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity. ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your palmOne™ device, from ESD harm. While palmOne has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur. LifeDrive from palmOne 670 Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The recommendation from palmOne is that you take this precaution before connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following: • Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground. • For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body. • Increase the relative humidity of your environment. • Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats. Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following: • Low relative humidity. • Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.) • The rapidity with which you touch, connect or disconnect electronic devices. While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD. LifeDrive from palmOne 671 INDEX SYMBOLS ! (exclamation point) in Tasks list 256 * (asterisk) characters 132 . (period) character 579 NUMERICS 12-hour clock See clock 12-hour formats 577 128-bit AES encryption 336 24-hour clock 575, 576 24-hour formats 576, 577 5-way navigator 20, 29, 47–51 A abbreviations 581, 582 AC charger 24, 624, 635, 636 accented characters 66 on international onscreen keyboard 73 access points (WI-Fi) 290, 297 accessories 17, 24, 29, 614 Account Setup command 354 Account Setup screen accessing 354 deleting accounts and 361 editing accounts and 360 ESMTP authentication and 362 setting up email accounts from 424 accounts accessing email 312, 336 Auto Sync and 365 caution for synchronizing and 340 deleting email 361 deleting Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 434 editing email 359, 360 LifeDrive from palmOne instant messenger and 136 logging in to Internet 464 setting up email 336, 343, 420, 424 setting up Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 420–427 testing 358 transferring settings to 341 updating information and 99, 434 upgrading email 335 action bar (web browser) 447, 451 actions (pen stroke) 571 Add Bookmark command 454 Add Contact dialog box 374 add-on applications 127, 661 adding additional software 32, 124 audio to photos 212 bookmarks 448, 454 contacts 74, 132, 135, 374 daily events 152 expense items 498, 500, 501 locations 551 multiday events 159 owner information 586 passwords 518, 519, 524 personal signatures 380 plug-in applications 607 reminders 134, 266, 275 repeating events 156, 157 songs to playlists 237 speed-dial entries 481 tasks 245, 247, 249 trusted devices 329 unscheduled events 155 untimed events 154, 159 user profiles 12, 13 Addit software 31 address fields 136, 448 Address Lookup screen 379 addresses 21, 133, 374, 602 See also contacts addressing email 144, 147, 377, 378, 379, 582 text messages 438 adjusting alarm volume 555, 585 brightness 565 modem volume 594 speaker volume 282, 585 Adobe Acrobat Reader xxi, 34 AES encryption 336 agenda lists 151 See also Calendar application Agenda View customizing Tasks lists and 255 described 173 opening 173, 547 setting display options for 180, 182 Agenda View icon 173, 547 Alarm check box 167, 246 alarm clock 167, 246, 546, 554 See also alarms; clock alarm icons 26, 175 Alarm Preferences command 555 Alarm Preset settings 185 Alarm Sound pick list 269, 585 alarm tones 167, 185, 256, 269, 555 alarms See also alerts; reminders adjusting volume 555, 585 672 attaching to notes 269 changing 168 changing sounds for 269 entering preferences for 184, 185, 246 responding to world clock 555 selecting sounds for 167, 185, 256, 555 setting 167, 246, 270, 554 specifying duration of 185 turning off 555 albums arranging photos in 207, 209 creating 206 managing 205 moving photos in 207 moving photos to other 208 moving videos in 207 scrolling through 203 selecting 206 Alert icon 26 alert options 367 Alert Sound pick list 367 alert symbol (Wi-Fi 26 alerts See also alarms; reminders Auto Sync notifications and 366, 368 Drive Mode and 94 low batteries and 5 opening files and 42 text messages and 440 Alerts screen 367 aligning the screen 584 All category 539 Allow wakeup command 332 alphabet (Graffiti 2 writing) 62 alphabetic keyboard 28 LifeDrive from palmOne alternate stroke shapes 579 anniversaries 154, 156 annual events 156 annual tasks 248, 250 application buttons See quick buttons application controls 29, 38 application groups 541, 544 application icons 563, 639 application screens 29 application title 52 applications See also specific built-in application accessing 639 adding contact information to 140, 150 assigning to buttons 570 beaming 494–495 categorizing 538, 543 categorizing information in 541 checking version numbers for 125, 127 copying 118, 495, 621 creating plug-in 607 deleting 127, 622 displaying 40, 544, 563 displaying categories in 544 displaying information about 17, 126 downloading 118 downloading files to 461 exchanging 623 finding information in 54 importing information from 121 incompatible 661 installation prerequisites for 125 installing 32, 617 marking private entries in 516 moving around in 38 not finding 30, 639 opening 39, 104, 570, 617 organizing 55, 538 related topics for 55 removing categories in 540 removing connections for 592 renaming categories 539 setting preferences for 568, 572 setting primary location for 547 setting secondary locations for 550 soft resets and 636 specifying connections for 589 switching between 10, 46, 617, 642 synchronizing 111, 644 transferring information from 98 transferring to device 33, 34 uninstalling 637 updating information for 111 updating third-party 8 upgrading 125 Applications View displaying icons on 639 moving around in 49 opening 26 opening applications on 39 overview 40 setting display options for 563 appointments See also Calendar application; events adding to calendar 152 adjusting for location 572 color-coding 163 combining tasks with 151 continuous 159 displaying 176, 177, 178 673 entering from Outlook 10, 642 removing from calendar 170 repeating 156 saving 153 scheduling 152–153 setting alarms for 554 setting duration of 153, 184 sharing 21 time zones for Outlook 153 viewing duration of 182 viewing unscheduled time slots for 182 archive folders 123 archived items 123, 170, 254 ASF files 193 Assigned password 598 asterisk (*) characters 132 Attach Signature check box 380 attachments adding 404 downloading 400 Internet email accounts and 464 opening web browser from 459 previewing with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 430 reading 462 saving 403 sending files as 404, 405 Audible Player software 34 audio applications 24 audio files transferring with Rhapsody 226 Audio folder 226 authentication 329, 362 Authentication option 353, 358 authentication servers 607 LifeDrive from palmOne Auto Empty check box 397 Auto Lock option 525 Auto Sync constraints for 369 retrying 369 scheduling 364, 365 setting notification options for 366 Auto-Disconnect option 412 auto-off delay 588, 638 autofill option 469 automatically locking LifeDrive mobile device 524, 525 available storage space 619 AVI files 193 B back panel controls 23, 24 backgrounds adding photos as 182, 560, 564 customizing 182, 560, 564 selecting color of 268, 568 backing up information 32 backup cards 622 basics 6, 633 battery cautions for 669 charging 4, 588, 624, 636 checking 332, 635 conserving power for 5, 587, 635 extending life of 558, 635 overview 5 recharging 4, 5, 588, 635 battery gauge 635 BCC option 392 Beam Category command 493 Beam command 492, 494 Beam Contact command 488 Beam dialog box 492, 493, 495 Beam From pick list 494 Beam icon 53 Beam Receive pick list 588 beaming 491–495, 588, 659, 660 beaming port See IR port beeps 42, 366 See also alerts Birthday icon 175 birthdays 134, 152 Blank Page setting (web browser) 467 blank screen 637 Blazer application See web browser application Blazer Downloads folder 461 blinking cursor 72 blocking private entries 517 Bluetooth application entering basic settings for 314 features 312, 313 setting up phone connections with 315– 319 Bluetooth controls (status bar) 26, 30 Bluetooth devices assigning names to 331, 332, 586 connecting to 23, 312, 594 discovering 313, 329, 331 entering passkeys for 330 related topics for 333 sending photos and videos to 216 sending records to 486 setting up 314, 331 sharing information with 36 674 synchronizing with 17 verifying status of 320 waking up device from 332 Bluetooth dialog box 26, 314 Bluetooth HotSync option 322 Bluetooth icon 30 Bluetooth LAN Access Point connections 312 Bluetooth setting (Edit Connection) 594 Bluetooth technology 290, 311, 312 Bluetooth wireless connections 289, 446 BMP files 193 bold fonts 566 bonding trusted pairs 330 Bookmark icon 455, 456 Bookmark Page dialog box 454 bookmarks adding 448, 454 arranging 457 displaying list of 455 editing addresses for 456 moving 458 selecting 455 viewing 455 Bookmarks dialog box 467 Bookmarks page icon 455 Bookmarks setting (web browser) 467 Bookmarks View 455 bottom arrow controls 29 brightness 565 browsing options 468, 469, 470, 473, 475 browsing the web 31, 312, 320, 447 See also web pages; websites budgets 498 built-in applications 30, 127 LifeDrive from palmOne Business Card command 492 business cards 138, 492 business expenses 499 See also Expense application buttons activating 50 assigning to applications 570 calculator 510 not responding 579, 626, 636 opening applications from 46 quick 19 reassigning application 570 restoring defaults for 570 selecting dialog box 50 tapping command 29 Buttons Preferences screen 570 C cache 331 Calculator application accessing 31 benefits of 509 buttons described 510 categorizing with Expense 538 copying and pasting from 511 displaying calculation history 511 re-entering numbers 510 related topics for 513 troubleshooting 513 Calculator icon 31 calculators (preinstalled) 31 See also Calculator application calendar See also Calendar application adding appointments to 152 changing events on 168 changing repeat intervals for 168 color-coding appointments 153, 163 customizing 180, 181, 577 deleting events 170 displaying appointments for 173, 176, 177, 178 displaying conflicting events in 182 entering birthdays for 134 finding overlapping events on 180 opening 186 purging old events 172 reserving dates 154 scrolling through 177, 178 selecting dates on 152 setting repeat intervals for 157, 158, 159 Calendar application applying color-coding options 164 categorizing information in 541 checking current date and time from 547 checking schedules in 175, 177, 178 defining repeating events 156, 157 deleting categories 540 deleting events 170 displaying categories in 544 entering event locations from 160 importing information for 121 opening 30, 152 related topics for 187 rescheduling events 168 retrieving events for 428, 433 saving information for 153, 170, 172 scheduling events 152, 154, 159 selecting dates on 245 675 setting alarms from 185, 555 setting display options 180, 181–185 transferring information to 74 troubleshooting 187, 649 Calendar icon 30 Calendar Preferences dialog box 167, 184 calendar views 175, 177, 178, 179 calibration 584 Call History List 480 Call Waiting 599 calling card numbers 599 camera card copying contents 219 deleting contents 220 viewing contents 221 canceled actions 50 canceled appointments 170 canceled tasks 253 capitalization 60, 68, 260 Card Info application 31, 619 Card Info icon 31 card readers 229, 621 carrying cases 614 categories See also albums adding 538 beaming 493 benefits of 537 changing 168 color-coding 164 deleting 540 displaying 544, 563 placing information in different 542 related topics for 545 renaming 539 LifeDrive from palmOne scrolling through 544 selecting 493 categorizing applications 538, 543 contacts 142, 538, 541 events 153, 493, 538 expenses 499, 505, 506, 538 information 537, 541 memos 538 notes 267 tasks 245, 251, 256 Category command 543 Category dialog box 543 category lists See Category pick list category marker 174, 182 Category pick list displaying events on 166 opening 182, 617 placing entries on 542 removing calendar events from 540 cautions 625, 635 CDs 230 challenge-response prompts 605 Change Repeat dialog box 157, 249 Change your synchronization option 10, 642 changing alarms 168 bookmarks 454 calendar events 168 category names 539 date and time settings 548 default folders 383 display options 384, 391 email accounts 359, 360 email filters 411 email messages 382 fonts 384 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 583 home pages 465 information 76 locations for World Clock 551, 552 owner information 586 passwords 520 pen widths 267 playlists 236 preset connections 589 preset formats 576 privacy settings 168 repeating events 169 screen colors 568 screen fonts 565–566 server profiles 598 speed-dial entries 483 start pages 467 text colors 182 time zones 552, 572, 573 untimed events 155 URLs 454, 456 World Clock 556 Channel pick list 308 character entry 68, 72, 132 See also data entry character searches 54 charging the battery 4, 588, 624, 636 chat rooms xxiii check boxes 29 checking space on device 125 checking the battery 332, 635 Choose Date command 245 676 city preferences 573 cleaning your device 624 clear button (Calculator) 510 Clear cache on exit option 472 Clear Cache option 472 clear entry button (Calculator) 510 Clear Note command 267 clearing calculations 510 Note Pad screens 267 clock 167, 554, 572, 574 See also World Clock closing Internet connections 459 Color Theme Preferences screen 561, 568 color-coding 153, 163, 166 colors applying to annotations 210 applying to email 384 applying to events 153, 163, 166 applying to notes 268 changing screen 568 changing text 182 setting background 268, 568 column widths 385 command buttons 29 command gestures (Graffiti 2) 67 Command mode 53 command shortcuts 53 Command strokes (Graffiti 2) 53, 67 Command toolbar 53 commands 51, 52, 53 See also menus communication speed 589, 591, 595 communications protocols 337, 602 compact discs 230 LifeDrive from palmOne company phone lists and memos 11 completed tasks 252, 253, 254, 256 components (device) 2 Compress Day View check box 182 computers connecting to 8, 312 copying information to 495 customizing connections for 594 Drive Mode and 95 LifeDrive Manager and 83–90 managing schedules from 186 overwriting information on 113, 115 preinstalled software for 32 removing Palm Desktop software 128 synchronization options for 108, 110 synchronizing with 98, 322, 646 system requirements 2–3 transferring files from 94 troubleshooting LifeDrive Manager problems 647 troubleshooting synchronization problems 641 updating information from 113, 115 computers See also Mac information; Windows information Conduit Settings command 14 conduits 111 conference calls 160 Confirm note delete check box 272 confirmation messages 272 confirmation tones 616 conflicting events 182 conformity declaration 667 Connect command 460 Connect to setting 594 connecting headphones to device 24, 585 to AC charger 24, 588, 635 to Bluetooth devices 23, 312, 594 to computers 8 to dial-in servers 598 to mobile phones 321 to networks 600 to other devices 290, 311, 589 to personal computers 312 to power sources 636 to the Internet 290, 312, 460, 598 Connection pick list 598 Connection Preferences screen 590, 592, 593 connection types 312 connections See also connecting adding login scripts for 604 adding trusted 328 authentication servers and 607 automatically stopping remote 412 closing Internet 459 closing network 600 creating 592, 594 customizing network 597 deleting 592 Drive Mode and 94 dropping 602 limiting device 313 losing 636 omitting passkeys for 315 precautions for 625, 671 preset settings for 589–596 restricting 313 677 retrying Internet 460 selecting 598 setting flow control for 595 setting timeout intervals for 412 setting up network 317, 327, 600 setting up phone 315–319 setting up secure 418 setting up wireless 311, 323 synchronizing over 99 unable to establish 314 wireless technology for 289 connections See also Bluetooth; Wi-Fi conserving power 5, 587, 635 Contact Details dialog box 142 Contact Edit screen 135, 137 contacting service providers 318 contacts See also Contacts application adding 74, 132, 135, 374 archiving 141 categorizing 142, 538, 541 copying information for 133, 135, 139 customizing details for 142 deleting 141 displaying information for 137, 142 duplicating information for 135, 139 entering from Outlook 10, 642 entering in memos 260 entering notes for 135 keeping private 142, 515, 516 locating 140 managing 131 saving 134, 141 selecting 50 transferring from other applications 150 LifeDrive from palmOne Contacts application adding contact information 132–134 addressing email from 379 archiving information in 141, 253 beaming from 492 benefits of 131 categorizing information in 538, 541 creating business cards 138 customizing fields in 137 displaying additional fields for 135 duplicating information 139 importing information for 121, 150 marking entries as private 516 opening 30, 132 related topics for 150 saving information in 134, 141 searching from 140 selecting field types for 136 setting display options for 143 transferring information from 74 troubleshooting 150 viewing online help for 149 Contacts icon 30 Contacts list 142 continuous events See repeating events controls 5-way navigator 47 application 29, 38 LifeDrive mobile manager 19 locating 55 cookies 470, 472 Copy command 77, 621 Copy dialog box 621 Copy icon 53 copy-protected applications 621 copying applications 118, 495, 621 calculations 511 contacts 133, 135, 139 files 94 information 77 photos 214, 216, 495 service profiles 598 videos 216, 495 copying and pasting 77 copying See also LifeDrive Manager; Drive Mode corporate email accounts 290, 337, 338 country information 577 Cradle/Cable setting 594 creating appointments 152 bookmarks 448, 454 business cards 138 categories 538 company-specific information 11 connections 592, 594 contacts 74, 132, 135, 374 daily events 152 email messages 376 filters 406 login scripts 604 mail folders 388 memos 260 multiday events 159 notes 267 owner information 586 passwords 518, 519, 524 personal signatures 380 photo albums 206 678 playlists 233 plug-in applications 607 reminders 134, 266, 275 repeating events 156, 157 repeating tasks 247, 249 service profiles 597, 598, 601 ShortCut strokes 582 tasks 245, 247, 249 trusted pairs 315, 329 unscheduled events 155 untimed events 154, 159 user profiles 12, 13 video albums 206 currency 499, 500, 502 Currency pick list 500 currency symbols 500, 501, 502, 506 current date and time checking 547 entering 70, 572, 575 cursor 72, 76 Custom Currencies dialog box 502 customer support xxiii, 17, 191, 243, 665 customizing backgrounds 182, 560, 564 calendar 180, 181 contact information 137, 142 currency symbols 502 data entry 578 expense lists 506 Graffiti 2 writing 579 LifeDrive mobile manager 11, 32, 558 network settings 597–607 preset formats 577 synchronization settings 107–116 Tasks list 255 LifeDrive from palmOne Cut command 78 Cut icon 53 cycling through calendar views 173 D daily events 156 daily schedules 175, 176, 180 daily tasks 248, 250 data entry See also information caution for 21 defined 72 input area for 20 methods for 56, 57, 578 data services 459 databases 121 Date & Time Preferences screen 572, 574 date formats 576, 577 dates assigning to appointments 152, 156 assigning to repeating tasks 249, 250 changing 168, 498, 548 checking 547 displaying current 550 displaying due 256 displaying in World Clock 556 entering current 70, 572, 575 flagging series of 159 incorrect 638 recording completion 256 reserving in calendar 154 resetting 572, 574 scheduling reminders for 134 selecting on calendar 152, 245 setting alarms for specific 167, 247, 270 setting due 245, 246 setting location-specific 548, 572 setting repeat intervals for 157, 158, 159, 168 setting sequence 577 sorting by 271 viewing scheduled 173, 176, 177, 178 viewing specific 177 Day View displaying overlapping events in 180 scheduling appointments on 152 scheduling events for 154 selecting 175 setting display options for 166, 180, 182 setting timeframes for 184 Day View icon 152 Daylight Saving Time entry box 552 Daylight Savings settings 548 Days To Synchronize Mail option 350 DBA files 121 deadlines 154 decimal separators 577 Default Currency pick list 502 default folders 86 default settings overwriting 113, 115 restoring 570 selecting 109 Default View pick list 181 Delay command 606 delays 526, 588 after breaking network connection 636 after reset 638 Delete command 128 Delete Contact dialog box 141 679 Delete dialog box 128 Delete Event command 170 Delete Event dialog box 170 Delete From pick list 128 Delete icon 53 Delete Item command 504 Delete Memo command 263 Delete Memo dialog box 263 Delete messages on server option 414 Delete Note command 272 Delete Old Messages dialog box 394 Delete Task command 253 Delete Task dialog box 253 deleting ActiveSync accounts 434 applications 127, 622 appointments 170 bookmarks 456 categories 540 connections 589, 592 contacts 141 desktop software 7 email 393, 394, 396, 414 email accounts 361 email filters 411 events 170–172, 540 expense items 504, 505 files from device 123 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 583 information 78, 123, 524, 622, 637 locations 553 mail folders 388 memos 263 notes 272 passwords 523 LifeDrive from palmOne photos 206 playlists 238 private entries 523 saved web pages 456 service profiles 603 songs 237 tasks 253–254 description fields 152, 153 deselecting options 29 Desktop overwrites handheld option 113 desktop software See also Palm Desktop software downloading 17 installing 32 overwriting information in 113, 115 removing old 7 updating device from 113, 115 Details dialog box 541, 595, 601 device name cache 331 Device name field 314 device names 331, 332, 586 Device pick list 126 device-to-device networking 290, 304 devices 290, 313, 589 See also Bluetooth devices; LifeDrive mobile manager Dial prefix check box 599 dial-in connections 589 dial-in servers 597, 598, 600 dial-up accounts 319, 321 dial-up connections 594, 597 Dialer application benefits of 477 dialing from 478, 479 related topics for 484 troubleshooting 484 Dialer icon 478 Dialer keypad 478 dialing 478, 479, 480, 482 dialing in to networks 589 dialing preferences 594 Dialing setting (connections) 594 dialog boxes 29, 50 See also specific dictionaries 614 digital camera card copying contents 219 deleting contents 220 viewing contents 221 digitizer (defined) 584 Direct X software 35 Disable Auto Complete check box 469 Disable Cookies check box 470 Disable device name cache command 331 Disable Images check box 468 Disable JavaScript check box 475 disabling options 29 Disconnect command 459 Disconnect on Exit option 413 disconnecting from Drive Mode 97 disconnecting from the Internet 459 disconnecting USB sync cable 641 Discoverable pick list 314 Discoverable setting 313, 314, 329 discovering Bluetooth devices 313, 329, 331 Discovery icon 329 Discovery Results screen 313, 329 disk space requirements 3 Display Name option 392 display options (web pages) 452 680 Display Options command 181, 560, 563 Display Options dialog box Applications View 563 calendar 181 clock 556 Favorites View 560 display preferences 563, 565, 567, 568 display See screen Display View icon 452 display views (web browser) 452 displaying application groups 541 applications 40, 544 appointments 173, 176, 177, 178 bookmarks 455 Category pick list 182, 183 contact information 137, 142 current date and time 547, 550 email attachments 462 events 166, 183, 184 Excel spreadsheets 189 expense reports 32 expenses 506 files on hard drive 189 hidden or masked entries 518 images 193, 463 information 544 memos 261 notes 271 personal calendars 151 photo 221 photos 193, 194 PowerPoint files 189 schedules 173, 175, 177, 178 slide shows 198 LifeDrive from palmOne tasks 173, 182, 251, 255, 256 unread messages 173, 182 URLs 450 video 221 videos 194 web pages 447, 448, 449, 452, 463 Word documents 189 World Clock 32, 556 DNS (defined) 602 DNS addresses 297, 309, 602 Do not allow wakeup command 332 do’s and don’ts 624 DOC files 189 See also Word documents documentation xxi Documents application accessing 30 benefits of 188 companion application for 189 opening files from 190 overview 188, 189 related topics for 191 Documents To Go application 189 domain name system (DNS) 602 down arrow controls 29 Download attachments option 350 Download dialog box 461 download options 401, 461, 468 downloading additional software 17 applications 118 attachments 399, 400 email 363, 371, 419 files 461, 468 images 468 large messages 401 web pages 461 drafts 376 drained batteries 635 drawing freehand 210, 266 drawing tools 210 Drive Mode described 82 disconnecting from 97 managing items with 81 overview 94 recommendations for 83, 95, 97 transferring MP3 files 229 troubleshooting 648 turning on 95 Drive Mode icon 30, 95 Drive Mode screen 95 drivers 589 drop-down lists See lists due dates 245, 246, 250, 256 dummy expansion card 615 Duplicate Contact command 139 duplicating contact information 135, 139 duration 153 E eBooks 34 Edit Bookmarks command 456, 457 Edit Bookmarks List dialog box 456, 457, 458 Edit Categories command 251 Edit Categories dialog box 164, 165, 538, 540 Edit Connection dialog box 590 Edit currencies command 500 681 Edit List dialog box 551, 553 Edit menu 77, 78 Edit Playlist dialog box 233 editing 76, 261, 267, 271, 456 See also changing electrostatic discharge 670–671 email See also email accounts; VersaMail application accessing 302, 317, 320, 325, 336 adding addresses to contacts 374 adding attachments to 404 adding signatures 380 addressing 136, 144, 147, 377, 378, 379, 582 changing fonts for 384 changing header information for 415 changing Inbox folders for 383 changing messages 382 composing 376 creating folders for 388 deleting 393, 394, 396, 414 downloading 363, 371, 419 downloading attachments 400 emptying Trash folder for 396, 397 entering user names for 598 filtering 364, 406, 409, 411 forwarding 389 manually marking 398 moving messages 386 opening web browser from 459 reading 373 reading files attached to 462 receiving 320, 335, 339, 363, 428 related topics for 435 LifeDrive from palmOne replying to 390 sending 320, 372, 376, 464 setting display options for 384 setting maximum size 350 setting notification options for 367, 381 setting preferences for 371 setting retry intervals for 381 tapping URLs in 393 viewing status of 370 viewing unread messages for 173, 182 wireless connections and 290, 302 wireless connections for 435 email accounts accessing email 312 changing 359, 360 connection types and 336 deleting 361 logging in to Internet 464 scheduling Auto Sync 365, 369 setting up 336, 343, 420, 424 testing 358 transferring settings to 341 upgrading 335 email applications 602 email folders 383 email providers 336, 356 emergency information 538 empty screen 637 Empty Trash dialog box 396 emptying Trash folder 396, 397 Enable device name cache command 331 encryption device-to-device networking and 306 email passwords and 336 wireless connections and 294, 295, 296 encryption keys 292, 295, 296, 307 encryption systems 292, 336 End command 606 entering current date and time 70, 572, 575 information 20, 56, 57, 72–107, 578 owner information 586 passkeys 317, 330 passwords 319, 355, 425, 598, 601 phone numbers 478, 480, 482, 601 URLs 447, 448 entries See information entry fields 29 eraser 267 eReader 34 error messages 645 errors xxii ESD (electrostatic discharge) 670–671 ESMTP authentication 362 Essential Software folder 125 Euro, in onscreen keyboard 73 events See also appointments; Calendar application Event Details dialog box 168 events adding to calendar 152 adjusting for location 572 archiving 170, 171, 172 beaming 493 categorizing 153, 493, 538 changing descriptions 168 changing time zones for 162 changing untimed 155 color-coding 153, 163, 166 682 conflicting 182 contact information and 134 creating multiday 159 creating untimed 154, 159 defined 152 defining repeating 156, 157 deleting 170–172, 540 displaying 166, 183, 184 entering notes for 160, 161 extending beyond midnight 159 finding overlapping 180 marking as private 153, 516 rescheduling 168–169 retrieving with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 428, 433 scheduling 152, 154, 184 sending as attachments 404 setting alarms for 167, 185 setting time zones for 162, 163 viewing free time for 182 viewing specific time for 183 Excel spreadsheets displaying 189 email messages and 334 importing information from 121 managing files for 188 opening 190 sending information to 499 exclamation point (!) in Tasks list 256 EXIF format 203 expansion cards adding applications to 33, 34, 623 beaming from 494 benefits of 614 copying applications to 495, 621 LifeDrive from palmOne deleting applications on 127 deleting information on 622 displaying information about 31, 619 downloading files to 461 dummy card for 615 formatting 622 getting applications on 126 inserting 21, 616 limitations 619 opening applications on 617 opening files on 618 preventing damage to 615 related topics for 623 removing 615 renaming 620 transferring music files to 228, 229 types of 614 viewing information on 463 expense records See Expense application Expense application archiving information in 504 benefits of 497 categorizing information in 499, 505, 506, 538 categorizing with Calculator 538 changing information 498 choosing currency options 500 customizing lists for 506 deleting categories 540 deleting information in 504–505 entering expenses in 498–499 getting help with 507 installing 32 opening 498, 507 related topics for 508 saving information in 499 transferring information to 74 troubleshooting 508 Expense icon 32 expense lists 506 Expense Preferences dialog box 498, 501 expense reports 32, 500, 505, 506 Expense type pick list 498 extending battery 558, 635 external devices 589 external removable drives 94 external speaker 585 F fade setting 182, 560, 564 FAQs 633 Favorites View changing entries in 560 defined 30 moving around in 49 opening 26 FCC Statement 666 fields 29, 135, 136, 137 file names 463, 621 file sync See folder sync options file transfer application See LifeDrive Manager file types 193, 226 files accessing 473 attaching to email 404, 405 copying 94 displaying contents 462, 463 displaying on expansion cards 619 downloading 461, 468 683 installation prerequisites for 125 installing on Windows computers 117 managing 189 moving 94 opening 94, 190, 463 removing 123, 622 restoring archived 123 saving 461 sending as attachments 404 sharing 290, 312 transferring to device 34, 94, 121 troubleshooting uninstalled 645 Files application accessing contents on hard drive and 81 installing 30 opening 41 overview 41 troubleshooting 647 Files list 463 filing events 153 filtering email 364, 406, 409, 411 filtering messages 409, 411 Filters dialog box 407, 409 finances 497, 538 See also Expense application Find dialog box 54 Find icon 26, 54 Find More button 54 Find on Page command 450 Find on Page dialog box 450 finding contacts 140 information 54 overlapping events 180 firewalls 292, 338 LifeDrive from palmOne flash drive See hard drive Flow Ctl pick list 595 folder sync options 98, 102 folders 386, 388, 463, 642 Font command 566 font styles 566 fonts 384, 452, 565–566 forgetting passwords 523 form fields (web pages) 469 Format (codec) pick list 225 Format Card command 622 formats information-specific 576 multimedia file types 193 Formats Preferences screen 576 formatting expansion cards 622 forwarding email 389 freehand drawing 210, 266 freeing up space 123, 127, 172, 637 frequently asked questions (FAQs) 633 front panel controls 19 frozen screen 626, 636 Full header option 415 full sync option 98 full-screen pen stroke 571 full-screen writing 58, 267, 453 full-screen writing icon 26, 59 getting started xxi, xxii, 6 GIF files 193, 463 Go To Date dialog box 152, 154 Go to Web Page dialog box 447 Go to Web Page icon 447 GPRS data services 459 GPRS mobile phones 315, 318, 327, 589 Graffiti 2 command strokes 53, 67 Graffiti 2 input area 20, 28, 57 Graffiti 2 Preferences screen 579 Graffiti 2 writing changing strokes for 583 command shortcuts and 67 copying and pasting with 77 creating tasks with 245 deleting information with 78 deleting ShortCuts 583 entering information with 57, 60–69 entering ShortCut strokes 70–71, 581 full-screen mode and 58 getting help with 66 guidelines for 61 overview 57 setting alternate stroke shapes for 579 troubleshooting problems with 640 graphics files 463, 468 GSM mobile phones 315, 589 G H Game Sound pick list 585 games 541, 585, 614 General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) 318 gestures (Graffiti 2 writing) 67 Get IP command 606 Get unread mail option 371 handhelds See LifeDrive mobile manager; Palm OS handhelds handwriting 267, 640 See also Graffiti 2 writing hard drive 23, 81 caution for damaging 19 684 hard resets 524, 627, 630, 637 Quick Erase 628 Secure Erase 628 header options (email) 415 headphone jack 24 headphones 24, 585, 624 help xxiii, 17, 29, 66, 523, 664 Help menu 641 hiding address fields 448 currency symbols 506 input area 28 private entries 515, 517 high-speed connections 321 high-speed data services 597 high-speed wireless carrier 312 highlighting menu commands 51 See also selection highlight hints 29, 523 See also help History dialog box 511 Holiday Files folder 186 holidays 154, 156, 158 Home icon 26, 28 home page 451, 465, 467 Home Page icon 465 Home Page setting (web browser) 467 Home screen See Applications View hosts 602 HotSync cable See USB sync cable HotSync icon 31 HotSync Manager See also synchronizing not responding 645 opening on PCs 323 LifeDrive from palmOne restoring information from 630 starting 31, 109 turning off 109 HotSync Manager icon 99, 641 HotSync menu 119 HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide 641 HotSync technology 85, 86, 98 how-to information xxii HTM files 463 HTML files 459, 462, 463 HTML messages 350 HTML viewer 462 hyperlinks 451 See also URLs I icons application 563, 570 Command toolbar 53 Inbox (VersaMail) 370 input area 28 missing 639 Outbox (VersaMail) 382 Wi-Fi wireless connections 291 ICS files 121 idle timeouts 602 image files 193, 463, 468 IMAP mail folders 416, 417, 418 IMAP protocol 337, 346, 354 IMAP servers 347, 355, 399 importing contacts 150 information 12 Inbox 358, 383 Inbox icons 370 incoming mail options 357, 427 incoming mail servers 336, 347, 355 incompatible applications 661 incorrect dates and time 638 indicator light 19 Info command 126 Info dialog box 126 information adding contact 140, 150 adding owner 586 backing up 32 beaming application-specific 491 categorizing 537, 541 caution for overwriting 113, 115 copying and pasting 77 deleting 78, 622 editing 76 entering 20, 56, 57, 72–107, 578 finding 54 hard resets and 524, 627, 630 importing 121 installing company-specific 11 losing xxii, 50 protecting 614 providing emergency 538 restoring 630 sharing 21, 133, 485, 495 synchronizing 99 updating 98, 111 viewing by category 544 infrared port See IR port Infrared setting 594 initialization strings (modems) 413, 595 input area 20, 28, 57 Input icon 26, 28 685 inserting expansion cards 21, 616 installation CD 2, 7, 32, 124, 633 installation prerequisites 125 installing additional software 32, 124 applications 32, 617 Palm Desktop software 3, 7, 32 related topics for 17 instant messenger (IM) accounts 136 instant messenger (IM) field 136 Int’l button 73 internal flash drive See hard drive international keyboard 73 Internet See also websites accessing 312 connecting to 290, 312, 460, 598 disconnecting from 459 email accounts and 464 retrying connections for 460 selecting service provider for 321 setting up network connections for 319 Internet Explorer 2 See also web browser application Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) 346, 354 Internet protocol (IP) 602 Internet Service Providers (ISPs) 312, 336, 597 invalidating warranty 635 IP Address check box 602 IP addresses 297, 309, 602 IR port beaming from 491, 492, 493 creating connections for 589 LifeDrive from palmOne location of 21 setting up connections for 594 synchronizing from 99 IR to a PC/Handheld connection 589, 590 ISPs 312, 336, 597 iTunes application 230 J jack (headphone) 24 JavaScript 475 JPG files 193, 463 K key exchange 330 key index 296 key terms xxiii Key Type pick list 295, 307 keyboard icons 28 keyboards connecting to portable 261 entering information with 72, 73 included with device 73 opening alternative 73 opening onscreen 28 Keylock 21, 25 keys (onscreen keyboard) 73 L LAN Setup option 327 landscape view 27 laptops 312 large fonts 566 large images 468 Last Page Viewed setting (web browser) 467 Leave mail on server option 414 left arrow controls 29 letter keyboard icon 28 LifeDrive Manager described 82 Drive Mode and 94 opening 88 overview 83, 84 security preferences and 89 synchronizing with 98, 102 transfer options for 84 transferring information with 85, 88 troubleshooting 647 viewing device contents with 81 LifeDrive Manager icon 34, 85 LifeDrive Manager window 88 LifeDrive mobile device downloading files and 461 locking 524–527 protecting 313, 317 resetting 524 LifeDrive mobile manager adding additional software 614 adding owner information 586 charging battery for 4, 588, 636 checking space on 125 components of 2 connecting to AC charger 24, 588, 635 connecting to other devices 589 connecting to PCs 8 controls described 19 customizing 32 displaying contents of 88 do’s and don’ts 624 freeing space on 123, 127, 637 686 getting help with 664 locking 586 maintenance information for 624 not making sounds 638 power switch for 21, 25 recharging 4, 5, 588, 635 removing items 123 resetting 24, 626, 636 restoring information on 630 running out of space on 614 safety warnings for 670 setting power preferences for 587–588 setting up 1, 6, 7 timing out 642 turning itself off 638 turning on and off 6 upgrading 4, 7 lightning bolt icon 636 line selection 76 links (documentation) xxii links (web pages) 451 list screens 50 List view (Media) 194 listening to music 24, 226, 232 listening to voice memos 281 lists See also song lists creating company phone 11 customizing expense 506 customizing Tasks 255 displaying applications icons in 563 displaying bookmarks in 455 displaying contacts in 142 displaying pick 29 finding items in 551 LifeDrive from palmOne moving between items in 50 opening category 182, 617 ordering memos in 262 rearranging items in 262 selecting items in 29, 50 loading user profiles 15, 16 Local Area Networks See networks locating contacts 140 controls 55 information 54 overlapping events 180 Location field 160 Location pick list 551, 573 location pick list 551 location settings (World Clock) 547, 550, 552 location-specific preferences 572–577 locations, deleting 553 Lock Device dialog box 525 lock icons 494, 621 lock options 526 locking device 586 locking mobile device 524–527 logging in to email accounts 338, 464 logging in to network servers 604 Login Script dialog box 604, 605 login scripts 604–606 Look Up line (Contacts) 140 Lookup screen 379 losing information xxii, 50 LifeDrive mobile manager 586 network connections 636 passwords 523, 524 low batteries 5, 635 lowercase letters 61 M Mac information creating contacts 149 creating notes 273 creating user profiles 13 described xxii device system requirements 3 displaying tasks 257 enabling Drive Mode 96 entering information 106 installing device software 7, 118–120, 125 opening calendars 186 synchronizing device 110, 114 synchronizing with user profiles 16 transferring files 94 transferring music 229 troubleshooting problems 634 writing memos 264 Mac OS X systems 118 Macintosh overwrites handheld option 115 magnifying glass (Adobe Reader) xxi mail folders 386, 388 mail See email mail servers 337, 347, 355 Mail Service pick list 355, 424 maintenance information 624 Make Default check box 116 Manage Albums icon 205 Manage Albums screen 205, 206 Manual synchronization option 109 manually locking device 524, 527 687 marking information as private 516 marking message status 398 masking private entries 515, 517, 518 math calculators 31 Maximum Message Size option 350, 372 MCI connections 599 Media application adding photo to contact 133 benefits of 192, 218 displaying photos or videos 194, 221 opening 194 organizing photos and videos 205 overview 192 related topics for 217, 223 media file types 193 Media icon 30, 651 meeting invitations 430 memory available for Palm OS programs 81 freeing 127, 472, 637 purging calendar events 172 synchronization and 82, 98 memory button (Calculator) 510 memory cards 622 memory clear button (Calculator) 510 memory recall button (Calculator) 510 memos See also notes; Memos application adding contact information to 140, 260 backing up 33 creating 260 deleting 263 displaying 261 editing 261, 262 keeping private 515, 516 LifeDrive from palmOne organizing 262, 538 recording voice 275 saving 260, 263 selecting 50 sending as attachments 265, 404 transferring to PCs 262 Memos application categorizing information in 538 getting help with 264 importing information for 121 marking entries as private 516 opening 31, 260 overview 259 related topics for 265 reordering memos lists 262 selecting memos 261 transferring information to 74 troubleshooting 265, 650 writing memos with 260 Memos icon 31 Memos list 260, 261, 262 menu bar 52 Menu icon 639 menu shortcuts 53 menus 51, 52 menus icon 26 Message text option 392 messages See also email; text messages automatically resending 375 connection types for 312 displaying unread 173, 182 downloading large 401 receiving 312, 437 removing confirmation 272 sending plain text 350 setting alarms for 555 Microsoft Excel spreadsheets See Excel spreadsheets Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account setup 420–427 deleting accounts for 434 getting calendar events 428, 433 getting messages 428 meeting invitations and 430 Microsoft Exchange Server and 337 overview 419 prerequisites for 419 previewing attachments 430 synchronizing events and 434 time zones and 433 Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 419 Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 See also web browser application Microsoft Office Manager See Documents application Microsoft Outlook See Outlook Microsoft Windows systems See Windows information Microsoft Word documents 188, 189, 190 missing applications 30, 639 missing icons 639 MJPEG+ADPCM files 193 MJPEG+PCM files 193 MJPEG4+ADPCM files 193 mobile devices 136, 142 See also LifeDrive mobile manager mobile phones accessing Internet with 312 attaching modems to 589 688 compatibility 316 connecting to 312, 315, 321, 596, 654 connecting to Internet from 321 creating trusted pairs for 315, 653 dialing 144, 145, 477 key exchanges and 330 passkeys and 317, 653 requirements for 147 Modem Wait option 413 modems connecting to IR port from 589 initialization strings for 413, 595 setting up connections for 594, 598 Money category 538 See also currency Month View 166, 178, 180, 183 Month View icon 178 month, setting 548, 575 monthly events 156 monthly schedules 178 monthly tasks 248, 250 moving bookmarks 458 files 94 messages 386, 387 photos 207 videos 207 web pages 453 moving around dialog boxes 50 moving the slider 29 moving through documentation xxi moving through screens 47 moving through web pages 451 MP3 files transferring with Rhapsody 226 LifeDrive from palmOne MP3 players 224 MPA files 121 MPEG-1 files 193 multi-connector 24 multiday events 159 multiline descriptions 152 multimedia applications See Media application multimedia file types 193 MultiMediaCard expansion cards 614 music See also music files, Pocket Tunes, Rhapsody changing playlists for 236 deleting playlists for 238 listening to 24, 226 playing 232, 235, 652 removing from playlists 237 selecting 235 storing 614 music applications 224 music files See also music music player See Pocket Tunes N names See usernames; contacts naming connections 594 email accounts 355, 424 expansion cards 620 LifeDrive mobile device 314 photo albums 206 playlists 234 user profiles 12, 13 video album 206 navigating through documentation xxi navigating through web pages 451 navigational controls 29 navigator 20, 29, 47–51 negative numbers 510 Network pick list 292, 304 Network Preferences screen 597, 600, 601, 603, 604 network settings 597–607 networks accessing accounts for 317 accessing corporate 338 accessing email from 312 closing connections for 600 connecting to 317, 327, 600 corporate email accounts and 337, 338 creating login scripts for 604–606 customizing connections for 594, 597 deleting service profiles for 603 dialing in to 589 losing connections to 636 selecting communications protocol for 602 selecting encryption settings for 294 setting IP addresses for 602 setting up service profiles for 597, 598 specifying as trusted device 328 synchronizing over 99 wireless connections for 290, 292 New events use time zones setting 162 new lines 260 New Profile screen 12, 13 next arrow icon 29 No-time icon 174 689 Note Pad See also notes backing up information in 33 categorizing information in 538, 542 clearing 267 creating notes from 267 deleting notes in 272 displaying notes in 271 getting help with 273, 274 opening 31 overview 266 related topics for 274 selecting pens 268 setting color preferences 268 troubleshooting 651 Note Pad icon 31 notes See also memos; Note Pad attaching alarms to 269 attaching to email 274 backing up 33 categorizing 267, 538 creating 267 deleting 272 editing 267, 271 marking as private 267, 274, 515 playing voice memo 275 saving 267 selecting 50, 271 sending as attachments 404 setting background colors for 268 sorting 271 notification options (email) 368, 381 number formats 508, 576, 577 number keyboard 28 LifeDrive from palmOne number keyboard icon 28 numbers See also phone numbers adding to entry fields 63, 72 entering on calculator 510 O off-line viewing 459, 461, 462 Office files 188–190 See also specific program files omitting passkeys 315 omitting passwords 598 Online Troubleshooting Guide 641 onscreen keyboards See keyboards opening applications 39, 104, 570, 617 Applications View 26 Calendar views 152, 177, 178, 179 Category pick list 182, 617 Favorites View 26 files 94, 190, 463 photo albums 206 web browser 459, 462 operating systems 2 Optimized view (web browser) 452 optional information xxii options 29 order forms 469 organizing applications 55, 538 information 55, 537 orientation of screen 27 Outbox 376, 381, 382 Outbox icons 382 outgoing mail options 358 outgoing mail servers 337, 347, 355 Outlook applications that synchronize 98 marking completed tasks and 252 synchronizing with 10, 112, 128, 153, 642, 643 Overdue task icon 174 overdue tasks 173, 182, 251, 256 overlapping events 180 owner information 586 Owner Preferences screen 586 P page icons (web browser) 458 Page Info command 450 pager 136 paging through documentation xxi Palm Desktop Installer icon 7 Palm Desktop software completing repeated tasks and 252 creating user profiles from 12, 13 described 2, 33 entering information in 105, 106 importing information to 121, 123 installing 3, 7, 32 opening applications in 104, 106 requiring password entry for 520 restoring archived items to 123 synchronizing with 10, 162, 642 system requirements for 2 time zones and 650 troubleshooting 633 uninstalling 128 upgrading device and 7 Palm Dialer software See Dialer application 690 Palm OS applications 38 Palm OS handhelds exchanging records with 486 sharing notes with 274 palmOne technical support 17 palmOne website 34 paper clip icon 400 parts (device) 2 passkeys 317, 325, 328, 330, 653 passphrases (encryption) 296 Password check box 355, 425 passwords Bluetooth devices and 317, 325 changing 520 creating 518, 519, 524 deleting 523 displaying web pages and 449 email accounts and 337 encryption protocol for 336 entering 319, 355, 425, 598, 601 forgetting 523 locking device with 524, 586 losing 524 network connections and 328 omitting 598 requiring 520 security options for 515 troubleshooting 658 validating 362 Paste command 77 Paste icon 53 pasting information 77, 511 patches 127 PCs See computers PDF files 34 LifeDrive from palmOne Peer-to-Peer (ad hoc) setting 308 pen 268 Pen selector 267 pen widths 267 percentage button (Calculator) 510 performance 624 period (.) character 579 peripheral devices See external devices personal computers See computers personal information 470, 518 personalizing contact information 137 personalizing LifeDrive mobile manager See customizing; preferences phone 330, 589, 594 See also conference calls; mobile phones; phone numbers phone connections 315–319 phone drivers 589 Phone Link Updater application 315 Phone Lookup 74, 140 phone number fields 136 phone numbers adding speed dial entries for 481 dialing 478, 480, 482 dialing from email message 393 entering 478, 480, 482, 601 getting from contacts 74, 136, 140 organizing emergency 538 redialing 479 sharing 21 temporary storage for 266 phone settings (service profiles) 598 Phone Setup dialog box 315 photo albums arranging photos in 207, 209 creating 206 moving photos in 207 moving photos to other 208 scrolling through 203 selecting 206 Photo Details screen 203 photos adding notes to 203 adding to albums 206 adding to contacts 133 adjusting fade setting for 560, 564 copying 214, 216, 495 deleting 206 moving 207 personalizing 210 previewing 194 reformatting 84, 193 selecting 50 selecting as backgrounds 182, 560, 564 sending as attachments 404 sharing 117, 216 sorting 209 storing 614 supported file types for 193 viewing 194, 221 viewing details of 202, 203 Photos application See Media application pick lists 29 Picture box 133 plain text messages 350 playing back video clips 196 playing music 232, 235, 652 See also music playlists creating 233 691 deleting songs on 237 editing 236 naming 234 removing 238 reordering music on 237 selecting music from 235 troubleshooting 653 plug-in applications 607 Pocket Tunes application compatible formats for 226 desktop companion for 35 getting help with 232 opening 31, 232 overview 224 troubleshooting 652 Pocket Tunes icon 31 POP protocol 346, 354 POP servers 337, 347, 355, 398 Port Number option 357, 358, 427 portable keyboards 261 portrait view 27 ports 21 Post Office Protocol (POP) 346, 354 See also POP servers power adapter See AC charger power consumption options 587 power preferences 587–588 Power Preferences screen 587 power switch 21, 25 power-saving settings 587, 588 PowerPoint files 189, 190 PPT files 189 PRC applications 607 precautions 625, 635, 671 predefined service profiles 601 LifeDrive from palmOne preferences 191, 445, 558, 612 See also customizing Preferences command 184 Preferences screen 32 Prefs icon 32 preinstalled applications 30, 127 prerequisites xxiii preset connections 589, 592 preset delays 526 preset formats 576 previous arrow icon 29 Previous View icon (Adobe Reader) xxi primary location 547, 548, 553, 556 printers 290 printing expense reports 32 prioritizing tasks 245, 256 privacy FAQs 658 privacy levels 517 privacy settings applications 55 calendar 168 information 515 notes 274 records 515 web pages 470 Private check box 516 profiles 11–16 program memory See memory programs See software; applications projectors 290 Prompt command 606 prompts 605 protecting information 514, 516, 524, 614 protecting mobile device 313, 317, 624 protocol (defined) 346, 354 Protocol pick list 355 proxy servers 473, 474 Proxy Settings dialog box 474 punctuation marks 61, 64 Punctuation Shift indicator 68 Punctuation Shift stroke 68 Purge Categories dialog box 505 Purge command 172, 254, 505 Purge dialog box 172, 254 purging items 637 Q quarterly tasks 249 Query DNS check box 602 questions and answers 633 quick buttons location of 20 opening applications from 30 reassigning 570 restoring defaults for 570 Quick Erase 628 Quick Install software 117, 645 Quick Look Up icon 140 Quick Look Up line 140 Quick Tour 6, 31 R radio 23, 34 range (peripheral connections) 313 Read pick list 384 reading email 373 text messages 440, 442 Real Rhapsody See Rhapsody 692 RealOne Player See Pocket Tunes; Rhapsody reassigning quick buttons 570 reboots See resetting LifeDrive mobile manager Receipt Details dialog box 500 receiving email 320, 335, 339, 363 receiving messages 312, 437 recently visited web pages 451 recharging battery 4, 5, 588, 635 recipes 263 Recipient List screen 378, 379 Record menu 492 recording voice memos 22, 276 records 127, 627 recovering memory 637 recurring events 152 redialing phone numbers 479 related items, categorizing 538 related topics xxii Remember Last Category check box 563 reminders See also alarms canceling 555 creating 266, 275 scheduling 134, 152 setting alarms as 554 specifying notes as 269 Reminders screen 368, 381 remote access accounts 597 remote connections 412 remote devices 331 remote servers 473, 597 removable drives 94 LifeDrive from palmOne removing ActiveSync accounts 434 applications 127, 622 appointments 170 bookmarks 456 categories 540 confirmation messages 272 connections 589, 592 contacts 141 desktop software 7 email 393, 394, 396, 414 email accounts 361 email filters 411 events 170–172, 540 expansion cards 615 expense items 504, 505 files from device 123 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 583 information 78, 123, 524, 622, 637 locations 553 mail folders 388 memos 263 notes 272 Palm Desktop software 128 passwords 523 photos 206 playlists 238 private entries 523 repeating tasks 253 saved web pages 456 selection highlight 47, 49 service profiles 603 songs 237 tasks 253–254 Rename Card dialog box 620 Rename Custom Fields dialog box 137 renaming categories 539 expansion cards 620 mail folders 388 preset connections 589 web pages 462 Repeat icon 175 repeat intervals calendar 156, 159 tasks 248, 250 repeating events changing 169 deleting 170, 171 displaying 183 scheduling 156, 157 repeating tasks 247, 249, 252, 253 Reply To Address option 392 replying to email 390 required steps xxii rescheduling events 168–169 resending messages 375 reserving dates 154 reset button 24, 626, 627 resetting clock 548, 574 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 583 LifeDrive mobile device 524 LifeDrive mobile manager 24, 626, 636 local preferences 572, 574 passwords 520 preset connections 589 preset formats 576 quick buttons 570 693 screen fonts 566 server profiles 598 resizing text 261 restarting device See reset button restoring archived items 123 defaults 570 information 523, 524, 630 restricting device connections 313 restrictions 625, 635 retrying Auto Sync 369 email delivery 381 Internet connections 460 Rhapsody application getting help with 242 installing 35 setting up music files for 225 transferring music with 226 right arrow controls 29 rotary dialing 594 rotating the screen 27 running out of memory 127 running out of space 614 S Save Page command 462 Save Page dialog box 462 saved web pages 455, 456, 457, 462 saving appointments 153 attachments 403 battery power 587 contacts 134, 141 files 461 LifeDrive from palmOne information 46, 123, 640 memos 260, 263 notes 267 synchronization settings 116 tasks 245, 253, 254 web cookies 470 web pages 462 scheduled sending retry (email) 338 schedules 151, 173, 182, 572 See also appointments; calendar scheduling appointments 152–153 Auto Sync 365, 366, 369 backup and synchronization 8, 98 events 152, 154, 159, 184 reminders 134, 152 repeating tasks 247, 249 untimed events 155 scheduling conflicts 151 screen adding photos as backgrounds 182, 560, 564 adjusting brightness 565 aligning 584 blank 637 caring for 624 caution for 21 changing colors of 568 changing fonts for 565–566 clearing 267 frozen 626, 636 landscape and portrait views 27 moving through 20, 47 navigational controls for 29 not responding 626, 636 overview 28 scrolling through 29 tapping elements on 28, 584 viewing information on 20 screen rotation 27 Screen rotation button 22, 27 scripts 607 scroll bar 29 scrolling Applications View 49 from screen-to-screen 29 in dialog boxes 50 menus 51 to dates 152 SD memory cards 614 SDIO accessories 614 SDIO cards 614 searching for information 54, 140 searching web pages 450 secondary locations 550, 553, 556 secure connections 418 Secure Digital input/output (SDIO) 614 Secure Erase 628 Secure Sockets Layer See SSL connections security 317, 468, 598 security information (Wi-Fi) 292 security levels 515 security options See also encryption; passwords; privacy settings device 515 records 515 wireless connections 294, 306 Security pick list 294, 306 694 Security Preferences dialog box 517, 519, 520, 586 Select a Color Theme dialog box 561, 568, 569, 578 Select button (navigator) 51 Select Colors dialog box 268 Select Font dialog box 384, 566 Select User dialog box 8, 100 selecting alarm sounds 555 alternate stroke shapes 579 background colors 268, 568 clock display options 556 command buttons 29 communications protocol 602 connections 598 currency options 500, 501, 502 information 20, 76 Internet Service Providers (ISPs) 598 items in lists 29, 50 menu commands 51, 52, 53 options in dialog boxes 50 security levels 515 synchronization settings 99 selection highlight 49 self-help resources 664 Send command 606 Send CR command 606 Send email from Outbox option 350 Send Password command 606 send retry failures 381, 382 Send to Handheld dialog box 118 Send To Handheld droplet 33, 118 Send User ID command 606 sending LifeDrive from palmOne email 320, 372, 376, 464 text messages 312, 436, 437 server preferences 474 servers 473 service (defined) 321 Service Connection Progress messages 600 Service pick list 321, 598, 601 service profiles deleting 603 selecting 600 setting up 597, 598, 601 service templates 597 services 321, 589, 605 Set Alarm dialog box 246, 270 Set as default check box 114 Set Country dialog box 577 Set Date & Time button 548 Set Date dialog box 548, 575 Set Time dialog box 153, 549, 575 setting up email accounts 354–358 setting up LifeDrive mobile manager 1, 6, 7 setting up Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts 420–427 setting up wireless connections 292–297, 311 settings See preferences setup 633 Setup Devices option 322 sharing files 290, 312 information 21, 133, 485, 495 photos 117, 216 videos 216 sharing FAQs 659 Short header option 415 Short Message Service (SMS) 437 short messages 436 ShortCut strokes (Graffiti 2 writing) backing up 581 changing 583 deleting 583 described 70–71 setting up 581 ShortCut Text line 582 shortcuts xxiii, 29, 53, 77, 571 ShortCuts Preferences screen 581, 583 Show Address Bar check box 448 Show History command 511 Show in List pick list 142 Show Multiple Locations setting 556 Show Private Records dialog box 518 side panel controls 21, 22 sidebars (documentation) xxiii signal strength (wireless connections) 26, 291 signal strength indicator 26 Signature dialog box 380 signatures 380 Silent profile settings 585 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol See SMTP servers sketching 266 slide shows 194, 198, 207 slider 29 small fonts 566, 567 small icons 563 small triangle (bookmarks) 455 Smart Addressing feature 377 SMS application See also text messages 695 benefits of 436 installing 31 opening 437 related topics for 445 sending text messages 437 SMS messaging 31, 437 SMTP servers 347, 355, 362 Snooze setting 555 soft resets 626, 636 software See also specific application accessing additional 17 adding additional 124, 614 included on device 30 installing 7, 32, 124 third-party applications and 8 Solitaire 32 song files See music files song lists See also music creating 233 deleting 238 editing 236 naming 234 removing items on 237 reordering music on 237 selecting items 235 troubleshooting 653 Sort by date option 209 Sort by name option 209 Sort by pick list 271 Sort by type option 209 Sort manually option 209 Sort order option 384 sorting LifeDrive from palmOne expenses 506 memos 538 notes 271 photos 209 videos 209 sound files See audio files sounds changing alarm 269 setting alarm 167, 185, 256, 555 setting preferences for 585 Sounds & Alerts screen 585 space characters 581, 598 space information (device) 126 hard drive 81 memory full warning 637 program memory 81 speaker 23, 282, 585 Speaker icon 282 special characters 61, 68, 69 specifications 668 speed (communications) 589, 591, 595 Speed Dial screen 481, 483 Speed pick list 591, 595 speed-dial buttons 481 spreadsheets displaying 189 email messages and 334 importing information from 121 managing files for 188 opening 190 sending information to 499 square root button (Calculator) 510 SSL connections 352, 357, 358, 418, 427 start page (web browser) 465, 467 Start with pick list 467 starting HotSync Manager 31, 109 locked devices 524 Outlook applications 112 static electricity 625, 670–671 status bar icon descriptions 26 status icons (Wi-Fi) 291 stereo headphones 24 stopping download operations 461 information searches 54 Internet connections 460 MP3 player 232 storage 613, 614 See hard drive storing device names 331 stylus 6, 21, 60, 210, 624 Subject fields 376 subject lines (email) 363, 376 supported file types 193, 226 switching between applications 10, 46, 617, 642 symbols 68, 69, 72, 132 Sync IMAP Folders screen 418 sync items (LifeDrive Manager) 85, 98 synchronization See also synchronizing customizing settings for 107–116 defined 8, 82 Drive Mode and 94 entering information and 104 installing applications and 117 related topics for 17 third-party applications and 8 696 troubleshooting 641–646, 648 upgrades and 4 usernames and 100, 340 synchronization options 98, 99, 107 synchronization software 10, 111, 128, 642 Synchronize incoming email setting 351 Synchronize unread mail only setting 350 synchronizing See also HotSync Manager applications 111, 644 caution for 128 IMAP mail folders 416, 417, 418 information 99, 641 LifeDrive mobile device 523 LifeDrive mobile manager 85 over networks 99 wirelessly 312, 322 with IR port 99 with LifeDrive Manager 101 with Microsoft Outlook 10, 112, 128, 642, 643 with user profiles 11, 14, 16 system information, icon on status bar 26 system requirements 2 System Sound pick list 585 T Tap and Drag scrolling 453 tapping application titles 52 arrow icons 29 check boxes 29 command buttons 29 entry boxes 29 menu items 52 LifeDrive from palmOne problems with 626, 636, 639 screen elements 28, 584 URLs 459 Task Preferences dialog box 246, 255 tasks See also Tasks application adding contact information to 140 adding notes to 245 adding to Tasks list 255 archiving 253, 254 assigning due dates to 245, 246, 250 categorizing 245, 251, 256 changing date due 256 combining with appointments 151 completing 252 creating 245 deleting 253–254 displaying 173, 182, 251, 255, 256 entering from Outlook 10, 642 managing 244 marking as private 245 organizing 251 prioritizing 245, 256 reordering 256 saving 245, 253, 254 scheduling repeating 247, 249 sending as attachments 404 setting alarms for 246, 256 setting repeat intervals for 248, 250 viewing due dates for 256 viewing overdue 256 Tasks application adding tasks 245, 247, 249 categorizing information in 538 getting help with 257 importing information for 121 marking completed tasks 252 opening 31, 245 overview 244 related topics for 258 saving information for 254 saving information in 245 securing contents 515 setting display options for 251 setting preferences for 255–256 transferring information to 74 troubleshooting 258, 653 Tasks icon 31 Tasks list 173, 251, 253, 255 TDA files 121 technical assistance xxiii, 17, 191, 243, 665 Technical Support office 665 technical terms xxiii telephone numbers See phone numbers testing email accounts 358 text adjusting fade setting for 560, 564 changing color of 182, 568 changing screen fonts for 565 entering 57, 72 entering abbreviations for 581, 582 finding on web pages 450 resizing 261 searching for 54 selecting 54, 76 viewing against photos 182 text files 121 text messages See also SMS application managing 31 697 opening 440 sending 312, 436, 437 viewing 440, 441, 442, 444 third-party applications 8, 637, 661 thousands separator 577 Thumbnail view (Media) 194 thumbnails (photos) 182, 560, 564 TIFF files 193 time blocking out periods of 156, 159 changing 548 checking 547 displaying current 550 displaying free 182 displaying specific periods of 182 entering current 70 entering display options for 184 incorrect 638 resetting 168, 572, 574 scheduling 153 scheduling periods of 153 setting current 575 setting for alarms 167, 247, 270, 554 setting location-specific 32, 548, 572 unscheduled events and 155 time bars 182 time formats 576, 577 Time Zone entry box 552 time zone pick list 163 time zones adding locations and 551 automatically including 162 changing 552, 572, 573 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync and 433 LifeDrive from palmOne Microsoft Outlook and 153 Palm Desktop software and 650 primary locations and 162 scheduling events and 162, 549, 650 secondary locations and 550 selecting 163 timed events 183 timeout intervals 412 Timeout option 412 tips xxiii, 17, 29 Tips icon 29 to do lists 244 See also tasks; Tasks application toolbars 53 top arrow controls 29 top panel controls 21, 22 full sync p 98 Touchscreen Preferences screen 584 touchscreen See screen TouchTone dialing 594 tracking expenses 32, 497 transfer options 631 transferring applications 33, 34 existing account settings 341 files 34, 94, 121 information 21, 74, 98, 121 wirelessly 290, 312 Trash folder 396, 397 travel expenses 506 travel guides 614 troubleshooting 8, 584, 633 trusted connections 328 Trusted Devices option 329 trusted pairs 312, 313, 315, 329 turning device on and off 588 turning off alarms 555 turning off HotSync Manager 109 turning sounds off 585 Tutorial 35 U underlined links 451 underlined words (documentation) xxii Undo icon 53 Unfiled category 539 unfreezing device 626, 627 uniform resource locators See URLs uninstalling applications 637 Palm Desktop software 128 unread email messages 173, 182, 398 Unread pick list 384 unrecognized devices 313 unscheduled events 155 unscheduled time slots 182 untimed events 134, 154, 155, 159, 183 up arrow controls 29 updating information 98, 111 owner information 586 third-party applications 8 upgrades (device) 4, 7 upgrading email accounts 335 uppercase letters 60, 61 URL (defined) 447 URLs accessing web pages with 447, 448 auto-completion option for 469 changing 454, 456 698 displaying 450 opening Internet connections with 460 selecting in email messages 393 tapping 459 USB connectors 24 USB port 8 USB sync cable charging device and 24 custom connections and 594 device setup and 4, 6, 8 disconnecting 641 synchronizing and 9, 14, 99, 100, 641 transferring files and 647 transferring information and 86, 88, 95 Use calling card check box 599 Use proxy check box 474 Use Secure Connection option 352, 357, 358, 427 Use short preamble box 309 user profiles 11–16 user-specific information 11 usernames assigning to device 11 dial-up accounts and 319 email accounts and 335, 337 email addresses and 598 hard resets and 627 network connections and 328 searching for 140 service profiles and 601 synchronization and 100, 340 upgrades and 7 validating 362 Users folder 128 LifeDrive from palmOne V vacations 159 validating usernames and passwords 362 VCF files 121 VCS files 121 VersaMail application getting email 335, 339 icons for 382 installing 31 related topics for 435 setting notification options 381 setting preferences for 406 troubleshooting 435 VersaMail icon 31 version numbers 125, 127 video albums 206, 207 videos See also Media application adding notes to 203 copying 216, 495 displaying details of 203 moving 207 playing 196 previewing 194 reformatting 84, 193 sending as attachments 404 sharing 216 sorting 209 supported file types for 193 viewing 194, 221 View Bookmarks command 455 View By pick list 563 viewer (web pages) 462 viewing application groups 541 applications 40, 544 appointments 173, 176, 177, 178 bookmarks 455 contact information 137, 142 current date and time 547, 550 email attachments 462 events 166, 183, 184 Excel spreadsheets 189 expense reports 32 files on hard drive 189 hidden or masked entries 518 images 193, 463 information 544 memos 261 notes 271 personal calendars 151 photos 193, 194, 221 schedules 173, 175, 177, 178 slide shows 198 tasks 173, 182, 251, 255, 256 unread messages 173, 182 URLs 450 videos 194, 221 web pages 447, 448, 449, 452, 463 Word documents 189 World Clock 32, 556 views (Calendar) 175, 177, 178, 179 views (multimedia files) 194 virtual private networks See VPN accounts virus-scanning software 633 Voice Memo application opening 276, 278 overview 275 playing messages from 281 related topics for 288 699 saving memos from 285 setting alarms 283 troubleshooting 288 Voice Memo button 31, 276 Voice Memo list 281 voice memos 22, 276 See also Voice Memo application sending as attachments 404 volume adjusting alarm 555, 585 adjusting modem 594 adjusting speaker 282 disabling speaker 585 Volume setting (connections) 594 VPN accounts 338, 608 VPN connections 337, 338, 610, 611 W Wait For command 605 Wait For Prompt command 605 warnings 637, 669 warranty 635 web addresses 447, 469 See also URLs web browser application accessing web pages with 447–449 action bar icons for 451 adding bookmarks with 454 arranging bookmarks and saved pages with 457–458 automatically completing URLs and 447, 469 benefits of 446 changing display views with 452 changing home page for 465–466 LifeDrive from palmOne closing Internet connections and 459, 461 download options for 461, 468 editing bookmarks with 456 freeing memory for 472 getting help with 476 moving through web pages with 451 opening 459, 462 opening Bookmarks View for 455 related topics for 476 saving web pages with 462 searching with 450 sending email with 464 setting preferences for 468–475 specifying start page for 467 web browser icon 463 web browsers 2 See also web browser application Web icon 31 web pages accessing 447, 448, 449 bookmarking favorites 448, 454 changing bookmarks for 454 changing display options for 452–453 clearing cache for 472 disabling cookies for 470 disabling JavaScript for 475 displaying saved 463 downloading 461 editing bookmarks for 456 finding information on 450 hiding address fields for 448 loading from email 393 loading last viewed 467 moving large 453 navigating 451 opening saved 455 removing images and 468 renaming saved 462 returning to recently visited 451 saving 462 selecting bookmarks for 455 setting autofill option for 469 specifying as home 465 specifying as start 467 viewing off-line 459, 461, 462 viewing URLs for 450 Web Pro application See web browser application web services 589 web viewer 462 websites See also web browser application accessing 290, 302, 312, 320, 446, 448 as additional resource xxiii, 17 browsing 31, 312, 320, 447 palmOne enterprise 34 palmOne technical support 17 saving personal information for 470 setting browsing options for 468, 469, 470, 473, 475 week days 577 Week View 177, 180, 184 Week View icon 177 weekly events 156 weekly schedules 177, 180 weekly tasks 248, 250 WEP encryption 292, 294, 295, 307 WEP key See encryption keys Whole Page view (web browser) 452 700 Wi-Fi access points 290, 297 Wi-Fi controls 26 Wi-Fi devices 290, 292 Wi-Fi dialog box 26 Wi-Fi icon 291 Wi-Fi networks 23 Wi-Fi pick list 292 Wi-Fi technology 290 Wi-Fi wireless connections accessing email with 302 benefits of 289, 290 browsing the web with 302, 446 checking status of 291 device-to-device networking and 304 prerequisites for 292 related topics for 310 setting up 292–297 Windows applications 104 Windows information creating contacts 149 creating login scripts 604 creating notes 273 creating user profiles 12 described xxii device system requirements 2 displaying tasks 257 enabling Drive Mode 96 entering expense reports 507 importing 121 installing device software 7, 33, 124 opening calendars 186 restoring information 630 synchronization options for 10, 108, 112, 642 synchronizing with user profiles 14 LifeDrive from palmOne transferring files 94 troubleshooting problems 633 writing memos 264 Windows Media Player 35 See also Rhapsody application wireless carriers 312 wireless connections 289, 311, 437 See also Wi-Fi wireless connections; Bluetooth devices wireless service providers 597 wireless synchronization 99, 290, 312, 322, 416 Word documents 188, 189, 190 word searches 54 word selection 76 World Clock benefits of 546 changing display for 556 changing locations list for 551 displaying 32 icon 32 selecting primary location for 572 setting alarms for 554 setting alarms with 167, 554 World Clock icon 547 WPA-PSK encryption 292, 294, 296 writing area 20, 28, 58 writing in your own handwriting 266 writing tool 21, 624 writing with Graffiti 2 characters 57, 70 Y Year View 179 year, selecting 548, 575 yearly events 156 yearly tasks 248, 250 Z ZIP files 646 X XLS files 189 701
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : Yes Author : Palm, Inc. Create Date : 2005:05:04 09:16:42Z Keywords : lifedrive, lifedrive Modify Date : 2012:12:01 04:13:11+01:00 Subject : Final 5/4/05 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Format : application/pdf Creator : Palm, Inc. Description : Final 5/4/05 Title : LifeDrive User Guide Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.0 Metadata Date : 2012:12:01 04:13:11+01:00 Producer : Ovis Pdf-Office by UNIVERSE Software Document ID : uuid:4df11658-1e3b-7c45-b467-ca67bec40b76 Instance ID : uuid:1dd1035d-24bc-4a4a-b709-fc3a6924ff75 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 724EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools